Opel Vectra C Manual

Document Sample
Opel Vectra C Manual Powered By Docstoc
					VAUXHALL Vectra




    Owner’s Manual
Data specific to your ve hicle
Please enter your vehicle’s data here to keep it ea sily accessible.
This information is available under the section "Technical da ta " as well as on the identification plate.

Fuel
                 Desi gnation



Engine oil
                 Grad e

                 Viscosity



Tyre inflation pressure
                                      Tyre si ze                         wi th up to 3 persons                   wi th full load
                 Sum mer tyres                                 Front               R ear                 Front             R ea r


                 Winter tyres                                  Front               R ear                 Front             R ea r


Weights
Permissible gross vehicle weig ht


–                EC k erb weight

=                Loading


Lev el control

                 Bump er H eig ht                              see page 179

0
Your Ve ctra
Dev eloped to the la test findings of vehic le research, it offers technical sophistication and exceptiona l comfort.
Your vehicle represents an ideal synthesis of ad vanced technolog y, outsta nding safety, environm ental compatibility and economy in
opera tion.
It now lies with you to drive your vehicle safely and to see it performs perfectly.
This O wner's Manual provides you with all the necessary information to tha t end.
The O wner's Manual should a lways be kept in the v ehicle: ready to hand in the g lov e com partment.

Make use of the Owne r's Manual:
z   Its “I n brief” section will giv e y ou an initial ov erview.
z   Its index will help you find what y ou want.
z   It will familiarize you with the sophisticated technology.
z   It will increase your pleasure in y our vehicle.
z   It will help you to handle y our v ehicle ex pertly.
The O wner's Manual is designed to be clearly laid-out and easily understood.
This symb ol:
6 signifies: continue reading on next page.
3 The asterisk sig nifies equipment op tions not in all vehicles (model variants, engine options, models specific to one country, op tional
  equipment, Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories).


 Text highlighted in yellow in p artic ular indica tes possible risk of accident and
 injury. Disregard of these notes can lead to injuries which may b e fatal. Vehicle
 passengers must b e informed accordingly.


Yellow arrows in the illustrations serve as points of reference or ind icate some action to be performed.
Black arrow s in the illustrations indicate a reaction or a second ac tion to be perform ed.




We w ish you m any hours of pleasurable driving
Your Va uxhall team


                                                                                                                                              1
2
Contents   Comm itment to custom er
           satisfaction:
                                                          In b rief .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... . 4
                                                          Instrum ents ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 33
           Our ai m: to k eep you happy with your         K eys, doors, b onnet .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 54
           vehicle. All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers     S eats, Interior ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 69
           offer first class service at competitive       S afety system s .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 94
           prices. Experienced, factory-trained           Lighting ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 116
           technicians w ork according to factory         Windows, sun roof . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 120
           instructions.Your Authorised Repairer can
                                                          C lim ate c ontrol .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 126
           supply you with GEN UINE VAU XHALL-
                                                          Automatic transm ission . .... ..... .... ..... .... 144
           APPRO VED PARTS , which hav e und ergone
           stringent quality and precision chec ks, and   C VTronic ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 150
           of course useful and a ttrac tiv e             Driving hints .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 158
           VAUXHALL-APPROVED AC CESSO RIES.               S ave fuel, protec t the env ironment .... 160
           Our nam e i s your guara ntee!                 Fuel consum ption, fuel, refuelling ... .... 162
           For d eta ils of the                           C atalytic converter, exhaust gases .... 164
           Va uxhall Authorised Rep airer Netw ork        Drive control system s ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 168
           please r ing this number; 01582 - 427200       Brakes ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 180
                                                          Wheels, tyres . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 184
                                                          Roof racks,
                                                              caravan and tra iler towing . .... ..... .... 188
                                                          S elf-help .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 199
                                                          If y ou ha ve a problem .... .... ..... .... ..... .... 232
                                                          Maintenance, Inspec tion system .... .... 234
                                                          Vehicle care .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 245
                                                          Technical data .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 250
                                                          Index . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 282




                                                                                                                                        3
In brief




           Key num be rs,                                  Unlock vehicle :
           Code numbers                                    P ress button q or
           Remove key number from keys.                    turn ke y in driver’s side door lock,
                                                           pull door handle
           The key number is specified in the vehic le
                                                           O nce      =    Driv er’s door is unlock ed.
           docum ents and in the C ar Pass 3.
                                                           Twice      =    Entire v ehicle is unlocked.
           Alloy wheels 3, towing equipment 3: m ake                       The luggage
           a note of the key identifier cod es.                            compartment is
           Elec tronic imm obiliser, Radio 3 : the cod e                   autom atically reloc ked
           numb ers are specified in the Car Pass and                      after 5 minutes.
           Radio Pass 3 respec tiv ely.                    6 Door lock s, child sa fety lock –
           Do not keep the Car Pass and Ra dio Pass in     see page 54,
           the vehicle.                                    electronic immobiliser – see page 55,
                                                           radio frequency remote control –
           6 Further information – see p ages 54, 55,      see page 56,
           vehicle recomm issioning – see page 244.        central loc king sy stem – see page 58,
                                                           anti-theft locking system 3 – see p age 58,
                                                           Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 63.




4
Unlock luggage compartme nt:                     Front se at adjustment:                          Adjust front seat backrests:
Press button r on rem ote control or             Pull handle,                                     Turn handwheel
button x in the driver or                        slide seat,                                      Move seat bac krest to suit sea ting position.
passenger door                                   release handle,
                                                 allow se at to audibly latch                     Do not lea n on seat back rest whilst
The lug gage compartment is unlocked and
                                                 into pos ition                                   adjusting it.
can be opened within 5 minutes.
                                                 Nev er adjust the seat while driving. It could   6 Seat position – see p age 69,
If the luggage compartment is not opened
                                                 move in a n uncontrolled manner when the         electrically adjustable front seats –
within 5 m inutes, it is automatically loc ked
                                                 ha ndle is pulled.                               see page 79.
again.
                                                 6 Seat position – see page 69,
The lugga ge c om partment is automatically
                                                 electrica lly adjusta ble front seats –
locked 5 minutes after closing.
                                                 see p age 79.
6 Radio frequency rem ote control –
see page 56,
central lock ing – see page 58,                   Im porta nt : Do not sit nearer than 10
Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 63.
                                                  inches (25c m) from the steering wheel, to
                                                  permit safe airbag dep loy ment.




                                                                                                                                               5
Adjusting front se at lum bar support:    Adjusting front seat height 3:            Adjusting front s eat inclination 3:
Adjust leve r                             Operate lever on outboard side            Ope rate front lever on outboard side
Adjust lumb ar support to suit personal   of seat                                   of s eat
req uirements.                            Pump direction of the lever               Pump d irection of the lever
                                          Up:     Raises seat                       Up:      Inclines seat
Do not lean on sea t backrest whilst
                                          Dow n: Lowers seat                        Down: Lev els seat
adjusting it.
                                          6 Seat position – see page 69,            6 Seat position – see p age 69,
6 Seat position – see pag e 69,
                                          electrica lly adjusta ble front seats –   electrically adjustable front seats –
electrically a djustable front sea ts –
                                          see p age 79.                             see page 79.
see page 79.




6
Ele ctric seat adjustm ent 3 :            Adjusting head re straint height of        Adjusting head restraint angle of
Switch on outboard side of s eat          front and re ar outboard seats:            front and rear outboard se ats 3:
Front:                                    Pre ss button to release                   Swive l bottom edge of head restraint
– Longitudina l adjustment,               and adjust he ight,                        forward or rearward
– Height adjustment,                      engage in position                         6 Head restraint position – see pa ge 70,
– Angle adjustm ent.                      6 Head restraint position – see page 70,   rear head restra ints – see p age 70.
                                          rear head restraints – see page 70.
Middle:
– Backrest adjustment.
Rear 3:
– Lumbar support.
6 Seat position – see pag e 69,
electrically a djustable front sea ts –
see page 79.




                                                                                                                                 7
Adjusting interior m irror:                     Adjusting exterior m irrors:                     Swing in e xterior mirror:
Swivel mirror hous ing                          Four-way switch on driver’s door                 Manually: press lightly .
Swiv el lev er on underside of mirror housing   Press switch for left or right hand mirror:      Electric 3 (both mirror switches must not b e
to red uce daz zle a t nig ht.                  four-way switch operates the                     latched into position):
                                                corresp onding m irror.
Autom atic anti-dazzle interior mirror 3:                                                        Push four-way switch to the right: ex terior
Dazzle at night is automa tic ally red uced –   Vehicles with electric seat ad justment 3:       mirrors swiv el in.
see page 114.                                   if the mirror switch for the passenger side is
                                                depressed when reverse gear is engaged ,         Push four-way switch to the left: exterior
6 Position m emory 3 – see page 80.
                                                the passenger side ex terior mirror              mirrors swiv el out.
                                                repositions itself towards the rear tyres in     The mirrors can a lso be swivelled in from
                                                order to serve as mirror parking assistance      the outside: press button p on remote
                                                (not when tow ing a carav an / trailer).         control or turn key toward rear of v ehicle in
                                                Automatic anti-da zzle exterior mirror on        driver’s door lock and hold.
                                                the driver’s side 3: dazzle at night is          S wivelling only a llowed at speeds of up to
                                                autom atic ally reduc ed – see page 114.         4 mph (7 km /h).
                                                6 Further information, aspherical exterior
                                                mirror 3 – see pa ge 114,
                                                heated ex terior mirrors – see page 20,
                                                electric seat adjustment 3 – see page 79.




8
Fitting seat belt:                            Disengaging steering column lock:         Steering whee l adjustment 3:
Draw se at be lt smoothly                     To re lease the lock,                     Move lever down,
from inertia ree l,                           move the s te ering wheel slightly        adjust he ight and distance,
guide over shoulder                           and turn the key to position I            move lever up,
and engage in buckle                          Positions:                                engage
The b elt must not be twisted at any point.   0 = Ignition off                          Adjust steering wheel only when vehicle is
The lap belt must lie snugly against the      I = Steering free, ignition off           stationary and steering colum n loc k is
body. The backrest must not be tilted bac k   II = Ignition on,                         released.
too far (recomm ended tilting angle                 with diesel engine: pre-heat        6 Airb ag systems 3 – see page 100.
approx. 25°).                                 III = Start
To release belt, press red button on belt     6 Starting – see page 23,
buckle.                                       electronic im mobiliser – see pag e 55,
                                              remove key and loc k steering w heel –
6 Seat belts – see pa ges 95 to 99,
                                              see p age 24.
airbag sy stems 3 – see p age 100,
seat p osition – see page 69.




                                                                                                                                 9
10
                                                           Page                                                                 Pa ge                                                            Page
1   Side air v ents ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 129           10   Windscreen wiper and wa sh system,                               19 Heated seat (right) 3 . ..... .... ..... .... . 130
                                                                                 headlight wash system 3 and                                         Anti-theft alarm system 3 .. ..... .... .. 63
2   Front pa ssenger airbag .... .... ..... ... 100
                                                                                 rear window wash system 3 .. ..... .... 19                          Rear window blind 3 .. ..... .... ..... .... 125
3   Centre air v ents .... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 129                    Display op eration 3 . ..... ..... ..... ..... .... 48              Traction Control sy stem 3 .. ..... .... 168
4   Radio 3                                                                                                                                          Electronic Stability Program me 3 170
                                                                            11   Exterior lig hting ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 116
    or Infotainm ent system 3 . .... ..... .... . 52                             Instrument illumination ... ..... .... ..... 117                 20 Ashtray s ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 90
5   Central information display for                                              Fog tail lig ht .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 116   21 Telematics 3 .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 52
    date, time, outside temperature,                                             Front fog lights 3 ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 116
                                                                                 Head lig ht range adjustment 3 ..... 117                         22 C igarette lighter 3 .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 89
    Infotainm ent system 3,
    radio 3 ,                                                               12   Stowage compartment                                              23 Heating, ventilation,
    check control 3,                                                                                                                                 air conditioning sy stem 3 ... ..... .... 126
                                                                            13   Bonnet release lev er .... .... ..... .... ..... . 68
    trip computer 3,                                                                                                                                 Electronic air conditioning
    electronic air conditioning                                             14   Ignition lock                                                       system 3 ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 126
    system 3 . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 41             with steering wheel lock .. ..... .... ..... ... 9                  Auxiliary heating 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... 140
6   Turn signals, hea dlight fla sh,                                        15   Ac celera tor pedal .... .... .... ..... .... .... 158           24 Heated seat (left) 3 and
    dipped and main beam ... .... ..... 16, 17                                                                                                       seat climate control .... ..... .... ..... .... 130
                                                                            16   Brake peda l ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... 159, 180
    Door-to-door lighting 3 and                                                                                                                      Haz ard warning lights .... .... ..... .... .. 18
    parking lights .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 17            17   Steering wheel position adjuster .. ... 9                           Parking distance sensors 3 . ..... .... 174
    Cruise control 3 .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 172               18   Clutch ped al 3 .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 159         25 Glove compartment
7   Remote control 3 for radio a nd                                                                                                               26 Fusebox . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 212
    Infotainm ent system ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 30
8   Instruments .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 33
9   Horn .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 18




                                                                                                                                                                                                                 11
                                                                                                                                                                                                                 11
Control indicators             T   Autom atic t ransmission 3,              y   Seat occup ancy recog nition 3:
O     Turn sig na l light s:       CVTronic 3,                                  see page 105.
      see p ages 17, 33.           wi nter program me:
                                   see pages 147, 155.                      m   Cruise control 3 :
I     Oil p ressure:                                                            see page 172.
      see p age 33.            !   Glow plugs 3:
                                   see page 35.                             Y   Fuel level:
R     Brake system,                                                             see pages 36, 40, 199.
      clutch system:           u   Anti- lock Bra ke Syst em :
      see p ages 34, 181.          see page 183.                            Z   Exhaust emission 3:
                                                                                see pages 36, 166.
p     Alternator:              v   Tract ion Control system 3,
      see p age 34.                Elec tronic St abili ty Progr amme 3 :   B   Adapt ive Forward Lig hting
                                   see pages 168, 170.                          (AFL) 3:
v     Airbag systems,                                                           see pages 28, 118.
      bel t tensioners:        >   Front fog li ghts 3:
      see p ages 96, 105.          see pages 35, 116.                       g   Trailer turn signa l 3:
                                                                                see page 36.
W     Coolant t em perature:   r   Fog tai l light:
      see p ages 34, 40.           see pages 35, 116.

X     Sea t belt 3:            P   Mai n beam:
      see p age 35.                see pages 16, 35.




12
Display in tachometer                     F    Brak e pad w ea r indica tor 3:      >   Front fog lights 3 :
The following control ind ic ators will        see pages 38, 180.                       see page 116.
illuminate as necessa ry :
                                          S    Engine oil level:                    r   Fog tail l ight:
o      Imm obiliser:                           see pages 38, 236.                       see page 116.
       see p ages 37, 55, 166.
                                          H    Cool ant fluid lev el:               P   Main beam :
p      Electro-hydrauli c                      see pages 38, 239.                       see page 16.
       power assisted steering :
       see p age 37.                      v    Serv ice interval display:           O   Tur n sig nal lig hts:
                                               see page 234.                            see page 17.
q      Hea dlight range adjustm ent 3:
       see p age 117.                     x    Tyr e p ressure control system 3,    k   Instrument il luminati on:
                                               loss of pressure w arning from the       see page 117.
r      Pa rking d istance sensors 3:           respectiv e t yre:
       see p age 174.                          see pages 38, 176.                   ?   Hea dlight range adj ust ment 3:
                                                                                        see page 117.
A      Engine electronics,                w    Tyr e p ressure control system 3,
       transmission elec tronics 3:            fault :
                                                                                    b   Courtesy li ght:
       see p ages 37, 55, 166.                                                          see page 118.
                                               see pages 38, 176.
s      Open lugga ge compa rtment:                                                  c   Courtesy li ght deact ivat ion 3:
                                          y    Doors open 3,                            see page 118.
       see p ages 37, 61.                      indi cating the r especti ve door:
                                               see page 38.                         a   Reading li ghts, front 3 :
v      Airbag systems,
       bel t tensioners:                                                                see page 118.
       see p ages 96, 105.                Lighting
                                               Light swi tch, stal k positi ons:    ¨   Hazard w arning lig hts:
t      Bul b replacem ent 3:                   see pages 16, 116,                       see page 18.
       see p ages 38, 218.
                                          7    Lights off
                                          8    Park ing lig ht s
                                          9    Dipp ed and ma in beam




                                                                                                                            13
Climate control                         n    Air conditioning system 3:                 Sun roof 3
x    Air flow:                               see page 128.                              d    Sun roof:
     see p age 127.                                                                          closing – see page 123.
                                        4    Air reci rculati on system 3:
     Air distri bution:                      see page 128.                              ü    Sun roof:
     see p age 127,                                                                          opening – see p age 123.
                                        AUTOAutom atic m ode 3:
L    to head area ab ov e ad justable        see page 135.                              f    Sun roof:
     air vents and to footwell,                                                              comfort setting – see page 123.
M    to head area ab ov e               ß    Heated seats 3:
     adjustable air vents                    see page 130.                              e    Sun roof:
     front and rear 3,                                                                       raising – see page 123.
                                        A    Driv er’ s seat with clim ate control 3:
l    to wind screen,                         see page 130.
                                                                                        Windscreen wiper
J    to wind screen and                 b    Remote cont rol of auxiliary                    Stal k positi ons:
     to footwell,                            heating / v ent ilation 3:                      see page 19,
K    to footwell.                            see page 140.                              §    Off,

V    Demi st ing and d efrosti ng 3:                                                    $    Timed interv al wi pe, or automa tic
     see p ages 133, 137.                                                                    wipe w ith rain sensor 3,
                                                                                        %    Slow,
Ü    Hea ted rear wind ow:
     see p age 128.                                                                     &    Fast.




14
Date, time, information display, radio       Miscellaneous                        )   Ciga ret te lighter 3 :
      Informat ion displa y:                 p    Centra l lock ing system:           see page 89.
      see p age 41.                               locking – see page 58.
                                                                                  j   Horn:
Ö     On button for date and time,           q    Centra l lock ing system:           see page 18.
;     Setting buttons for d ate and tim e.        unloc king – see pag e 58.
                                                                                  /   Bonnet:
      But tons on wiper stal k 3:            r    Boot li d / tail gate:              see page 68.
      see p age 42.                               unloc king – see pag e 61.
                                                                                  T   Wi nter program me,
i     Trip computer,
      forwards menu search,
                                             x    Luggag e c om part ment:            automa tic tr ansm issi on 3,
                                                  unloc king – see pag e 61.          CVTronic 3:
h     Trip computer,                                                                  see pages 147, 155.
      backwards menu search,                 m    Centra l lock ing switc h:
                                                  see page 59.                    j   Selector lever lock ing,
§     Trip computer, select                                                           automa tic tr ansm issi on 3,
      Rem ote control 3 for radio            Ä    Anti- theft alarm system 3 :        CVTronic 3:
                                                  see page 63.                        see pages 144, 151.
      and Infota inment system:
      see p age 30.
                                             z    Chi ld safety sw itch 3 :       +   Fir st - aid k it 3:
                                                  see page 121.                       see page 204.
Cruis e control 3
      But tons on turn signal sta lk:        N    Rear w indow b lind 3:          ¨   Wa rning tri angle 3:
      see p age 172.                              see page 125.                       see page 204.

m     On, Accelerate,                        r    Park ing dista nce sensors 3:
g     Decelerate,                                 see page 174.
§     Off.




                                                                                                                      15
Light switch:                                  Main and dipped be am switch:               Headlight flash:
7 =     Off                                    Main be am    = P us h s talk forward       P ull stalk towards s tee ring wheel
8 =     Parking lights                         Dippe d beam = P us h s talk forward
9 =     Dipped or m ain beam                                   again
                                               You can also switch from main beam to
Press r     = Fog tail light
                                               dipped bea m by pulling the stalk towards
Press >     = Front fog lig hts 3              the steering wheel.
6 Other notes – see page 116,
head lig ht warning device – see page 24,
head lig ht ra nge adjustment 3 –
see page 117,
instrument illumination 3 – see page 117,
day tim e d riv ing lights 3 – see page 116.




16
Operating door-to-door                                Operating turn signal lights :                    Ope rating parking lights :
lighting 1) 3:                                        Right    =   Stalk all the way up                 Light switch to position 0,
Key to position 0 and rem ove,                        Left     =   Stalk all the way down               ignition key to position 0,
ope n driver’s door,                                  The turn signal stalk returns to its orig inal    move turn signal stalk fully
pull turn signal s talk towards                       position after use. When the steering wheel       upwards or downwards
steering whe el                                       is straightened up, the turn signal lights are    As a check, a warning buzzer sounds and
Dipped beam and the reversing lights light            autom atic ally cancelled.                        the turn signal control indica tor on the
up for an add itional 30 seconds after the                                                              respective side illuminates.
                                                      Switch the turn signal off manually by
driver’s door is c losed .                            tapping the stalk.                                To switch it off, switch on the ignition or
If the driv er’s door is left open, the lights will                                                     mov e the turn signal stalk in the op posite
                                                      When chang ing lanes, tap stalk until
go out after tw o minutes.                                                                              direction.
                                                      resistance is felt: the resp ective turn signal
Door-to-door lighting can be deactivated              will flash three times.
by inserting the k ey in the ignition sw itch or      Hold the stalk if y ou want the turn sig nals
by p ulling the turn signal stalk towards the         to fla sh longer.
steering wheel aga in while the driv er’s door
is open.




1)
     "D oor-to-do or" light function.


                                                                                                                                                   17
Cruis e control operation:              Hazard warning lights :                          Sounding the horn:
Press button on stalk                   On = Press ¨                                     P ress the ce ntre of the steering w hee l
Switch on: ta p button m.               Off = Press ¨ again                              6 Airb ag systems 3 – page 100,
                                        To aid location of the pushb utton, the red      remote control for radio and
Switch off: tap button §.
                                        surface is illuminated when the ignition is      Infotainment system 3 – page 30.
Resume at stored speed: tap button g.   switched on. When the button is pressed,
6 Cruise control 3 – see pa ge 172.     its control indicator flashes in time with the
                                        ha zard warning lights.




18
Winds creen wipe r:                             Automatic wiping w ith rain sensor 3 :         Ope rating w indscreen and
Gently tap s talk upward                        Ge ntly tap stalk upward                       headlight wash systems 3:
§ = Off                                         § = O ff                                       P ull stalk towards s tee ring wheel
$ = Adjustable timed interval wipe              $ = Automatic wiping                           The wiper w ill swipe for a few strok es. At
% = Slow                                               w ith rain sensor                       low speeds, there is a one-time post-wash
& = Fast                                        % = Slow (constant)                            swipe.
Stalk always mov es back to starting            & = F as t (constant)
                                                                                               The headlight wash system 3 is ready for
position. Shift to next gear up or down: just   Automatic wiping $ : The rain sensor           operation when the lights are switched on.
tap stalk g ently.                              detects the amount of water on the             Wash fluid is sprayed onto the headlights
                                                wind screen and automa tica lly reg ulates
Push stalk pa st resistance point a nd hold:                                                   (twice). Subsequently the headlight wash
                                                the windscreen wiper. The sensitivity of the
windscreen wiper stages are selected .                                                         system is b lock ed for 2 minutes.
                                                sy stem can be adjusted using the adjuster
Adjustable interva l wipe $:                    wheel:                                         The headlight wash system is deactivated
Shorter interv als = Turn adjuster wheel to     Less sensitiv e   = To the left                if wash fluid is low.
                     right                      More sensitiv e   = To the rig ht              O n vehicles fitted with rain sensor 3, keep
Longer intervals = Turn ad juster wheel to
                                                If necessary, the positions % or & ca n b e    the sensor area clean.
                     left
                                                selected manually.                             6 Further information – see pages 241,
Press the stalk down from p osition §:
                                                To switch off, m ov e stalk d ow nwa rd s.     242, 246.
Single sw ipe.
                                                6 Further information – see p ages 240,
6 Further inform ation – see pages 240,
                                                241, 246.
241, 246.


                                                                                                                                         19
Rear window wiper 3 and                       He ated rear window,                            Clearing misted or icy windows:
wash system 3                                 heated ex terior mirrors:                       Set air dis tribution to l,
Operation:                                    On = Press Ü                                    turn rotary switches for
Wiper on    = P ush stalk forward             Off = Press Ü again                             temperature and fan clockw ise
Wiper off   = P ush stalk forward             Heating operationa l only with engine           Air conditioning sys tem 3:
              again                           running.                                        P ush V and n buttons,
Wash        = P res s and hold                                                                turn rotary switch for
                                              The rea r window and exterior mirror
The rear window wiper swipes in timed         heating is switched off a utomatica lly after
                                                                                              temperature clockwis e
interval mode.                                                                                O pen front air vents, direct side air vents
                                              approx. 15 minutes.
When washing , the w iper swipes for a few                                                    towards the door windows. Close centre air
                                              6 Further information – see p age 128.          vents 3.
strokes. At low speeds, there is a one-time
post-w ash swipe.                                                                             6 Heating, ventilation, air conditioning 3 –
The rear window wa sh system is                                                               see page 126,
deactivated if wash fluid is low.                                                             electronic air conditioning system 3 –
                                                                                              see page 134.
6 Further inform ation – see pages 241,
242, 246.




20
Setting e lectronic air conditioning                 Information display:                       Manual transmission
system 3 to autom atic m ode:                        Us ed to display information on:           o      = Neutral position
Press AUTO button,                                   –   Time,                                  1 to 5 = 1s t to 5th ge ar
set tempe rature for driver and                      –   outside temperature,                   6      = 6th gear 3
passenger sides us ing left and                      –   radio 3 and date,                      When shifting up from 4th to 5th gea r:
right knobs                                          –   navigation 3 ,                         push the lever towa rd s the right at the
O pen all front a ir v ents. If desired , the rear   –   telephone 3 ,                          beginning of the shift operation.
vents also 3.                                        –   chec k control 3,
                                                     –   trip comp uter 3,                      Between 5th a nd 6th gear 3 : push
6 Elec tronic air c onditioning sy stem 3 –                                                     gearshift lever to right in straight line.
                                                     –   electronic air conditioning 3.
see page 134.
                                                     6 Information disp la y 3 – see page 41.   When shifting from 5th to 4th gear:
                                                                                                do not exert any force towa rd s the left.
                                                                                                R = Reverse ge ar
                                                                                                Reverse gear: w ith v ehicle stationary , pull
                                                                                                the ring up three seconds after de-clutching
                                                                                                and engage gear.
                                                                                                If the gear does not enga ge, set the lever in
                                                                                                neutral, relea se the clutch pedal and
                                                                                                depress again; then repeat g ear selection.




                                                                                                                                             21
Autom atic transmission 3:                   CVTronic 3 :                                  Exhaust gases are poisonous
P = Park position                            P = Park pos ition                            Exhaust g ases contain ca rbon monox ide,
R = Reve rse gear                            R = Reverse ge ar                             which is ex tremely poisonous but is
N = Neutral                                  N = Neutral                                   odourless and colourless.
D = Automatic gear sele ction                D = Continuously variable
Sele ctor lever in D to left:                       automatic mode                         Therefore never inhale exhaust gases, and
+ = Upshift                                  Se lector leve r in D to le ft:               nev er run the engine in an enclosed space.
- = Downshift                                       Continuously variable
Always start in P or N. To leave position,          automatic mode
opera te brak e pedal and press button on    + = Upshift
selector lever (selector lever lock ).       - = Downshift
                                             Alw ays start in P or N. To leave position,
To enga ge P or R, push button on selector
                                             op erate brake ped al and press button on
lev er.
                                             selector lever (selector lever lock).
P:   O nly with vehicle stationary ,
                                             To engage P or R, push button on selector
     first a pply handbrak e
                                             lever.
R:   O nly with vehicle stationary
                                             P: O nly with vehicle stationary,
6 Automatic transmission – see p age 144.
                                                first apply ha ndb rake
                                             R: O nly with vehicle stationary
                                             6 C VTronic – see pag e 150.


22
Before starting off, check:
z Ty re pressure and condition – see pag es
  176, 184, 268.
z Engine oil level and fluid levels in engine
  com partment – see pages 235 to 242.
z All windows, mirrors, exterior lighting
  and num ber p la tes are free from dirt,
  snow and ice and are operational.
z No objects are in front of the rear
  wind ow, on the instrument panel or in
  the area in which the airbag s inflate.
z Seats, seat belts and mirrors are
  correctly ad justed.
z Bra ke op eration.
                                                Starting, petrol engines :                         Starting, dies el engine:
                                                Manual trans miss ion idling with                  Manual transmission in neutral with
                                                clutch pedal depres sed,                           clutch pedal depresse d,
                                                operate foot brake,                                apply foot brake,
                                                automatic trans miss ion or CVTronic               automatic transmission in P or N,
                                                in P or N,                                         do not accelerate,
                                                do not acce lerate,                                turn ke y to position II;
                                                turn key to pos ition III                          when control indicator ! goes out1),
                                                The initially increased engine speed               turn ke y to position III
                                                autom atic ally falls as the engine                Before rep eating the starting procedure,
                                                temperature rises.                                 turn the key back to 0 in the ignition switch,
                                                                                                   remove it and then reinsert it. Then repeat
                                                Before repea ting the starting proc edure,
                                                                                                   the starting procedure.
                                                turn the key ba ck to 0 in the ignition sw itch,
                                                remove it and then reinsert it. Then repeat        6 Electronic im mobiliser – see pag e 55,
                                                the starting proc edure.                           further inform ation – see pages 158, 199.
                                                6 Electronic immobiliser – see page 55,
                                                further information – see pag es 158, 199.


                                                                                                   1)
                                                                                                        Preh eatin g system sw itches on o nly if outside
                                                                                                        tem perature is low .


                                                                                                                                                       23
                                                                            Advice when parking:
                                                                            z Alw ays apply hand brake firm ly. O n
                                                                              slopes apply the ha nd brake as firmly as
                                                                              possible.
                                                                            z With m anual transmission, select first
                                                                              gear or reverse, for automatic
                                                                              tra nsmission 3 or CVTronic 3, place
                                                                              selector lever in P.
                                                                            z Close windows and sun roof 3.
                                                                            z In vehicles with autom atic transmission 3
                                                                              or CVTronic 3 the key can only be
                                                                              removed in selector lever p osition P.
                                                                            z Turn steering wheel until y ou feel loc k
                                                                              engage (anti-theft protection).
Rele as ing the handbrake:   Parking the vehicle:                           z Engine cooling fan m ay run on after the
Raise leve r s lightly,      Apply handbrake firm ly,
                                                                              engine has been switched off.
pre ss lock button,          engine off,
lower le ver fully           rem ove ke y,
                                                                            Warning buzze rs
                             lock s te ering wheel,
                             lock ve hicle                                  While driving:
6 Bra kes - see pag e 180                                                   z If seat belt is not fa stened1 ),
                             To lock , press button p or turn key
                             anticlock wise in the lock. To activate the    z If a specified ma ximum speed is
                             anti-theft lock ing sy stem 3 and anti-theft     ex ceeded1 ),
                             alarm system 3, press button p twice or        z If the luggag e com partment is open
                             turn key anti-clockw ise twice.                  when the vehicle starts off.
                             6 Further information – see p ages 55, 158,    When the vehicle is parked and the driv er’s
                             ra dio frequency rem ote control –             door is opened:
                             see p age 56,                                  z If the k ey is inserted 3,
                             central locking system – see page 58,
                             Vauxhall a la rm system 3 – see pag e 63,      z If ex terior lights a re on,
                             vehicle dec om missioning – see page 244.      z If the turn signa l stalk is engaged.




                                                                            1)
                                                                                 Co untry-specific version.


24
                                               Ge nuine Vauxhall P arts and                     That was the most important
                                               Accessories                                      inform ation for your firs t drive
                                               We rec om mend "Genuine Vauxhall Parts           in your V ectra.
                                               and Accessories" and conversion parts
                                               relea sed expressly for your vehic le typ e.
                                               These parts have undergone special tests
                                               to establish their reliability, safety and       The othe r pages of this chapte r
                                               specific suitability for Vauxhall v ehicles.     contain a sum mary of the other
                                               Despite continuous market monitoring, w e        intere sting functions in your vehicle.
                                               cannot a ssess or guarantee these
                                               attrib utes for other prod ucts, even if they
                                               ha ve b een granted a pproval by the
                                               relev ant authorities or in some other form .    The rem aining chapters of the
                                               "Genuine Vauxhall Parts a nd Accessories"
                                                                                                Ow ner’s Manual contain important
                                               and conversion p arts app rov ed by
                                                                                                inform ation on operation, safety and
                                               Vauxhall can be ob ta ined from a Vauxhall
                                                                                                maintenance as we ll as a complete
Service work, mainte nance                                                                      index.
                                               Authorised Rep airer, of course. Here y ou
We recomm end tha t you entrust all w ork to
a Vauxhall Authorised Repa irer, who ca n      will be given comprehensiv e ad vice a bout
                                               permitted technical changes and c orrect
provide you with relia ble serv ice and
correctly perform all work according to        installation w ill ta ke p la ce.
factory instructions.
                                                For your s afety
6 If you have a problem– see pa ge 232,         C arry out regularly the check s
service interval display – see pa ge 234.       rec om mended in the indiv idual sections
                                                of this Owner’ s M anual.
                                                Ensure that your v ehicle is serviced at the
                                                service intervals spec ified in the Serv ic e
                                                Booklet. We recommend that y ou entrust
                                                this work to a Vauxhall Authorised
                                                Repairer.
                                                Hav e faults remedied without d elay!
                                                C onsult a workshop. We recommend a
                                                Vauxhall Authorised R epairer. If
                                                necessary , interrupt your journey.
                                                6 Maintenance – see page 234.



                                                                                                                                      25
External w indow and sun roof 3                  Position m emory 3 for ele ctrically          Heated se ats 3,
ope ration 3                                     adjustable drive r’s seat,                    driver’s s eat with climate control 3
Press button q or p on the remote control        exterior mirrors and ins ide rear view        O perate the a djuster wheels beneath the
until the windows are open or closed,            mirror                                        centre air vents and buttons on the rear of
respectively .                                   Storing setti ng s                            the centre console.
Press button p on the remote control until       1. Adjust seat and mirror,                    For the front seats, set knurled wheels to
the sun roof is closed.                                                                        required ventilation setting 3 or heater
                                                 2. Press m emory button M a nd the position
                                                                                               setting as per requirements. For rear
If the rain sensor 3 detects w ater with the        button to be used (1, 2 or 3)
                                                                                               outboard seats, p ress buttons.
mechanic al anti-theft locking system 3             simulta neously. Storage is
activated, a ll electronic w indows and the         ack nowledged by an acoustic signal.       6 Further information – see page 130.
sun roof are closed. The windows and the         Ret rieving setting s
sun roof are also automa tic ally closed after   Press and hold down position buttons 1, 2
four hours.                                      or 3, until stored p ositions hav e been
6 Further inform ation – see pages 122, 124.     reached .
                                                 Ad justments may only be performed with
                                                 vehicle stationary.
                                                 6 Further information – see p age 69.




26
Travel As sistant 3                           Ta bles                                                Set req uired clea ra nce by adjusting
                                              Fold arm rest upward (1).                              longitud inal p osition of tab le (4).
The Trav el Assistant contains:
                                              Use recessed grip to p ull tab le upward as            6 Further information – see page 72.
z armrest,
                                              fa r a s it will go (1), sw iv el table forw ard (2)
z stowage compartm ents,
                                              and fold downward (3).
z waste container,
z drink holders,
z accessory sock ets,
z connection console
  e.g. for DVD p la yer 3,
z elec tric cool box,
z ta bles,
z tw in aud io (rear audio module) 3 or
  stowage compartm ent.
The Trav el Assistant is installed on a
console above the m iddle seat in the rear.




                                                                                                                                              27
FlexOrganize r 3                                Adaptive F orward Lighting (AF L) 3     C ur ve lighti ng
                                                On vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights,   The Xenon light b eam pivots based on
The side walls house a ttac hm ent rails that
                                                improves illumination of                steering wheel position and speed (from
can be used a s necessary for different
                                                                                        app rox . 6 mph / 10 km/h).
systems to divide the lugg age                  z curves (curve lighting ),
compartment or secure load s.                   z intersections and tight turns (turn   The headlights shine at an angle of up to
                                                  lighting).                            15° to the right or left of the direction of
The system consists of:
                                                                                        travel.
z variable partition net
z variable partition w all                                                              Turn lig hting
z partition rod                                                                         An additiona l light is switc hed on based on
z mesh pockets for the side walls                                                       steering wheel position (when turned past
z hooks                                                                                 app rox . 90°), turn signal use and speed (up
                                                                                        to app rox . 25 mph / 40 k m/h).
6 Further inform ation – see page 86.
                                                                                        The lig ht shines at an a ngle from app rox .
                                                                                        90° to the left or right of the v ehicle up to a
                                                                                        distance of a pprox. 30 metres.
                                                                                        6 Further information – see page 118.




28
Operating the                          Usi ng multi func tion butt on          Trip computer 3
graphical inform ation display 3       Push       C onfirm / select            The trip computer shows vehicle data
or the colour information dis play 3   Rota te    Move in menu                 which it continua lly records and evaluates
Using but tons on wiper stalk          6 Further information – see p age 42.   electronically.
Rear button:                                                                   Functions:
§ Activate / confirm / select                                                  z Range,
Front buttons:                                                                 z Effective consum ption,
h Move up in the menu                                                          z Average consum ption,
i Move down in the menu                                                        z Instantaneous consumption,
                                                                               z Average speed,
                                                                               z Distance,
                                                                               z Settings.
                                                                               6 Further information – see page 48.




                                                                                                                        29
Check control 3                                  Re mote control for radio and                   Twin Audio 3
Check control monitors several fluid levels,     Infotainment system 3                           Twin Audio provides rear seat oc cup ants
the tyre pressure 3 , the radio frequency        Radio 3, radio telephone 3 and                  the op portunity to listen to a different
remote control battery, the anti-theft alarm     Infotainment sy stem 3 functions ca n be        audio sourc e than the one selec ted b y the
system 3 and imp ortant external lights,         op erated with the b uttons on the steering     driver.
including the cables and fuses. In trailer       wheel.                                          Two headp hone connec tions a re available
mode the trailer lig hting is a lso monitored.   For further inform ation, see the respectiv e   with sepa ra te volume control.
6 Further inform ation – see page 46.            op erating instructions.                        For further information, see the respective
                                                                                                 radio operating instructions.




30
Active he ad res traints 3                      Vauxhall Full-Size airbag system                 Si de airba g system 3
In the event of a rear-end impa ct, the         The Vauxhall Full-Size airbag sy stem            The side airbag sy stem triggers when a
active head restraints automatically tilt       comprises severa l ind ividual systems.          side-on collision occurs and provides a
forwards. The head is more effectiv ely                                                          safety barrier for the driver a nd/or
                                                Front a irbag system                             passenger in the respective front door
sup ported by the head restraint and the        The front airbag sy stem will b e triggered in
danger of hyp erex tension in the neck area                                                      area. This reduces the risk of injury to the
                                                the event of a serious accident inv olv ing a    upper body considera bly in case of a side
is reduced.                                     frontal impa ct and forms sa fety cushions       impa ct.
Active head restraints are id entified by the   for the driver and front passenger. The
lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint          forward movement of the driver a nd front        C ur tain ai rbag syst em 3
guide bushes.                                   passenger is check ed a nd the risk of           The curtain a irba g system triggers in case
                                                injuries to the up per body and head             of a side-on collision and provid es a safety
                                                thereby substantially reduced.                   barrier in the hea d area on the respective
                                                                                                 side of the vehic le. This reduces the risk of
                                                                                                 injury to the hea d considerab ly in case of a
                                                                                                 side-on collision.
                                                                                                 6 Further information – see page 100.




                                                                                                                                            31
Parking distance se nsors 3                      ECOService -Fle x                                 With the specially developed engine oil for
The p arking dista nce sensors front and         The oil change and service intervals are          vehicles with EC OS ervice-Flex, the nex t
rea r sy stems are automatically sw itc hed on   flexible, based on a number of different          eng ine oil change is due after a maxim um
when d riv ing in reverse gear.                  parameters and the conditions under               of 2 years or 25,000 m iles / 35,000 k m
                                                 whic h the vehic le is used. Various engine-      (petrol engine) or after a max imum of 2
The p arking dista nce sensors ca n also be
                                                 specific data is continuously recorded and        y ears or 30,000 miles / 50,000 km
switched on and off m anually using the r                                                          (diesel engine)
                                                 used to calculate the rem aining distance
button on the instrument panel.
                                                 up to the next inspection date.                   When topping up the oil, alwa ys use grade
If the vehicle approaches a n ob stacle to                                                         GM-LL-A-025 or GM-LL-B-025 in order to
                                                 The rem aining driving dista nce can b e
the front or rea r, a series of signals is
                                                 seen in the tachom eter disp la y when the        ma intain the flexible maintenance
sounded in the vehicle interior. The interval                                                      interva ls.
                                                 ignition is off: press the reset b utton und er
between the signals becomes shorter a s
                                                 the trip odometer; v and the remaining            6 Further information – see pages 234, 251.
the d istance is reduced. If the dista nce is
                                                 driving dista nce will then be display ed.
less than 30 cm , the signal will b e
continuous.
6 Further inform ation – see page 174.




32
Instruments




Control indicators                                 I                                                3. Steer as quickly as possible out of the
                                                   Oil p ressure                                       stream of traffic, without imped ing other
The c ontrol indicators described here are         Control indica tor lights up when ignition is       vehicles.
not present in a ll v ehicles. The descrip tions   switched on. Goes out shortly after eng ine
howev er, a pply to all instrum ent versions.                                                       4. Switch the ig nition off (Position I).
                                                   starts. C an light up intermittently when
Some control ind icators are shown a s             idling with hot engine; must g o out w hen        When the ignition is off, c onsiderab ly
pictograms within the tachometer d ia l            engine speed is increased.                        more force is needed to brake and steer.
area.                                              Lights up when the engine is running :            Do not remove key until vehicle has
                                                   Engine lub ric ation may be interrupted . This    come to a stand still, otherwise the
O                                                  may result in dam age to the engine and/or        steering column lock c ould engage
Turn signal l ights
                                                   lock ing of the drive wheels:                     unexpectedly .
The c orresponding control indicator
flashes when the turn signal is on. If the         1. Depress clutch.
hazard warning lig hts are activated, both                                                          C heck oil level before consulting a
                                                   2. Shift transm ission to idling , with
control indica tors flash. Rapid flashes: a                                                         workshop. We recommend a Vauxhall
                                                      automatic transmission 3 or C VTronic 3
turn signal b ulb or its associated fuse has                                                        Authorised Repa irer.
                                                      move selector lever to N.
failed. Changing bulbs – see p age 218,
fuses – see page 212.




                                                                                                                                                33
                                                                                                 v
                                                                                                 Airb ag system s 3 ,
                                                                                                 belt tensioners 3
                                                                                                 see pages 96, 105.

                                                                                                 W
                                                                                                 C ool ant temp era ture
                                                                                                 Lights up when the engine is running:
                                                                                                 S top vehicle and switch off engine. C oolant
                                                                                                 temperature is too high: switch off engine.
                                                                                                 Danger to engine. Coolant fluid
                                                                                                 temperature disp lay – see page 40.
                                                                                                 C heck the coolant level immediately –
                                                                                                 see page 238.


R                                                p
Brak e system ,                                  Alternator
clutc h system                                   Control indica tor lights up when ignition is
The control indicator lights up when ignition    switched on. Goes out shortly after eng ine
is switched on if handbrake is applied or if     starts.
brake / clutch fluid level is too low. Further   Lights up when the engine is running :
information – see pages 181, 240.                Stop, switch engine off. Battery is not
                                                 cha rg ed. Engine cooling m ay not be
 If it lights up when the handbrak e is not
                                                 op erating. With a diesel eng ine, the brake
 applied: stop the vehicle; interrupt your
                                                 servo unit may stop operating . Consult a
 journey immediately . Consult a
                                                 work shop. We recommend that y ou consult
 work shop. We recom mend a Vaux ha ll
                                                 a Vaux hall Authorised Repairer.
 Authorised Repairer.




34
X                                                !                                             r
Seat b el t 3                                    Preheating 3 for diesel eng ines              Fog tai l light s
The c ontrol indicator lights up when the        Control indica tor lights up during           C ontrol indicator lights up when fog tail
ignition is switched on and rem ains lit until   prehea ting.                                  light is switc hed on.
the seat belt is fastened. An a coustic signal   Preheating system switches on only if
is also emitted when the car starts to move.     outside temperature is low.
                                                                                               P
Fastening seat belt – see page 98.                                                             Ma in beam
                                                                                               C ontrol indicator lights up when ma in
                                                 u
T                                                Anti-lock Brak e S ystem 3                    beam is on and w hen headlight flash is
Winter progr amme w ith autom atic                                                             operated.
                                                 see p age 182.
tra nsm ission 3 or CVTronic 3                                                                 y
Control indicator lights up when winter          v                                             Seat occupancy recogniti on 3
programme selected.                              Tr action C ontrol system 3,                  see page 105.
Further information – see pa ges 147, 155.       Electronic Stab ility Program me 3
                                                 see p ages 168, 170.                          m
                                                                                               C ruise cont rol 3
                                                 >                                             see page 172.
                                                 Front fog lights 3
                                                 Control indica tor lights up when front fog
                                                 lig hts are switc hed on.




                                                                                                                                            35
                                                                                                       B
                                                                                                       Ad aptiv e Forwa rd Lighting (AFL) 3
                                                                                                       Fault in sy stem. C onsult a workshop. We
                                                                                                       recommend a Vauxhall Authorised
                                                                                                       Repairer.
                                                                                                       AFL – see page 118.

                                                                                                       g
                                                                                                       Trai ler turn signal li ght 3
                                                                                                       C ontrol indicator flashes in tim e w ith turn
                                                                                                       signal lights when towing. Does not fla sh if
                                                                                                       a turn signal light on the towing vehicle or
                                                                                                       trailer fa ils.


Y                                                   Z
Fuel l ev el                                        Exhaust gases 3
Lit: low fuel level. Fuel gauge in reserv e         Control indica tor lights up when ignition is
area.                                               switched on. Goes out shortly after eng ine
                                                    starts.
If it flashes: fuel used up, fill up immediately.
                                                    Lights up when the engine is running :
Never let the tank run dry!
                                                    Fault in emission control system . The
Petrol eng ines: erratic fuel supply can            permitted em ission limits m ay b e
cause ca talytic converter to overheat –            exc eeded. Consult a workshop. We
see page 164.                                       recommend a Vauxhall Authorised
Diesel engines: if the tank is run d ry , bleed     Repairer.
the fuel sy stem as described on pag e 199.         If it flashes when the engine is running:
                                                    For fa ult that ca n lea d to destruction of the
                                                    catalytic converter – see page 166. C onsult
                                                    a workshop immediately. We recommend
                                                    that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised
                                                    Repairer.




36
                                                p                                              A
                                                Electro-hydrauli c power a ssisted steering    Engine el ect ronics,
                                                Fault in electro-hydraulic steering system .   tra nsm issi on electr oni cs
                                                Power steering may not work. Vehicle c an      Fault in engine electronics or transm ission
                                                still be steered, but considera bly more       electronics. Electronics switch to
                                                force is required . We recommend you           emergency running programme. Fuel
                                                consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.        consum ption may increase and driveability
                                                                                               of the vehicle may be impaired – see
                                                ?                                              pag e 166. Fault in imm obiliser system – see
                                                Fault in autom atic head light ra nge          pag e 55. Contact a workshop. We
                                                adjustm ent syst em 3                          recommend your Vaux hall Authorised
                                                Contact a workshop immediately . We            Repairer.
                                                recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
                                                Authorised Repairer – see page 117.            s
                                                                                               Bootli d open
                                                r                                              Indicates the luggage compa rtm ent is
Display in tachometer                           Pa rking distance sensors 3                    open. Close the luggage compartment –
o                                               see p age 174.                                 see page 61.
Im mobil iser
Fault in electronic immobiliser, engine w ill
not start – see page 55. Consult a workshop.
We recommend tha t you consult a Va ux hall
Authorised Repairer.




                                                                                                                                         37
v                                            S                                              w
Airb ag systems,                             Engine oil l ev el                             Tyre p ressure control syst em 3,
belt t ensioners                             Engine oil level too low . Check engine oil    fault
see pages 96, 105.                           level at the first opportunity . Engine oil    see page 176.
                                             level – see pa ge 236.
t                                                                                           y
Bulb repl acement 3                          H                                              O pen doors
A bulb has failed . C heck the lights, and   Coolant lev el                                 Indicates tha t one or more doors is open.
exchange the failed bulb . Bulb exchange –   Coolant level too low, check the coolant       C lose all doors.
see page 218.                                level immediately – see pa ge 239.
                                                                                            P, R, N, D, 1 to 5
F                                            v                                              Automat ic transm ission 3,
Brak e lining wear indicat or 3              Service interv al                              S elec tor lever position or mode selected -
Front disk b ra ke pad worn to minimum       see p age 234.                                 see page 146.
thickness. Contact a workshop to hav e
the b ra ke pads changed. We recommend       x                                              P, R, N, D, A, 1 to 6
that you contact a Vauxhall Authorised       Tyre pressure contr ol system 3,               C VTronic 3,
Repairer – see page 180.                     loss of p ressure warning                      S elec tor lever position or mode selected -
                                             Check the pressure of the respec tiv e ty re   see page 153.
                                             immed iately – see page 176.




38
                                                                                      Odometer
                                                                                      Records the miles / kilometres driven.
                                                                                      Trip odometer
                                                                                      To return to zero, depress reset k nob with
                                                                                      ignition switched on.
                                                                                      Service interv al display – see pa ges 32, 234.




Tachometer 1)                                         Spee dome ter 1)
Indicates engine speed.                               Indicates the vehicle speed .
Warning zone: m aximum permissible
engine sp eed ex ceeded ; danger to engine.




1)
     The instrum ents in yo ur vehicle m ay d iffer
     from the instrum ents illustra ted here.


                                                                                                                                  39
                                        For physical reasons, the engine
                                        temperature gauge show s the coolant
                                        temperature only if the coolant level is
                                        adeq uate.
                                        During operation the system is pressurised.
                                        The temp erature ma y therefore rise briefly
                                        to ov er 100 °C.




Coolant te mperature display                                                           Fuel gauge
Pointer in zone                                                                        Pointer in left
at left           = Engine operating                                                   zone or Y lit       = Reserve area
                    tem perature not
                    yet rea ched                                                       Pointer in left
                                                                                       zone or Y
Pointer between                                                                        flashing            = Fill up –
the z ones        = Normal operating                                                                         see pag e 163
                    tem perature
                                                                                       N ever run the tank dry !
Pointer in                                                                             Because of the fuel remaining in the tank,
warning zone                                                                           the amount of fuel required to fill the tank
at right                                                                               ma y be less than the spec ified tank
or W is lit       = Tem perature                                                       cap acity.
                    too high:
                    Stop, switch off
                    engine, danger to
                    engine, check
                    coolant lev el
                    immediately – see
                    page 239.



40
Inform ation display                            Graphica l informa tion displa y 3 ,             The information d isplay ed depends on the
Tripl e inform ation d isp lay                  Colour inform ation di sp lay 3                  vehicle equipment and the settings of the
Display of time, outside tempera ture and       Display of date, time, outside tem perature,     trip comp uter 3, the electronic air
radio / date.                                   and informa tion from check control 3,           conditioning system 3, the radio 3 and the
                                                trip computer 3 , electronic air conditioning    Infotainment system 3.
The tim e and outside temperature are           sy stem 3, radio 3 and Infotainment
displayed when the ignition is on. The date                                                      Electronic air conditioning system – see
                                                sy stem 3.
is disp layed when the radio 3 is switched                                                       pag e 134. For operation of the radio and
off.                                            The g ra phica l inform ation display presents   Infotainment system refer to the
                                                the information in monochrom e. The colour       acc om panying opera ting instruc tions.
When the ignition is off, the time, date and    information display p resents the
outside tem perature can be presented for                                                        Display of --. - °C or F in the displa y
                                                information in colour.
15 second s b y briefly pressing one of the                                                      indicates a fault. Have the cause remedied.
two buttons b elow the displa y.                                                                 We recommend that you consult a
                                                                                                 Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Display of --.- °C or F in the d isplay
indicates a fault. H ave the cause rem edied.
We recommend that you consult a
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.




                                                                                                                                          41
Operating the graphical information             The trip computer functions a re activated       System settings
display 3 or the colour information             using the m enus on the disp lay and the         The figures show execution with the colour
display 3                                       buttons on the wiper sta lk 3 or via the radio   inform ation display .
The functions are activated using the           telep hone 3 or Infota inm ent system 3 .
                                                                                                 In the trip computer settings menu, select
buttons on the wiper stalk or b y using the     Ac tiv ation using buttons on wiper stalk:       System Setti ngs.
multifunction button if the vehicle is          The individual menu items are selec ted
equipp ed with a radio telephone 3 or           using the h and i buttons and selected           O n vehicles without trip comp uter, press
Infotainm ent system 3 – see Fig. 12824 J.                                                       button § on the wiper stalk 3.
                                                by pressing the § button. To activa te the
If chec k control issues a warning message,     trip computer, press the § button.               The sy stem settings menu will b e
the display is blocked from other func tions.                                                    displayed.
                                                Ac tiv ation using multi-function button: the
Acknowled ge the message with button §          indiv idua l menu items are selected by
on the wip er stalk 3 or by p ressing the       rotating and selected b y pressing. Press BC
multifunction button. If there are severa l     button on system to activate the trip
fault warnings, ack nowledge them one a t a     computer.
time.




42
Language selec tion                         Select the required lang uag e from the list.   Sett ing units of measure
You ca n select the display language for                                                    Y ou can select which units of mea sure are
                                            Selections are indicated by a 6 in front of
som e functions.                                                                            to be used.
                                            the menu item.
In the System Set tings menu, select item                                                   In the Syst em Settings m enu, select item
Instruct ions.                                                                              Unit s.
The list of availab le languages will be                                                    S elec t from the list of units that opens.
displayed.                                                                                  S elec tions are indic ated b y a 6 in front of
                                                                                            the menu item.




                                                                                                                                          43
                                            Set displa y m ode                                Setting date and time
                                            The display can b e adjusted to suit the light    In system s w ith a GPS receiver 1)
                                            conditions, b la ck or coloured text on a light   (Infotainm ent system 3, radio telephone
                                            background or white or coloured text on a         with GPS m od ule 3) the tim e and da te are
                                            dark bac kground.                                 automatically set when a GPS satellite
                                            In the System Setti ngs menu, select item         signal is received . If the displa yed time
                                            Automat ic, Day or Ni ght.                        does not ma tc h the local tim e, the time can
                                                                                              be corrected by making manual entries in
                                            Automat ic: Adjustment depending on               steps of 30 minutes or autom atically by
                                            vehicle lighting.                                 receiving a n RDS time signa l2) 3 .
                                            Da y: Black or coloured text on light             In rad ios without a GPS receiv er, the time
                                            background.                                       and d ate c an be adjusted manually or
                                            Night: White or coloured text on dark             automatically using the RDS time signal 3.
                                            background.                                       S om e RDS transmitters d o not send correct
                                                                                              time signa ls. If the incorrect tim e is
Adj ust contrast                                                                              displayed often, d eactiva te the automa tic
In the System Set tings menu, select item                                                     time synchronisation 3 and set the time
Cont rast.                                                                                    ma nually.
The c ontrast menu w ill be d isplay ed.                                                      The autom atic setting is ind ic ated b y Ö in
Confirm the required setting.                                                                 the display .




                                                                                              1)
                                                                                                   GPS = G lob al P osition in g System,
                                                                                                   Satellite system for world -wide p osition in g.
                                                                                              2)
                                                                                                   RDS = R a dio Da ta System.

44
                                                Deactivating a nd activating automatic
                                                setting
                                                Hold down Ö for approx. 2 sec., c lock
                                                display is now in setting mode.
                                                Press Ö twice (until y ear flashes).
                                                Press and hold down Ö for ap prox .
                                                3 seconds until } flashes in display a nd
                                                text " RDS TIM E" a ppears (years fla sh
                                                during this time).
                                                Display indicates:
                                                  RDS TIME 0 = Deactivated
                                                  RDS TIME 1 = Activa ted
                                                Press Ö three times.

Vehi cles w ith tri ple informat ion displa y                                               Vehicles with gr aphical informat ion
Manual setting                                                                              di sp lay 3 or colour inform ation d isp lay 3
Switch off radio. Press Ö and ; below                                                       In the Syst em Settings menu, select item
display a s follows:                                                                        Tim e / Date.
Press Ö for ap prox . 2 seconds:                                                            The menu for time / date will be display ed.
    Day fla shes
;: Set day                                                                                  S elec t the menu items required.
                                                                                            Mak e the desired setting s a nd confirm.
Ö : Month fla shes
;: Set month                                                                                S elec t menu item O K.
                                                                                            C orrecting time 3
Ö : Year flashes
;: Set year                                                                                 To correc t the time, use RDS in the Time /
                                                                                            Date menu to select item Auto. Ti me
Ö : Hours flash                                                                             C orrec tion.
;: Set hours                                                                                The field behind Auto. Time Correcti on will
Ö : Minutes flash                                                                           be ticked.
;: Set minutes

Ö : Clock is started.




                                                                                                                                        45
                                                   Check control 3
                                                   Check control monitors several fluid levels,
                                                   the tyre pressure 3, the radio frequency
                                                   remote control ba tteries, the anti-theft
                                                   alarm system 3 and im portant external
                                                   lig hts, including the cables and fuses. In
                                                   tra iler mode, the tra iler lighting is also
                                                   monitored.
                                                   Once the ignition has been switched on, all
                                                   check control functions are autom atically
                                                   verified .
                                                   Fault warnings appear on the display. If
                                                   there a re sev eral fault warnings, they are
                                                   display ed one after the other.
                                                   Some of the fault warnings appea r on the                 Check b rake lig ht switch
Outs ide tempe rature
                                                   display in an abb reviated form.
A fall in temperature is indica ted                                                                 Fault. Brake light does not come on when
immediately and a rise in temp erature             Ac know ledge fault displays as described        brak e ap plied. Have cause of fault
after a time delay .                               on p age 42.                                     remedied imm ediately. We recom mend
O n v ehicles with trip le inform ation display,   Fault warnings:                                  that you consult a Vaux hall Authorised
the sym bol T is shown in the disp lay from                                                         Repairer.
3 °C as a warning for icy road surfaces.                      Check r em ote control
                                                                     batt ery
O n vehicles w ith g ra phic al information                                                                      Check sa feg ua rd
display 3 or c olour information displa y 3 a      If battery volta ge of the remote control unit   Fault. Sy stem error in a nti-theft alarm
message is shown in the display to warn for        is too low – see page 57.                        system. Have cause of fault remedied
icy road surfaces. See figure.                                                                      imm ediately. We recomm end that y ou
                                                                                                    consult a Vaux ha ll Authorised Repairer.
 Caution: The road surface may already
 be icy even though the display indicates
 a few degrees above 0 °C .




46
If there is a fault in the lighting sy stem, the              Check w ash fluid level            I nt err up tion of pow er supp ly
respective location of the fault is displayed                                                    The check control 3 autom atically checks
                                                    Fluid level in wind screen wash system too
as tex t, e.g.:                                                                                  all functions after the battery has been
                                                    low . Top up wa sh fluid – see p age 242.
                                                                                                 reconnected or c ha rg ed. Stored fault
              C heck right brak e                   Rear window wash sy stem 3 and headlight     warnings appear on the display one after
                     light
                                                    wash system 3 a re deactivated if wash       the other.
If brak e light is defective, the relev ant tail    fluid is low.
light takes ov er the brake light function.
Bulb exchange – see page 218.

If tyre pressure is too low, the disp lay
indicates the tyre to check, e. g.:
               Check rear r ight
                t yre pressur e
Check ty re pressure at next opportunity,
using suitable tyre pressure gauge. Tyre
pressure control sy stem 3 – see page 176.
Checking tyre pressure – see p age 184.

If there is major loss of pressure in a tyre,
the d isplay indicates the tyre a t fault, e. g.:
                R ear left tyr e
                pressure loss
Stop im med ia tely a nd check tyre. Tyre
pressure control sy stem 3 – see page 176.




                                                                                                                                        47
Trip computer 3                              Range over 30 m iles (50 km)                    Ra ng e b el ow 30 m iles (50 km)
The trip computer show s v ehicle data       Range is calculated from current fuel ta nk     If the fuel in the tank will allow less than 30
which it continually records and evaluates   content and instantaneous consumption.          miles (50 km), a warning "Range" appears
electronic ally .                            The display shows avera ge v alues.             on the display .
Some of the functions a ppear on the         The ra nge updates automatically after a
display in a n abbrev iated form.            brief delay after the v ehicle has b een
                                             refuelled. Manual updating is also possible –
Functions:                                   see page 50.
z Rang e,
z Effective consump tion,
z Av erage consump tion,
z Instantaneous consumption,
z Av erage speed,
z Distance,
z Settings.
Check control warnings a lways have
priority.




48
Effect ive consumpt ion                    Average consumpt ion                        I nsta ntaneous c onsump tion
Shows the a mount of fuel consumed . The   Calculation of avera ge c onsumption. The   Display c hanges depending on sp eed:
measurement can be restarted at any time   measurement c an be restarted at any time   Display in g al/h   below 8 m ph
– see pa ge 50.                            – see page 50.                                                  (13 km /h),
                                                                                       Display in m pg     above 8 mph
                                                                                                           (13 km /h).




                                                                                                                               49
Averag e sp eed                               Di st ance trav ell ed                    Reset current trip comput er i nformati on
Average speed calculation. Measurement        Display s number of miles (kilometres)    The following trip com puter inform ation
can be restarted at any time,                 driven. Measurement can be restarted at   can b e reset (restart measurements):
see right-hand column.                        any time, see right-ha nd colum n.        z   Range (only with vehicle stationary),
Stoppag es in the journey with the ignition                                             z   Effective consum ption,
off are not included in the ca lc ulations.                                             z   Average consum ption,
                                                                                        z   Average speed,
                                                                                        z   Distance travelled.
                                                                                        S elec t the required items from the trip
                                                                                        computer menu.
                                                                                        Then select menu item Settings.
                                                                                        The Settings menu is displayed.




50
                                                                                                     I nt err up tion of pow er supp ly
                                                                                                     If the power supp ly has been interrupted or
                                                                                                     if the battery voltage ha s dropped too low,
                                                                                                     the values stored in the trip computer w ill
                                                                                                     be lost.




Select BC Reset present in the Settings          Resetting multip le informat ion on
menu.                                            the trip com puter
                                                 The follow ing trip computer information
The v alue for the selected function will b e
                                                 can be reset simultaneously (restart
reset and reca lculated.
                                                 measurements):
The range values can only be reset if the
                                                 z   Effective consumption,
vehic le is stationary.
                                                 z   Average consumption,
After resetting, "- - -" is displayed with the   z   Average speed,
trip computer information selected. The          z   Distanc e travelled.
reca lculated v alues are d isplay ed after a
                                                 Select menu item BC Reset all in the
brief delay .
                                                 Settings menu.
                                                 The v alues are reset a nd "* **" is d isplay ed.
                                                 New values are only displayed when the
                                                 engine is running. The av erage speed is
                                                 calculated shortly after starting to drive.




                                                                                                                                               51
                                             As the vehicle aeria l is relatively near the
                                             ground, the broadcasting compa nies
                                             cannot g uarantee the sa me quality of
                                             reception a s is obtained with a domestic
                                             ra dio using an ov erhead aerial.
                                             z C hanges in distance from the
                                               transm itter,
                                             z Multi-path reception due to reflection
                                               and
                                             z S hadowing
                                             may c ause hissing , noise, distortion or loss
                                             of reception a ltogether.

                                             Infotainment system 3
                                             The Infotainm ent system is operated as
Radio 3                                      described in the operating instructions          Electronic data acquisition in toll
The rad io is operated as described in the   supplied.                                        sys tem s 3
opera ting instruc tions supp lied.                                                           O n vehicles with heat-reflecting
                                             Depend ing on the v ersion, the Infotainm ent
                                                                                              windscreens1 ) 3, m ount the c hipca rd 3 for
The d isplay for the radio ap pears on the   system conta ins telematics (telep hone).
                                                                                              electronic data a cquisition and billing in
inform ation d isplay .
                                                                                              the black shaded zone of the windsc reen
Ca r radio reception differs from domestic                                                    on the left or the right behind the interior
radio reception:                                                                              rear-view m irror, see figure. If the chipc ard
                                                                                              is mounted outside this zone, malfunctions
                                                                                              ma y occur in data acquisition.




                                                                                              1)
                                                                                                   Sola r Reflect.


52
Mobile te lephones and radio                     Obtain ad vice on p redetermined
equipment (CB) 3                                 installation loc ations for the external
The Vauxhall installa tion instructions and      antenna and equipment holder and way s
the operating guidelines p rov id ed by the      of using dev ices w ith transmission power of
telephone manufa cturer m ust be observed        more than 10 Wa tts. We recom mend that
when fitting and operating a m ob ile            you consult a Vauxhall Authorised
telephone. Failure to d o so could invalida te   Repairer, who will have brack ets and
the v ehicle’ s op erating permit                various installation k its av ailable as
(EU Directive 95/54/EG).                         accessories and will install them in
                                                 accordance with regulations.
Prerequisites for fault-free op eration:
                                                 Be sure to use the handsfree attachment if
z Professionally installed ex terior aerial to   using the telephone w hilst driving. Ev en this
  ob ta in the max imum range possible,          can be a distraction while driving. Please
z Maximum transmission power 10 Watt,            ob serve country-spec ific regulations.
z Installation of the telephone in a suitab le    When used in the v ehicle interior, mobile
  spot (see note on pag e 107).                   telephones and radio equipment (C B)
                                                  with integrated aerial may cause
                                                  malfunctions in the vehicle electronics.
                                                  Mobile telephones and radio equipm ent
                                                  (CB) should only be used with an aerial
                                                  fitted on the vehicle exterior.




                                                                                                   53
Keys, doors, bonnet   Re place ment ke ys
                      The key is a c onstituent of the electronic
                      immobiliser. Ordering keys from a Vauxhall
                      Authorised Repairer g uarantees problem -
                      free op eration of the electronic
                      immobiliser. Y ou will avoid unnecessary
                      costs, difficulties with insurance comp anies
                      when processing claims and problems
                      asserting wa rranty claims.
                      Keep the sp are k ey accessible in a safe
                      place.
                      Locks – see page 248.

                      Lock cylinders
                      Designed to free-wheel if they are
                      forcefully rotated without the correct k ey or     Child safety locks
                      if the correct key is not fully inserted.           Use the child safety lock whenever
                      To reset, turn cy linder with the c orrect key      child ren are occupying the rear seats.
                      until its slot is vertica l, remove key and then    Disregard may lea d to injuries or
                      re-insert it. If the cylinder still free-wheels,    endanger life. Vehicle p assengers should
                      turn the key through 180° and rep eat               be informed accordingly.
                      op eration.
                                                                         Using k ey, turn lever on rear door lock from
                                                                         the vertical position: door cannot then be
                                                                         opened from inside.




54
Ele ctronic imm obilise r                      Control i nd icator for imm obiliser               If the control indicator flashes whilst the
The sy stem checks whether the vehicle m ay    If control indicator o lights when the             ignition is on A , there is a fault in the
be sta rted using the key that has been        ignition is switc hed on, the key is not           eng ine electronic s. The engine cannot be
inserted. If the k ey is recognised as         recognised by the system and the engine            started – see page 166.
"authorised" the vehicle can be started.       cannot b e started:                                Not e
The c heck is carried out via a transponder    1. Turn key to 0 in the ignition a nd remove.      The immobiliser does not lock the doors.
housed in the k ey – see page 56.                                                                 Therefore, after leaving the v ehicle a lways
                                               2. Reinsert key in ignition switch.
To act ivat e:                                                                                    lock it and switch on the anti-theft alarm
Switch off eng ine, turn key to position 0     3. Then repeat starting procedure.                 system 3 – see p ages 58, 63.
and remove.                                    If the control ind ic ator o remains lit, try to   The Car Pass contains all of the vehicle’s
To deacti vate:                                start the engine using the spare key and           data and should therefore not be kept in
                                               consult a workshop. We recommend a                 the vehicle.
Turn key to position I I (ignition on); the
engine can then b e started.                   Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
                                                                                                  Hav e y our Car Pass on hand when
Dea ctivation is not possib le in any other                                                       consulting a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
way , so keep spare key accessible in a safe
place!




                                                                                                                                             55
                                                                                           Position m em ory on v ehic les w ith
                                                                                           electric ally operated front seats 3
                                                                                           When the vehicle is loc ked using the ra dio
                                                                                           freq uency remote c ontrol, the current
                                                                                           position of the driver’s seat and the exterior
                                                                                           and interior m irrors are stored. Personal
                                                                                           settings sa ved using va rious radio
                                                                                           freq uency remote controls can b e retrieved
                                                                                           as follows: open driver’s door within one
                                                                                           minute of unlocking and the positions
                                                                                           stored using the radio frequency remote
                                                                                           control are automa tic ally set – see
                                                                                           pag e 80.
                                                                                           C entra l lock ing system,
                                                                                           see page 58.
Radio fre quency re mote control                For your conv enience, we recommend that   Mechanic al anti -theft locki ng system 3 ,
The rad io frequency remote control is          the central lock ing sy stem alway s be    see page 58.
integrated in the key .                         op erated using the remote control unit.
                                                                                           Boot l id or ta ilgat e,
Used to op erate                                Handle remote control with care, protect   see page 61.
z central locking system,                       from moisture and high temperatures and
                                                                                           Vauxhall ala rm system 3,
z mechanical anti-theft locking system 3,       avoid unnecessary operation.               see page 63.
z boot lid , tailgate,                          Function check by brief illum ination of
z Vauxhall ala rm system 3 .                                                               Electric w indows 3 ,
                                                ha zard warning flashers.                  see page 120.
Electric windows can be opened and
closed 3 using the remote control unit. The                                                Electrica lly op era ted sun roof 3,
electric sun roof 3 c an be c losed using the                                              see page 123.
rem ote control unit.
The remote control has a range of approx.
3 metres. The range can b e affected b y
external influences. Point the remote
control at the v ehicle when opera ting.




56
Fault                                                                                               Mak e sure that you dispose of old batteries
If the central locking system cannot be                                                             in accordance with env ironmental
opera ted with the remote control, it m ay b e                                                      protec tion regulations.
due to the following :                                                                              After replacing batteries, synchronise
z The range of the rem ote control has                                                              remote control: unlocking door using k ey
  been ex ceeded.                                                                                   in lock – see next page. Insert key into
                                                                                                    ignition.
z Remote control b attery v oltag e too low,
  cha nge batteries, see nex t colum n.
z Freq uent, rep eated opera tion of the
  remote control outside the reception
  ra nge of the vehicle (e.g. too far from
  vehicle, rem ote control is then no longer
  recognised). To synchronise remote
  control, see nex t column.
z If the centra l loc king sy stem is            Changing the rem ote control ba ttery
  ov erloaded as a result of repeated            Exchange the battery as soon as the range
  op eration at short interv als, the power      of the rem ote control starts to become
  supply is c ut off for approx . 30 second s.   reduced.
z Interference from higher-power radio           Insert a sma ll screwdriver in the notch in the
  waves from other sources.                      clip and lift. Pull the k ey part from the
For c entral locking sy stem operation using     remote control.
key – see following pa ges. Ha ve c ause of      The transponder for the imm ob iliser is in
fault remedied. We recommend that you            the front of the k ey. Make sure that it is not
consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.          damaged or detached.
                                                 Open the remote c ontrol. Replace the
                                                 battery, ensuring that it is inserted correc tly
                                                 (see pa ge 275 regarding b attery ty pe).
                                                 Close the remote control, insert it in the k ey
                                                 part and ma ke sure it audibly engages.




                                                                                                                                              57
                                                                                                   Turn key in driver’s door loc k towards rear
                                                                                                   of vehicle ag ain within 10 seconds after
                                                                                                   locking, then turn it back to the vertica l
                                                                                                   position a nd remove.
                                                                                                   Lock buttons on all doors are positioned
                                                                                                   such tha t doors ca nnot be opened.

                                                                                                    Do not use the sy stem if there are people
                                                                                                    in the vehicle! The doors cannot b e
                                                                                                    unlocked from inside.




Central locking system                            Securing wi th the mechanica l anti-t heft
For doors, boot lid / tailgate and tank flap.     locking system 3
                                                  All d oors must b e closed. The driver’ s door
Locking                                           must hav e been opened after the ig nition
Press button p on rem ote control unit            was switched on. Within 10 seconds of
– or –                                            lock ing , press button p on the remote
Turn key in driver’ s door lock towards rear      control aga in
of vehic le; then turn it b ack to the vertical   – or –
position and remove. Alternatively, when
locking from inside the vehicle, press the
central locking switch m in one of the front
doors 3 with the doors closed.




58
                                                                                               Not e
                                                                                               z If the driv er’s door is not closed properly ,
                                                                                                 the central loc king sy stem will unlock
                                                                                                 again immediately after lock ing.
                                                                                               z 30 seconds after unlocking using the
                                                                                                 radio frequenc y remote control the doors
                                                                                                 autom atically lock again if neither a
                                                                                                 door nor the luggage compartment has
                                                                                                 been opened.
                                                                                               z To loc k the d oors from within (e.g . to
                                                                                                 prevent und esired a ccess from outside),
                                                                                                 press the central lock ing sw itch m.
                                                                                               z Locked doors unlock a utoma tica lly if an
                                                                                                 accident of a certain sev erity occ urs (to
                                                                                                 permit outside assistance) – prerequisite:
To unlock:                                       Central l oc king sw itch for loc king
                                                                                                 ignition must not be switched off.
To unlock only the driv er’s door:               and unlock ing the doors from insid e
Press button q on remote control unit onc e      the vehicle
– or –                                           Press button m on one of the front doors 3:
Turn key in driver’ s door lock once towards     the doors are lock ed or unlocked as
front of v ehicle, then turn it back to the      appropriate.
vertic al position and remove.                   When the mechanical anti-theft locking
Unlock entire vehic le                           sy stem is active – see pag e 58, the doors
Press button q on rem ote control unit           cannot b e unlocked with this b utton.
twice
– or –
Turn key in driver’ s door lock towards front
of vehic le twice; then turn it bac k to the
vertic al position and remove. Alternatively ,
when unlocking from the inside, press
central locking switch m on one of the front
doors 3.




                                                                                                                                            59
O per ation of wi ndows and sun roof 3            Overloa d
O n vehicles w ith electronically operated        If the centra l locking system is overloa ded
windows, the windows can be op ened a nd          as a result of repeated operation at short
closed from outside: Hold d ow n b utton q        intervals, the p ow er supply is cut off for
or button p on the remote control unit, or        approx. 30 seconds.
hold the k ey in the appropriate position in      The system is protected b y a fuse in the
the door lock, until all windows a re open or     fusebox – see pag e 212.
fully closed.
                                                  For further inform ation on windows and
The sun roof can be closed from outside:          the sun roof – see pages 122, 124.
Hold b utton p on the remote control
depressed or hold the key in the
appropriate position in the door lock until
the sun roof is fully closed .

 Care must be taken when operating the
 elec tric windows and the sun roof. There
                                                                                                  Malfunction in central locking sys te m
 is a risk of injury, especially for child ren,
 and a danger that articles could become                                                          e.g. if vehicle battery is flat.
 trap ped.                                                                                        A = Unlock driv er’s door
 Vehicle passengers should be informed                                                                Turn key forward in lock p ast
                                                                                                      resistance p oint as far as it w ill go.
 according ly .
                                                                                                      Turn key back to vertical position and
 Keep a close wa tch on the windows and                                                               remove.
 sun roof w hen closing them . Ensure that
 nothing becomes trapped in them as                                                               B = Lock driver’s door
 they m ov e.                                                                                         With driver’ s d oor c losed , turn key
                                                                                                      towards rea r of vehicle until it will not
                                                                                                      mov e any further. Turn k ey back to
                                                                                                      vertical position and remove.
                                                                                                  The other doors can be opened and closed
                                                                                                  by pulling or pushing the interior lock
                                                                                                  button (not p ossible if a nti-theft ala rm
                                                                                                  system enabled beforeha nd ). Have cause
                                                                                                  of fault remedied. We rec om mend that y ou
                                                                                                  consult a Vaux ha ll Authorised Repairer.




60
Luggage compartment                               If the luggage comp artm ent is open w hen       There is a handle on the inside of the
To unlock:                                        the ignition is on, s lights up in the           luggage compa rtm ent lid or tailgate for
Press button r on remote control                  tachom eter displa y. A w arning b uz zer will   closing the luggage compa rtm ent.
– or –                                            sound when the vehicle starts off.
Press button q on rem ote control twice           If the lug gage c om partment is not opened
– or –                                            within 5 minutes, it is automatically locked
Turn key in driver’ s door lock forwa rd twice,   again.
turn to vertical position and remove
– or –                                            If the luggage comp artm ent is unlock ed
                                                  the number plate lights come on and
Press button x in d riv er or passenger
side d oor 3.                                     illuminate the area behind the vehicle.
                                                  If the luggage comp artm ent has been
The lug gage compartment is unlocked and
can be opened within 5 minutes. O n the           unlocked and opened, it is autom atically
                                                  lock ed again 5 minutes after closing.
Saloon, this is d one b y pressing the button;
on the esta te car, by p ulling the button        The luggage compartment is
under the handle.                                 autom atic ally locked when the speed
                                                  reaches 2.5 mph (4 km /h).




                                                                                                                                               61
Boot li d, Sal oon                               Locking using k ey in luggage compa rtm ent     After the luggage compartment has been
The door central locking system ca nnot be       lock                                            closed and the k ey turned back to the
locked or unlock ed using the lugga ge           Turn key c lock wise from vertical or           horizontal or vertical position, the luggage
compartment lock.                                horizontal position as far a s it will go. To   compa rtm ent is locked again.
Key slot in lock in horizontal position          guard against being lock ed out, the key        O pen luggag e c om part ment
                                                 cannot then be removed.
The lugga ge com partment ca n be lock ed                                                         Do not drive with the luggage
and unlocked by op erating the remote
                                                                                                  compartment op en or ajar, e.g. when
control or using the key in the driver’s sid e                                                    tra nsporting bulky ob jects, since toxic
lock.
                                                                                                  exhaust gas could penetrate the interior.
Key slot in lock in v ertical position
The lugga ge com partment also rem ains                                                          Fitting accessories to the boot lid or
locked after unlocking using the remote                                                          tailgate will increase its weight. I f it
control or using the key in the driver’s sid e                                                   becomes too hea vy, the boot lid or ta ilg ate
lock. This position m ust be selected if the                                                     will then not stay op en.
luggage compartment is to remain lock ed
whenever this occurs.




62
Vauxhall alarm s yste m 3
monitors:
z the doors, luggage compartment,
  bonnet,
z the passenger c om partment,
z vehicle tilt, e. g. if it is raised,
z the ignition.




                                         To activ ate:                                    Sw itching system on excl ud ing
                                         All doors, windows a nd sun roof 3 must be       m oni toring of the pa ssenger
                                         closed; press button p on the rem ote            com partm ent and the v ehicl e t ilt
                                         control unit again within 10 seconds after       e.g. if anim als a re to be left in the vehic le.
                                         lock ing                                         1. Close tailgate and b onnet.
                                         – or –
                                         Turn key in d riv er’s door lock toward s rear   2. Press b utton Ä. The LED in the b utton
                                         of vehicle again within 10 sec onds after           fla shes (max imum 10 seconds) – see
                                         lock ing , then turn it back to the v ertical       next p age.
                                         position and remove.                             3. Close doors.
                                                                                          4. Switch on anti-theft alarm system .
                                                                                             LED lights up. After app rox . 10 second s
                                                                                             the system is activated, without m onitor-
                                                                                             ing of the passenger compartment or
                                                                                             vehicle tilt. LED flashes until sy stem is
                                                                                             switched off.

                                                                                                                                          6




                                                                                                                                         63
                                            After the first 10 seconds of anti-theft
                                            alarm system activation:
                                            z LED flashes        = System on
                                            z LED lights up for
                                              approx . 1 second = Switch-off
                                            If a system fa ult occ urs, consult a
                                            work shop. We recom mend a Va ux ha ll
                                            Authorised Repairer.




Light emit ting d iode (LED)                                                           To deact ivat e:
During the first 10 seconds of anti-theft                                              Press button q on remote control
alarm system activation:                                                               – or –
                                                                                       Turn k ey in driver’s door lock towards front
z LED lights up   =    Test, switch-on
                                                                                       of vehicle, then turn it back to the vertica l
                       delay
                                                                                       position a nd remove.
z LED flashes     =    Door, tailgate,
                       bonnet open
                       or system fault




64
                                                                                                  Ala rm
                                                                                                  O nly a certain num ber of a la rm s are
                                                                                                  allowed to be trigg ered while the anti-theft
                                                                                                  alarm system is switched on (this number is
                                                                                                  stipula ted b y law).
                                                                                                  The alarm takes the form of:
                                                                                                  z an acoustic signal (horn) a nd
                                                                                                  z a visual sig nal (haz ard warning lights).
                                                                                                  The duration of the a larm signals is limited
                                                                                                  due to lega l regulations.
                                                                                                  Alarm c an be cancelled by pressing a
                                                                                                  button on the remote control. The anti-
                                                                                                  theft wa rning system is switched off at the
                                                                                                  same time by p ressing the button q .
O peni ng and cl osing boot lid or tail gate     Opening a nd closing the lugg age                Alarm siren
using remote contr ol unit butt on r wit h       compa rtment wit h the key in the luggag e       with integrated battery 3
anti -theft alarm system enabled                 compa rtment lock 3 w ith anti-theft alarm       The alarm siren monitors the on-board
                                                 system enabled                                   voltage network and triggers an ala rm if
1. Press button r on remote c ontrol,
   lugga ge c om partment is unlocked –          1. Turn key clockwise as fa r as it will go:     this network is manipulated (e.g . if the
   see pa ge 61, and passenger                      the lugg age com partment is unlocked         vehicle’s ba ttery is disconnected by
   com partment and v ehicle tilt is disabled.      and m onitoring of the pa ssenger             unauthorised persons). The alarm siren ha s
                                                    compa rtm ent and v ehicle tilt is            its own power supply and is therefore not
2. Opening lugg age com partment –                                                                dependent on the vehicles battery .
                                                    deactivated.
   see pa ge 61.
                                                 2. O pening luggage compa rtm ent –              If the vehicle’s battery is to be
3. After closing the luggage compartment                                                          disconnected (e.g. for maintenance w ork ),
                                                    see page 61.
   the monitoring of the passenger                                                                the alarm siren must be dea ctivated as
   com partment a nd vehicle tilt is enabled     3. C lose lug gage compartment.                  follows: sw itch the ignition on then off,
   again after ap prox . 10 seconds.                                                              disconnect the vehicle’s battery within 15
                                                 4. Turn k ey ba ck to previous position: After
                                                    approx . 10 second s, monitoring of the       seconds.
                                                    passenger compartment, lug gage               To swit ch off alarm siren:
                                                    compa rtm ent and vehicle tilt is resumed.    S witc h ignition on then off.




                                                                                                                                             65
                                              Consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer for    Basic program ming of t he univ er sa l
                                              details on compatible systems.                rad io control syst em
                                                                                            1. Switch on ignition.
                                               Ensure that no persons, animals or
                                               objec ts are in the m ov ement zone of the   2. When programming for the first time,
                                               system to be operated (e.g. a ga ra ge          press both outer buttons under the
                                               door). Vehicle passeng ers should be            mirror housing, until the control indicator
                                               inform ed of the hazards.                       along side the b uttons fla shes rapidly .
                                                                                            3. Hold the ma nual remote control unit at a
                                                                                               distance of 0 to 30 c m from the control
                                                                                               button area of the mirror housing.
                                                                                            4. Press the button on the manual rem ote
                                                                                               control unit while p ressing and holding
                                                                                               the desired button of the univ ersal radio
                                                                                               frequency remote control.
Universal radio frequency remote                                                            5. The control ind ic ator in the mirror
control in mirror housing 3                                                                    housing will flash slowly at first. As soon
To opera te up to 3 different remotely                                                         as it flashes rap id ly, release both
opera ted systems (e.g. garage door,                                                           buttons. The universal radio control
domestic alarm system, domestic exterior                                                       sy stem is now programmed for the
lighting ).                                                                                    chosen system.
The p rogram med univ ersal radio                                                           6. To programme other buttons w ith other
frequenc y rem ote control can rep lace the                                                    sy stems, repeat steps 3 to 5.
individual remote control units of the
                                                                                            If a sy stem does not operate the device
systems to be operated. Three buttons on
                                                                                            desp ite repeated programm ing and the
the underside of the m irror housing can be
                                                                                            control ind icator briefly flashes rapidly
used to operate v arious systems.
                                                                                            and then shines with a steady g low for
                                                                                            2 seconds, the receiver m ay be fitted with
                                                                                            a variable code system – see next page.




66
Program ming t he univ er sa l radio control    Rep rogram ming ind ivid ua l butt on            Not e
system for varia ble code systems               sett ings                                        Retain the ma nual remote control in case
                                                If a button that has already been                reprog ra mming is required. It is also
1. Perform basic programming –
                                                prog ra mmed is to be used for a different       possible to continue using the manual
   see previous page.
                                                sy stem, simply repeat steps 3 to 5 of the       remote control.
2. Activ ate synchronisation mode of            basic programming procedure described            If a fter repeated ly performing the above
   system (see sy stem manufacturer’s           previously .                                     steps a system fails to respond to the
   system operating m anual) and briefly
                                                Erasing all prog ramm ed button settings         universal rad io control, consult a workshop.
   press the pre-p rogram med button on
                                                Before selling the vehic le, it is a good idea   We recommend that you consult a
   the univ ersal radio freq uency remote
                                                to erase b utton settings.                       Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
   control three times w ithin 30 second s.
                                                Button settings can only be era sed as a         During programm ing, the vehicle should be
3. The radio control sy stem is now
                                                unit. I t is not p ossible to erase individual   within the range of the receiv er. Under no
   prog ra mmed for variable code system s.
                                                button settings. Buttons can, how ever, be       circumstances should the vehicle be in the
   To prog ra mme other systems for
                                                indiv idua lly rep rogram med                    mov ement zone of a system (e. g. garag e
   variable codes, repeat the above
                                                (see " Reprogramm ing ind iv idual button        door).
   procedure for the other buttons of the
                                                settings").
   universal ra dio control system .                                                             Do not programm e systems which do not
                                                In order to erase the programming of all         have an automatic safety stop
Using the univ ersal radio cont rol system
                                                3 buttons, press both outer buttons and          (manufactured b efore 1982).
With the ignition on, press the required
                                                relea se as soon as the LED begins to flash
universal radio control button, and the                                                          Take note of the sy stem ma nufacturer’s
                                                (a fter approx. 20 seconds). All button
control indica tor in the mirror housing will                                                    safety instructions for drives a nd manual
                                                settings hav e now been cleared and can be
illuminate. The pre-p rogram med sy stem                                                         remote control units.
                                                prog ra mmed anew at any tim e.
can now be operated using the universal
radio control sy stem.




                                                                                                                                            67
                                                                                            The b onnet is held open automatically. To
                                                                                            close the bonnet, lower it slow ly and allow
                                                                                            it to fall into the lock und er its own weight.
                                                                                            C heck that the b onnet is locked in position
                                                                                            by pulling at its front edge. If it is not
                                                                                            eng aged, repeat the procedure.




Bonnet                                        There is a safety catch on the underside of
To open the bonnet, p ull the outer release   the bonnet: lift this upwards and open the
lev er / located below the instrument         bonnet.
panel on the driver’s side. The bonnet will   When the bonnet is opened, snow or d irt on
then be unlocked and will partially open.     the bonnet can slide down and obstruct the
Return the relea se lev er to its origina l   air inta ke. Air intak e – see page 142.
position.




68
Seats, Interior   Adjusting the front s eats
                  see p age 5.

                  Electrically adjustable front seats 3
                  see p age 79.

                  Increasing luggage compartment
                  size by folding down the front seats
                  see p age 82.




                                                          Seat pos ition
                                                          Adjust driver’s sea t such that with the
                                                          driver sitting upright the steering wheel is
                                                          held in the area of its upper spokes with the
                                                          driver’s arms slig htly bent.
                                                          Push p assenger seat as far b ack as
                                                          possible.
                                                          The seat back rests m ust not be tilted too
                                                          far ba ck (recom mended tilting angle
                                                          app rox . 25° ).

                                                           Imp ortant: Do not sit nearer than 10
                                                           inches (25cm) from the steering w heel, to
                                                           permit safe airbag d eploym ent.
                                                           Disregard can lead to injuries which
                                                           could be fa tal. Vehicle passengers
                                                           should be informed ac cord ingly .




                                                                                                    69
Head restraint position                       He ad res traints                               Rear head restraints, integrated in
The midd le of the head restraint should be   To rem ov e head restraints: Release the two    the re ar se at backres t 3
at eye lev el. I f this is not possible for   springs by pressing them and d etach the        To adjust them, pull the head restraint
extremely tall persons, set to highest        head restraint.                                 forwards with both hands and at the same
position, and set to lowest position for                                                      time adjust the height.
                                              Setting – see page 7.
small persons.                                                                                The head restraints can be moved to the
                                              To enlarge the luggage compa rtm ent,
                                                                                              lowest position to improve visib ility where
 Disreg ard can lead to injuries which        push the hea d restra int all the w ay down –
                                                                                              seats are unocc upied.
 could be fatal. Vehicle p assengers          see p age 7.
 should be informed accordingly.

Setting – see page 7 and right hand column.




70
Armrest 3 between the front s eats            To op en, slide the armrest back, press the   Rear seat armrest
The arm rest can be pushed forw ard. If the   button on the front and open.                 The armrest can be folded down.
armrest is not req uired, push it back and                                                  If the rear centre seat is being used or the
fold it up.                                                                                 rear sea t ba ckrests are b eing folded down,
                                                                                            fold armrest up ward.
                                                                                            To open, p ress the button on the front and
                                                                                            open.
                                                                                            The maximum permitted load on the
                                                                                            stowage compartment is 0.5 kg .




                                                                                                                                       71
Travel As sistant 3                             Swivel open a nd hold cover of front     S wivel c onnecting console d ownw ard and
Instal ling the Trav el Assista nt              attachment points in floor in front of   eng age in attachment points.
Insert the tw o rear push-in sleeves into the   console.
marked recesses in the ba ckrest and
enga ge.




72
Swiv el the locking lev er downwards.   Check the locking p osition of the Travel         If it is correctly locked, the red m ark must
                                        Assistant: the red mark (see Fig. 15028 J)        no longer b e v isible in the window,
                                        must not be visible. Otherw ise, lock using       otherwise the procedure must be repeated .
                                        the key – see page 77, Fig. 15037 J .
                                                                                           If it is not correctly locked, the Travel
                                        To lock, insert Tra vel Assistant into recesses
                                                                                           Assistant could b e propelled forward
                                        in connecting console and slid e back as fa r      with considera ble force when hard
                                        as possible.
                                                                                           braking occurs, risk of injury.

                                                                                                                                       6




                                                                                                                                       73
                                                                                          The up per stowage compartment is
                                                                                          located under the armrest. To open, press
                                                                                          the button and fold the armrest upwa rds.




Drink hol der and ac cessory soc kets       Stowa ge compa rtments
O pen the drink hold er by pressing the     Open the lower stowag e com partment by
marking.                                    pressing the mark ing. The underside of the
                                            compartment has an opening through
O nly accessories with max imum power
                                            whic h the objects in the compartment can
consump tion of 120 Watts must be
                                            be ra ised.
connected to the a ccessory sock ets. For
notes – see pa ge 89.




74
Connecting consol e for DVD pl ayer 3    Swivel up the display holder, slide DVD        Electric c ool box
Pull connecting console upward, p ress   player display into brack et from below a nd   To open, fold open the armrest together
button and slid e downward .             fix in position with brack et.                 with the stowage compa rtm ent.
                                         Maximum loa d: 1 kg.




                                                                                                                                  75
Switch on the cool box as needed.   Ta bles                                                S et required clearance b y adjusting
                                    Fold arm rest upward (1).                              longitudinal position of table (4).
                                    Use recessed grip to p ull tab le upward as
                                    fa r a s it will go (1), sw iv el table forw ard (2)
                                    and fold downward (3).




76
To fold away the tab le, swivel the                 Fold the table upwards p ast the resistance     Remov ing the Trav el Assistant
armrest up.                                         point (2), swiv el it downwards and insert in   O pen catch using key , red mark appears in
                                                    the Travel Assista nt (3).                      window.
Push the table forw ard as far as it will go (1).
                                                    Swivel armrest down.
                                                                                                                                              6




                                                                                                                                             77
Pull the Tra vel Assistant to the front on the   Press the locking lev er down, press the   S wivel connecting c onsole upward and pull
connecting console and remove.                   button on the front of the connecting      out of recesses.
                                                 console a nd sw iv el the locking lev er
Fit the protec tiv e cov er 3 on the plug.
                                                 up wards.




78
Ele ctrically adjustable front se ats 3                                                     Adjusting the long itudinal p osition
                                                                                            Move switch 1 forwa rd s / ba ckwards.
 Care must be taken when operating the
                                                                                            Height adjustm ent
 elec trically adjustab le sea ts. There is a
 risk of injury, p articularly for children,                                                Move switch 1 upw ards / downwards at
                                                                                            rear.
 and a danger that articles could become
 trap ped.                                                                                  S eat ba ck adjustment
                                                                                            Turn sw itch 2 forwards / backw ards.
 Keep a close watch on the seats when
 adjusting them.                                                                            O perate switch until desired seat position is
                                                                                            reached. Seat position – see p age 69.
 Vehicle passengers should be informed
 according ly .                                                                             After a djusting the seat, adjust height of
                                                                                            seat belt – see page 98.



                                                Adjustment
                                                The seat p osition can be adjusted by
                                                means of switches on the outboard side of
                                                the seats.
                                                Ad justing the inclination
                                                Move switch 1 upwards / downwards at
                                                front.




                                                                                                                                       79
Elec trical ly operat ed lumba r sup port 3   Thi gh sup port 3 on driver’s seat                Memory function 3 for elec trical ly
on driv er’s seat                             To adjust, lift handle at front and slide sea t   ad justable dri ver’s sea t, exterior mirrors
Adjust lumb ar support using four-way         padding.                                          and interior mi rror
switch on outboard side of driver’s seat.                                                       Three different seat and mirror settings can
                                              Do not a djust the thigh support whilst
                                                                                                be stored (e.g. for three drivers).
Adjust lumb ar support to suit personal       driving.
req uirements.
Moving support up and d ow n: push b utton
up or down.
Increa sing and decreasing support: push
button forward or backwa rd.




80
Readiness for operation                      Storing settings                                S tore and activ ate the setting s using the
                                                                                             remote controls
z With ignition on,                          1. Adjust seat,
                                                                                             When the vehicle is loc ked with the radio
z Within 10 m inutes of switching ignition   2. Adjust interior mirror – see page 8,         freq uency remote c ontrol, the current
  off,                                                                                       positions of the d riv er’s seat, the exterior
                                             3. Adjust exterior mirror – see page 8,
z Within 10 m inutes of opening or closing                                                   mirrors and the interior m irror a re stored.
                                             4. Press m emory button M and the position
  the driver’s door,                                                                         Personal settings stored using different
                                                button to be used (1, 2 or 3)                radio frequency remote controls can be
z Within 10 m inutes of inserting or            simulta neously, and stora ge is             retrieved as follows: op en driver’s door
  removing the ignition k ey.                   ack nowledged by an acoustic signal.         within one m inute of unlocking a nd the
Readiness for operation stops when the       Retriev ing settings                            positions stored using the radio frequency
vehic le is locked.                          Keep position key 1, 2 or 3 pressed until the   remote control are autom atically set.
                                             stored sea t and mirror positions have b een    The seat adjusting proc edure can be
                                             reached .                                       stopped immediately if required by
                                             For reasons of safety, seat adjustm ent         operating a setting button.
                                             stops immediately if the p osition button is    Passeng er m irror w ith par king a id
                                             relea sed or one of the setting buttons is      see page 8.
                                             op erated.
                                                                                             O verload
                                             Ad justments may only be performed with         If the seat setting is electrically overloaded,
                                             vehicle stationary.                             the power supply is automatically cut off
                                                                                             for a short time.
                                                                                             The sy stem is protected by a fuse in the
                                                                                             fusebox – see page 212.




                                                                                                                                         81
Luggage compartment extens ion                Cover behind arm rest can be locked from   Folding d own the rear seat ba ckrests
Fold dow n the cover behind the arm rest      lugg age compartment 3: turn handle 90°:   Push the rear head restraints right down.
Fold down the a rm rest on to the seat        Locked    =   Handle horiz ontal           Place the b elt buckles in storage pockets in
cushion, pull the handle and tilt the cover   Unlock ed =   Handle vertic al             the seat cushions.
forwards.
                                                                                         Push front seats forwards a little.
The outer seats can continue to be used for
passengers.                                                                              Remove Travel Assistant 3 – see page 77.
                                                                                         Unlock one or both rear sea t backrests by
Enga ge the cover behind the centre
armrest a udib ly in position.                                                           depressing p ushbuttons and fold down on
                                                                                         to seat cushion.
                                                                                         Return the air front seats to the desired
                                                                                         positions.




82
When returning rear seat back rests to          Fold ing down t he front passenger seat 3        Luggage compartment cover 3,
upright, they should audibly click into         Push head restra int on front passenger’s        5-door Saloon (Hatch)
position.                                       seat down as far as it will g o.                 To remove, unhook the retaining straps
                                                                                                 from the tailgate.
The three-point seat belt for the centre rear   Slide back the front p assenger seat.
seat can only be pulled out of the retractor                                                     Remove the cover from the side guides.
                                                Fold front passenger sea t forwa rd by
if the rear seat backrests are prop erly        ra ising release lever.                          Fit in reverse order.
locked into position.
                                                When returning front passenger seat
O n some versions, the rear seat b ackrests     backrest to upright, it should audibly c lic k
can be locked 3 : insert the key in the lock    into position.
nex t to the pushbutton, turn 180° a nd
rem ov e – see figure.                          Notes on loading
                                                see p age 88.




                                                                                                                                          83
Luggage compartment cover 3,                    Rem oving                                         Safety net 3,
Estate                                          Open luggage compartment cover.                   Estate
To close:                                       Move release lev er on right side of lug gage     The safety net can be fitted behind the rear
Pull lug gage compartment cover toward s        compartment cov er upwa rd . Lift rig ht          seats or, with the rear seat back rest folded
rea r of vehicle using handle and hook into     cover a nd remove from brac kets.                 down, behind the front seats.
side retainers.
                                                Fit ting                                          Fitti ng behind the rear seats
Do not place any heavy or sharp-edged           Fit the lug gage compartment cover in the         Remove the luggage comp artm ent cover.
objects on the cover.                           bracket on the left-hand side, fold up the        Fit the ca ssette with rolled safety net into
To open:                                        relea se lever on the right-ha nd side, fit the   the side brack ets and enga ge b y twisting .
Remove luggag e compartment c ov er from        lugg age compartment cover in the bracket
side b ra ckets. I t rolls up automatically .   on the right-hand side and p ress the
                                                relea se lev er closed.




84
Ex tend the net from the cassette. The roof   Removing                                      Fitti ng behind front seats
frame houses two fitting openings. Fit the    Remove the lug gage compartment cover.        Fold both rear seat back rests. Place the
net rod in the fitting opening on one side                                                  rolled net on the floor behind the front
                                              Detach the safety net rod from the
and then the other and engage by pushing                                                    seats in suc h a way that the cog rail in the
                                              brackets in the roof frame.
forward.                                                                                    slit on the net is to the rear.
                                              Slide both latches inwards; push the
Fit the luggage compa rtm ent cover.                                                        Pull ea ch side hook from the cassette and
                                              cassette with rolled net rea rw ards in the
                                                                                            attach it to an eye 3 in the vehicle floor.
                                              bracket, twist and rem ov e upw ards.
                                                                                            Extend the net from the cassette. The roof
                                                                                            frame houses two fitting openings. Fit the
                                                                                            net rod in the fitting opening on one side
                                                                                            and then the other and engag e by pushing
                                                                                            forward.
                                                                                            Removing
                                                                                            Detach the safety net rod from the
                                                                                            brack ets in the roof frame.
                                                                                            Undo the side hooks from the eyes 3 in the
                                                                                            vehicle floor.




                                                                                                                                       85
Lashing eyes                                 FlexO rganizer 3                               The figures show examples of possible
These enable loads to be secured in          Flexible sy stem for dividing the luggage      uses.
position in the lugga ge compartment using   compartment or securing load s in an           Varia ble part ition wa ll
lashing straps 3 or a luggage net 3 .        Estate.                                        Fig. 15179 J . Press the rod s of the partition
                                             The components are housed in a stow age        wall together slightly and engage in the
                                             compartment at the rea r in the load floor –   desired guide rail openings in the side
                                             see p age 92.                                  walls. The rods c an be engaged in various
                                                                                            positions.
                                             The system c onsists of
                                             z variab le partition net                      Varia ble part ition net
                                             z variab le partition wall                     Fig. 15180 J . Press the rod s of the partition
                                             z partition rod                                net tog ether slightly and engage in the
                                             z mesh p oc kets for the side walls            desired guide rail openings in the side
                                             z hooks                                        walls. The rods c an be engaged in various
                                                                                            positions. The partition net can be
                                             The components can be mounted in the           mounted vertically or horizontally at
                                             two guide ra ils in the side walls of the      different levels.
                                             lugg age compartment.




86
Hooks and mesh poc kets for the sid e wa lls     Rem oving                                      To stow, pull apa rt the partition wall / net
Fig. 15181 J. Engage the hooks in the            Press together the rods of the partition       rods as well as the sepa rate telescopic rod
openings of the guide rails in the sid e walls   wall / net or the telescopic rods and remove   in the middle and fold them in half. Roll the
as indic ated in the figure and turn 90°. The    from the guide rails. Turn the hook s 90°      partition wa ll and net together and place it
mesh pockets can be hung from the hooks.         and rem ov e.                                  in the compartment with the other
                                                                                                components. C lose the c ov er.
                                                 FlexOrga nizer stowa ge
                                                 FlexOrga nizer c om ponents are housed in a
                                                 stowage compa rtm ent at the rear in the
                                                 loa d floor. To open, ra ise the handle and
                                                 op en the flap – see pag e 92, Fig. 15171 J.




                                                                                                                                           87
Notes on loading the vehicle                                                                     z Do not place any objec ts in front of the
z Heav y objec ts in the lug gage                                                                  rear window or on the instrum ent panel.
  com partment should be placed as far                                                             They a re reflected in the glass, obstruct
  forward as possible aga inst the engag ed                                                        the driver’s view and will be thrown
  rear seat backrests or, if the rear seat                                                         through the vehicle, for instance in the
  backrests are folded down, against the                                                           event of heavy braking.
  front seat b ackrests. If objects a re to be                                                   z Objects m ust not be stored in the a irb ag
  stacked, the heav ier objects should be                                                          inflation area, because they could cause
  placed at the b ottom. Unsecured objec ts                                                        injury if the airbag inflates.
  in the luggage compartment would be
  thrown forward with great force in the                                                         z Do not drive with the luggage
                                                                                                   compartment op en, e.g. when
  event of heavy braking, for exam ple.
                                                                                                   tra nsporting bulky ob jects, since toxic
z Secure heav y objec ts with lashing                                                              ex haust gas could p enetrate the interior.
  straps 3 atta ched to lashing ey es –
  see page 86. If heavy loads slip when the                                                      z Weights, payload and roof loa d –
                                                                                                   see page 262.
  vehicle is braked heavily or driven             z If objects are being transp orted in the
  around a bend, the handling of the                luggage compa rtm ent, the rear sea t        z Driv ing with a roof load – see p ages 158,
  vehicle may chang e.                              back rests m ust be locked in position –       161, 188, increases the sensitivity of the
z Saloon: loose objects in the lugg age             see page 82.                                   vehicle to cross-winds and has a
                                                                                                   detrimenta l effec t on vehicle handling
  com partment should be secured ag ainst         z Do not a llow the load to protrude ab ov e
  slipping using a luggage net 3 –                                                                 owing to the vehicle’s higher centre of
                                                    the upp er edge of the rear seat               gravity.
  see pa ge 86.                                     back rests, or above the upper ed ge of
z Estate: when transporting objects in the          the front seat b ackrests if the rear seat    Disregarding the instructions can
  lugga ge compa rtm ent, fit a safety net 3        back rests a re folded down.                  potentially lead to fatal injury. Vehicle
  – see page 84, or FlexO rganizer 3 –            z The warning triangle 3 and first-aid kit 3    passeng ers should be inform ed
  see pa ge 86.                                     must alway s b e freely a ccessib le.         accordingly.
z Estate: close the luggage compa rtm ent
  cov er so there is no reflection in the rea r
  wind ow.




88
Cigarette lighte r ) 3                      Accessory socket 3                               Do not dam age the soc kets by using
In front centre console.                    The soc ket in the centre console and the        unsuitable plugs.
                                            cigarette lighter socket can be used to          The maximum power c onsumption of
Press in cigarette lighter with ignition
                                            connect electrical accessories. The sockets      electrical ac cessories m ust not ex ceed
switched on. S witches off autom atically
                                            are ready for operation when the ignition is     120 w atts.
once the element is glowing. Pull out
                                            switched on. If the eng ine is not running the
lighter.                                                                                     Do not connect any current-delivering
                                            battery will be discharged. An a dditional
                                                                                             acc essories, e.g. electrical charging
                                            accessory soc ket 3 can be found in the
                                            centre console b eneath the rear air vents       devices or b atteries.
                                            and in the Travel Assistant 3.                   Electrical ac cessories connected to the
                                            Estates have an additional accessory             socket must c om ply with the electro-
                                                                                             ma gnetic compa tib ility requirem ents laid
                                            socket to the left in the luggag e
                                            compartment next to the lug gage                 down in DIN VDE 40 839, otherwise vehicle
                                                                                             ma lfunctions m ay occur.
                                            compartment lig hting.
                                                                                             Accessory sockets in the Trav el Assistant 3 –
                                                                                             see page 74.




                                                                                                                                         89
Ashtray                                       To empty , grip b oth sides of the ashtray   Rear a sht ray 3
To be used only for ash and not for           insert a nd pull upwards.                    In the rear c entre console.
combustible rubbish.                                                                       The cover op ens when pressed a t the point
                                                                                           indicated.
 Disreg ard c an lead to injuries which may
 be fatal. Vehicle pa ssengers should be                                                   To empty: open the ashtray, press the
 informed accordingly.                                                                     spring (arrow ) and pull out the ashtray.

Ashtray, front
The cover opens when pressed at the point
indicated .




90
Glove com partm ent                         Stow age compartment in the roof          Stowage compartments in the
To open, pull hand le upwards.              lining 3                                  luggage compartme nt
                                            To op en, press the point indic ated.     To acc ess p ress d ow n bar and open the
At the front of the opened cover there is
                                                                                      cover.
a p en holder.                              The max imum permitted load on the
                                            stowage compa rtm ent is 0. 4 kg.         Warning triangle ¨ 3 and first-aid kit + 3
Cooled glove compartment 3 –
                                                                                      stowage – see page 204.
see page 139.                               The stowage compartment m ust be closed
                                            whilst driving.                           S towing the spare w heel – see page 205.
                                                                                      J ack and vehicle tools stowage –
                                                                                      see page 208.

                                                                                                                                  6




                                                                                                                                  91
Estates hav e an a dditional stowage       When op ening, ensure that the flap opens       Drink holders , front 3
compartment in the luggage com partment    at the seam so that the entire floor cover is   The drink hold ers can be found between
floor.                                     not raised .                                    the front seats in the centre c onsole: slide
To open, pull the release lever and open                                                   cover open.
the flap.




92
                                               Sun visors
                                               Use the sun visor to protect from glare by
                                               pulling it down and swivelling it to the side.




Drinks holders , rear 3
The d rinks holder can be found b eneath
the centre seat: pressing front ed ge mov es
drink holder out.




                                                                                                93
Safety systems   Three-stage re straint system
                 Comprising:                                       The airbag systems serve to supp lement
                                                                   the three-point seat belts and belt
                 z three-point seat belts,                         tensioners. The seat belts must therefore
                 z belt tensioners at the front seats and the      always be worn. Disregard of these
                   rea r outer seats,                              instructions may lea d to injuries or
                                                                   endanger life. Vehicle p assengers should
                 z airbag sy stems for driver, front               be informed accordingly.
                   passenger and outer rea r seats 3.
                 The three stag es are a ctivated in sequence     Be sure to rea d the a ccompanying
                 depending on the seriousness of the              desc ription of the child restraint system !
                 accident:
                 z The automa tic seat belt locking devices
                   prevent the belt strap from being pulled
                   out and thus ensure that the v ehicle
                   occupants are retained in their seats.
                 z The front seat b elt buckles and outer
                   rea r seats are pulled downwards. As a
                   result, the seat belts are instanta neously
                   tightened and the occupants are mad e
                   aware of the deceleration of the v ehicle
                   at a very ea rly sta ge. This reduc es the
                   stress p laced on the body.
                 z The airbag sy stems a re also triggered in
                   the ev ent of serious accidents and form a
                   safety cushion for the occupants.
                   Depending on the severity of the
                   accident, the front a irb ags inflate in two
                   stages.




94
Seat belts                                In the event of an accident, persons not
                                          wearing sea t belts enda ng er their fellow
 Alwa ys wea r your seat belt, and that   oc cup ants and themselves.
 means also in urb an traffic and when
 you are a rear seat passenger. It can    Warning light X for the seat belt – see
                                          page 35.
 save y our life!
 Pregnant women m ust alwa ys wear a      Sea t belts are desig ned to be used by only
                                          one person at a time. They are not suitable
 seat belt – see page 98.
                                          for a ny one under 12 years of age or
                                          150 cm.
                                          For children up to 12 years of age we
                                          recommend the Vaux hall child restraint
                                          system – see page 110.



                                                                                         Three-point seat belts
                                                                                         The vehicle is equipped with three-point
                                                                                         seat belts with automatic retrac tors and
                                                                                         locking d evices, allowing freedom of body
                                                                                         mov ement although the spring-tensioned
                                                                                         belts always ensure a snug fit. For seat
                                                                                         position – see pages 69, 99.
                                                                                         The belt has a " vehicle sensitive retra ctor"
                                                                                         which is designed to lock during hea vy
                                                                                         acc eleration or deceleration in any
                                                                                         direction.




                                                                                                                                     95
Belt tens ioners
The front seat belt and outer rear seat
systems are equipped with b elt tensioners.
If a head-on or tail-end collision of a
certa in severity occurs, the belt buckles are
pulled downward and the shoulder and lap
belts are tightened in an instant.




                                                 Actuati on of belt tensioners                   C ont rol indic ator v for belt tensioners
                                                 is indicated by illum ina tion of control       The belt tensioners are monitored
                                                 indica tor v, see next p age.                   electronically together with the a irb ag
                                                                                                 systems and their operational rea diness is
                                                 The belt tensioners must be replaced after
                                                                                                 indicated on the instrument panel by
                                                 activation. We recommend that you
                                                                                                 control ind icator v. When the ignition is
                                                 consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
                                                                                                 switched on, the c ontrol indicator lights up
                                                 If the seat belts are unda maged the            for approx. 4 seconds. If it does not light
                                                 op eration thereof is unaffected, even if the   up, does not go off after 4 seconds, or
                                                 belt tensioners have been triggered.            lights up while d riv ing, there is fault in the
                                                 Further inform ation – see page 99.             belt tensioner sy stem or the a irb ag system s
                                                                                                 – see page 105. The belt tensioners or
                                                                                                 airbag sy stems may fail to trigger in the
                                                                                                 event of an a ccident.




96
                                              Imp or tant                                     z The belt tensioner and airbag sy stem
 Have the cause of the fault remedied .                                                         control electronics can be found in the
 We recom mend that y ou consult a            z Accessories and other objects must not
                                                                                                centre console area. In order to av oid
                                                be affixed or placed within the action
 Vauxhall Authorised Rep airer.                                                                 malfunctions, do not store mag netic
                                                zone of the belt tensioners a s this may
                                                                                                objects in this a rea.
                                                result in injury if the belt tensioners are
The system ’s integrated self-diagnostics
                                                triggered.                                    z We recom mend that you have the front
allows faults to be quickly remedied. have
                                                                                                seats removed by a Vauxhall Authorised
Ca r Pass on hand when consulting a           z Do not mak e any modifications to the
                                                                                                Repairer.
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.                   components of the belt tensioners, as
                                                this will render the vehicle unroad-          z The belt tensioners only actuate once.
The c ontrol indicators can also be located
                                                worthy.                                         Please replace belt tensioners that have
in the tac hometer d isplay dial – see
                                                                                                been triggered. We recom mend tha t you
page 37.                                       Imp roper handling (e. g. removal or             consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
                                               installation) can activ ate the belt
                                                                                              z Applicable safety directives must always
                                               tensioners – risk of injury .
                                                                                                be ob served when disposing of the
                                                                                                vehicle. For this reason, d isposal should
                                                                                                be performed by an authorised recycling
                                                                                                company. We recommend that you
                                                                                                consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.




                                                                                                                                        97
Using the belts                                                                                   Height adjustm ent
                                                  O n pregnant women in particular, the
Fitting seat bel ts                                                                               of seat belt upper anchora ge p oint:
                                                  lap belt must be positioned as low as
Pull the belt out of the retractor and guide                                                      1. Pull b elt out slig htly.
                                                  possible ac ross the pelv is so as not to put
it across the body , making certain that it is    too much pressure on the abdomen.
not twisted.                                                                                      2. Front seat b elts: Press button down or
                                                                                                     slide belt guide up.
Insert the la tch plate into the buckle. The     Bulk y clothing prevents the belt from fitting      Rear seat belts: Press belt guide and
front sea t b ackrest must not be tilted back    prop erly. The belt must not rest against           slide it upwards or downwards.
too far or the seat belt will not op erate       ha rd or fragile objects in the pockets of
properly . The recommended angle of              your clothing (e.g. ballpoint pens, keys,        3. Set desired height.
inclina tion is 25° . Mak e sure that the lap    spectacles) because these could cause            4. Allow anchorage to lock aud ibly into
belt is not twisted and that it fits snugly      injury. Do not place any objec ts (e.g.             position.
across the body. Tension the belt                ha ndb ags, mobile phones) b etween the
                                                 belt and your body.                              Do not adjust height while driving .
frequently while d riv ing by tugging the
diagonal pa rt of the belt.




98
                                                                                              Testing the belts
                                                                                              Plea se check all parts of the b elt system
                                                                                              occasionally for dama ge a nd correct
                                                                                              operation. H ave da maged parts replaced .
                                                                                              In ca se of an accident, please replace
                                                                                              overstretc hed belts and triggered belt
                                                                                              tensioners. We recommend consulting a
                                                                                              Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
                                                                                              Do not perform any altera tions on the
                                                                                              belts, their anchorages, the automatic
                                                                                              retrac tors or the belt buck les.
                                                                                              Mak e sure that b elts are not da maged or
                                                                                              trapped by sharp-edged objec ts.


Adjust height such that the belt p asses      Rem oving t he b el t
over the wearer’s shoulder and rests          To remove the belt, d epress the red
against the shoulder. It must not pass over   pushbutton on the buckle; the b elt will
the neck or upper arm.                        retract automatically.
                                              Three-point seat b el t on centre rear sea t
                                              The belt can only be pulled out of the
                                              retractor if the ba ck seat rests are engaged
                                              in their retainers – see page 82.




                                                                                                                                       99
                                                                                                 Exception:
                                                                                                 Passenger sea t with seat occupancy
                                                                                                 recognition system 3 . The seat occupancy
                                                                                                 recognition system deactiva tes the
                                                                                                 passenger front and side airbags if the
                                                                                                 passenger seat is unoccupied or a
                                                                                                 Vauxhall child restraint system with
                                                                                                 transponders 3 has been fitted to the
                                                                                                 passenger seat. S eat occupa ncy
                                                                                                 recognition – see page 105. Vauxhall child
                                                                                                 restraint system w ith transponders 3 –
                                                                                                 see page 110.
                                                                                                 Examples of events triggering the front
                                                                                                 airbag sy stem:
                                                                                                 z Impact against a non-y ielding obstacle:
Vauxhall Full-Size airbag s yste m               The front airb ag system will be trigg ered :     the front airbags are trigg ered at low
Front airb ag                                                                                      vehicle speed.
                                                 z depending on the severity of the
The front airbag system is identified by the       accident,                                     z Impact against a yield ing obstacle
word AI RBAG on the steering wheel and                                                             (such as another vehicle): the front
above the glov e c om partment.                  z depending on the type of impact,
                                                                                                   airbags are only triggered at a hig her
                                                 z within the range shown in the figure,           vehicle speed.
The front airbag system comprises:
z an airbag with inflator in the steering        z indep endent of side airbag a nd curta in
                                                   airbag sy stem 3.
  wheel and a second one in the
  instrum ent panel,
z the control elec tronics with impact
  sensor,
z the a irb ag system s control indicator v in
  the instrument panel,
z seat occupancy recognition 3 ,
z the control indica tor for Vauxhall child
  restraint sy stems y with transponders 3
  in the instrument panel.




100
When trigg ered , the front airbags inflate in                                                  The front airbag sy stem will not be
                                                 The front airbag sy stem provides
milliseconds to form a safety cushion for                                                       triggered in the ev ent of:
                                                 optimum p rotection when the seat,
the d riv er and front passenger. The                                                           z the ignition being switched off,
                                                 back rest and head restra int are correctly
forward movement of the front seat                                                              z minor frontal collisions,
                                                 adjusted: Adjust the driver’s seat
occupants is c hecked, thereby                                                                  z accidents in which the vehicle overturns,
                                                 according to the occupant’s height such
sub stantially reducing the risk of injury to                                                   z collisions involving a sid e or rear impac t,
                                                 that with the driver sitting upright the
the upp er body and hea d.                                                                      that is to say, if it w ould not be of benefit to
                                                 steering wheel is held in the a rea of its     the oc cup ants.
No im pairment of view will occur, because       upper sp ok es with the d riv er’s arms
the a irb ags inflate and deflate so quickly .   slightly bent. The front passenger’ s sea t
                                                 should b e as far b ack as possible, w ith
                                                 the back rest upright – see pa ges 5, 6, 69.
                                                 Do not place the head, b od y, hands or
                                                 feet on the covers of the airbag sy stems.
                                                 Do not place any objects in the area in
                                                 which the airb ags inflate. Im portant
                                                 inform ation – see page 107.
                                                 The three-point seat belt must be
                                                 correctly fitted – see page 98.




                                                                                                                                             101
 Seat belts must therefore always be
 worn. The front airbag system serves to
 supplement the three-point seat belts.
 If you d o not wear your seat belt you risk
 being seriously injured, or even thrown
 from the vehic le, in the ev ent of an
 accident.
 In the event of an accident the belt helps
 to keep you in the correct seating
 position, so that the front airb ag system
 can provide you with effective
 protection.

In addition, the front airb ag sy stem will not
be triggered for the front passenger in           Side airb ag 3                                  The side airbag sy stem will be triggered:
versions with seat occupancy recognition 3
                                                  The side a irb ag system is identified by the
if:                                                                                               z depending on severity of the a ccident,
                                                  word AIRBAG on the outb oa rd sides of the
z the front passenger’s seat is unoccupied,       front seat backrests.                           z depending on the ty pe of im pact,
z there is a prop erly fitted Va ux ha ll child   The side a irb ag system c om prises:           z within the range shown in the figure on
  restraint system with transponders 3 .                                                            the centre door pillar of the driver’s or
                                                  z an airbag with infla tor in the back of the
  Seat oc cup ancy recognition – see                                                                front passenger side,
                                                    driver’s and front passenger’s seat
  page 105. Vauxhall child restraint                                                              z ind epend ently of the front airbag
                                                    respectively ,
  system with transponders 3 –                                                                      sy stem.
  see pa ge 110.                                  z the control electronics,
                                                                                                  Exception:
                                                  z the side impact sensors,                      Passenger sea t with seat occupancy
                                                  z the airbag systems control ind icator v in    recognition system 3. S eat occupancy
                                                    the instrum ent panel,                        recognition system deactiva tes the
                                                                                                  passenger front and side airbags if the
                                                  z seat occ upa ncy rec og nition 3,
                                                                                                  passenger seat is unoccupied or a
                                                  z the control indicator for Va ux ha ll child   Vauxhall child restraint system with
                                                    restraint systems y with transponders 3       transponders 3 has been fitted to the
                                                    in the instrum ent panel.                     passenger seat. S eat occupa ncy
                                                                                                  recognition – see page 105. Vauxhall child
                                                                                                  restraint sy stem with transponders 3 – see
                                                                                                  pag e 110.


102
                                                   There must be no objects in the area in
                                                   which the airb ag inflates or in the a rea
                                                   between the seat backs and the vehicle
                                                   body . Do not place the hands or arms on
                                                   the covers of the airba g systems.
                                                   Imp ortant information – see page 107.
                                                   The three-p oint seat b elt m ust always b e
                                                   correctly fitted – see page 98.

                                                  The side airba gs will not be triggered in the
                                                  event of
                                                  z the ig nition being sw itched off,
                                                  z fronta l collisions,
When the side a irb ag is triggered it inflates   z accidents in which the vehicle overturns,      C ur tain ai rbag 3
within milliseconds and provides a safety         z collisions involving a rear impac t,           The curtain a irba g system is identified by
barrier for the driver and/or pa ssenger in                                                        the word AIRBAG on the roof pillar trim.
                                                  z collisions involving a side imp act outside
the v icinity of the relevant front door. This
                                                    the passenger cell.                            The curtain a irba g system com prises
red uces the risk of injury to the upper body
considerably in case of a side impact.            In addition, the side airbag system w ill not    z an airbag w ith inflator in the roof frame
                                                  be triggered for the front passenger in            on the d riv er’s and front passenger’s side
                                                  versions with seat occupa ncy recognition 3        respectively,
                                                  if                                               z the control electronics,
                                                  z the front p assenger’s sea t is unoccupied,    z the side im pact sensors,
                                                  z there is a properly fitted Vauxhall child      z the airbag sy stems control indicator v in
                                                    restraint system with transpond ers 3.           the instrument panel.
                                                    Seat occupancy recognition – see page
                                                    105. Vauxhall child restraint system w ith
                                                    transp onders 3 – see p age 110.




                                                                                                                                             103
                                                                                                  There m ust be no objec ts in the area in
                                                                                                  which the airbag inflates. Do not place
                                                                                                  the hands or arms on the covers of the
                                                                                                  airbag sy stems. Important information –
                                                                                                  see page 107.
                                                                                                  The three-point seat belt must alway s be
                                                                                                  correctly fitted – see pag e 98.

                                                                                                 The curtain airbags will not b e triggered in
                                                                                                 the event of
                                                                                                 z the ignition being switched off,
                                                                                                 z frontal collisions,
                                                                                                 z accidents in which the vehicle overturns,
The curtain airbag system will be trigg ered    When the curtain airbag is triggered it          z collisions involving a rear impact,
                                                inflates w ithin milliseconds and provides a
z depending on the severity of the                                                               z collisions involving a side impact outside
                                                safety barrier in the hea d area on the
  accident,                                                                                        the passenger cell.
                                                respective side of the vehicle. This reduces
z depending on the typ e of impa ct,            the risk of injury to the head considerably in
z within the rang e shown in the figure on      case of a side impact.
  the centre door pillar of the d riv er’s or
  front passenger side,
z together with the side airbag sy stem,
z irrespective of seat occupancy
  recognition,
z independently of the front airbag
  system .




104
                                                                                                  Seat occupancy recogniti on 3
                                                    Hav e the cause of the fa ult remedied.       The seat occupancy recognition system
                                                    We recommend that you consult a               deactivates the front a nd side airbag s for
                                                    Vauxhall Authorised R epairer.                the front passenger if the front passenger
                                                                                                  seat is not occupied or a Vauxhall child
                                                   The system’s integ ra ted self-diagnostics
                                                                                                  restraint system w ith transponders 3 is
                                                   allow s faults to be quickly remedied. have
                                                                                                  fitted on the front passenger seat. The
                                                   Car Pass on ha nd when consulting a
                                                                                                  curtain airb ag sy stem 3 remains activated .
                                                   Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
                                                                                                  The control indicator for seat occupancy
                                                   The control indica tors can a lso be located
                                                                                                  recognition is located in the instrument
                                                   in the tachometer display dial – see
                                                                                                  panel. If this control indicator lights up for
                                                   page 37.
                                                                                                  app rox . 4 seconds after the ignition is
                                                                                                  switched on, the vehicle is equip ped with
                                                                                                  seat oc cup anc y recog nition – see next
                                                                                                  pag e, Fig. 13068 J .
Cont rol indica tor v for airb ag systems                                                         If a Vaux ha ll child restraint system with
The front airbag system , the side airbag                                                         transponders 3 is installed, this warning
system 3 and the curtain airbag system 3                                                          light remains on after the ignition has been
are monitored electronically together with                                                        switched on a s soon as the system ha s
seat occupancy recognition 3 and the belt                                                         detected the seat. O nly then can the child
tensioners. Their opera tional readiness is                                                       restraint sy stem be used on the pa ssenger
shown b y control ind icator v in the                                                             seat.
instrument panel. When the ignition is
switched on, the control indic ator lights up
for approx. 4 seconds. If it does not light
up, d oes not go out after 4 seconds or
lights up while driving, there is a fault in the
airbag sy stems, seat occupancy
recognition 3 or the belt tensioners – see
page 96. The system s m ay fail to trigg er in
the event of an accident.




                                                                                                                                            105
Vehicles with seat oc cup anc y recog nition                                                     If the control indicator d oes not illuminate
can be identified by the stick er on the side      O nly Vaux hall child restraint sy stems      whilst driving, the front and side airbag
of the instrum ent panel, which is visib le        with tra nsponders 3 can be fitted on the     have not been deactivated on the
when the driver’s door is open.                    front passenger seats. Use of sy stems        passenger side. Risk of fatal injury to the
                                                   without tra nsponders poses a risk of         child – fit child restraint system to rear seat.
Vauxhall child restraint system s w ith trans-     fatal injury.                                 Hav e c ause of fault remedied. We
ponders 3 are a utomatica lly detected if
                                                                                                 recommend that you consult a Vauxhall
correctly fitted to the front pa ssenger sea t.   Vauxhall c hild restraint system s w ith
                                                                                                 Authorised Repa irer.
When these child restraint system s are           tra nsponders 3 are identified by a sticker.
being used on the front passenger seat, the                                                      If a child restraint sy stem is incorrectly
                                                  Control i nd icator y for Vauxhal l child
front a nd side airbag systems for the front                                                     fitted or the transp onders are faulty the
                                                  restra int systems w ith transponders 3
passenger seat are deac tiv ated. The                                                            control indicator will flash. Chec k that child
                                                  The presenc e of a Vauxhall c hild restraint
curtain airbag system rema ins activa ted.                                                       restraint system has been fitted correctly.
                                                  sy stem with transponders 3 is ind ic ated
Pay attention to seat occupancy                                                                  Fitting child restraint system with
                                                  after the ig nition has been switched on by
recognition 3 c ontrol indicator – see                                                           transponders 3 – see p age 110.
                                                  permanent illum ination of the c ontrol
page 106.                                         indica tor y in the instrument panel, as
                                                  soon as the sea t occupancy recognition
                                                  sy stem has detected the child restraint
                                                  sy stem.




106
If the control indicator does not illuminate        Imp or tant                                      z Only protective covers which are
with a c orrectly insta lled child restraint                                                           approved for your vehicle with side
                                                    z Accessories and other objects must not
system there is a fault - risk of fatal injury to                                                      airbag m ay be fitted on the front seats.
                                                      be affix ed or placed in the area in w hich
the c hild. Fit child restra int system to rear                                                        When fitting the protective cov ers, make
                                                      the airb ags inflate as they could cause
seat. Have cause of fault rem edied. We                                                                sure tha t the airbag units on the
                                                      injury if the a irba gs are triggered.
recom mend that y ou consult a Vauxhall                                                                outboard sides of the front seat
Authorised Repairer.                                z Do not place any objects between the             backrests are not covered.
                                                      airbag sy stems and the v ehicle
If no Vauxhall child restraint system with                                                           z The airbag sy stems are triggered
                                                      occupants – risk of injury .
transponders 3 is installed the control                                                                ind epend ently of each other based on
indicator must neither illuminate nor flash,        z Use the hook s in the roof fram e only to        the severity of the ac cident and the type
since the passenger side airb ag systems              hang up light articles of clothing or coat       of impa ct. The side airbag sy stem 3 and
would not actuate. have cause of fault                hangers. Do not p la ce any objects in the       the curtain airbag system 3 a re
rem edied. We recommend that you consult              pockets of the hanging item s – risk of          trig gered together.
a Vauxhall Authorised Repa irer.                      injury .
                                                                                                     z Each airbag can be triggered only once.
                                                    z The airb ag systems and b elt tensioner          Once triggered, an airb ag must be
 If the Vauxhall child restraint system with          control electronics can be found in the          replaced without delay . We recommend
 transponders 3 has been fitted                       centre console area . In order to avoid          tha t you consult a Vauxhall Authorised
 according to the instructions, the control           malfunctions, d o not store magnetic             Repairer.
 indica tor for Vauxhall restraint systems            objec ts in this area.
 with transponders must light up in the                                                              z The speeds, directions of movement and
 instrum ent panel when the ignition is             z Do not stic k anything on the steering           deformation properties of the vehic les,
 switched on.                                         wheel, instrum ent panel, front seat             and the p roperties of the obstacle
                                                      back rests or roof frame in the v icinity of     conc erned, determ ine the severity of the
 If the control ind icator does not                   the airb ags, or on the front passenger’s        accident and triggering of the airbags.
 illuminate whilst d riv ing, the airba g             seat cushion, or cover any of those areas        The degree of dama ge to y our vehicle
 system s hav e not been d eactivated on              with other m aterials.                           and the resulting repair costs alone are
 the p assenger side. R isk of fatal injury . I n
                                                    z Use only a dry cloth or interior cleaner to      not indica tiv e that the criteria for
 this c ase, fit child restraint sy stem to rea r
                                                      clean the steering wheel, instrument             trig gering of the airb ags were met.
 seat. Hav e c ause of fault remedied. We
 recommend tha t y ou c onsult a Vauxhall             panel, front seat back rests, roof frame
                                                      and sea t cushion of the front passeng er                                                6
 Authorised Repairer.
                                                      seat. Do not use any aggressive cleaning
                                                      agents.




                                                                                                                                             107
z Do not p erform any a lterations on the       z Persons weighing less than 35 kg should
  com ponents of the airbag sy stem, as this      only travel on the rear seats. This does
  would render the v ehicle unroa d-worthy .      not apply to children who are travelling
                                                  in child restraint systems with
 The systems can be triggered ab ruptly           transp onders 3.
 and cause injury if they are handled
                                                z In v ehicles with seat occ upa ncy
 im properly.
                                                  rec og nition 3, do not place any heavy
                                                  objec ts on the front passenger’ s seat
z We recom mend hav ing the steering
                                                  otherwise the airbag system s for the
  wheel, the instrument p anel, all panelling
                                                  front p assenger’s seat may b e triggered
  parts, the door seals, the hand les and
                                                  in the event of an accident.
  the seats rem ov ed by a Vauxhall
  Authorised Repairer.                          z In v ehicles with seat occ upa ncy
                                                  rec og nition 3, to prev ent malfunctions
z When disposing of the v ehicle, please
  ob serve the applicab le safety                 do not use protective cov ers or seat
                                                  cushions on the front passeng er’s seat.
  regulations. Please have the vehicle
                                                                                                 Use of child restra int systems 3 on t he
  disposed of by a disposal compa ny . We       z When using a Vaux hall child restraint
                                                                                                 front p assenger seat in v ehic les w ith
  recommend that you consult a Vaux hall          system with transponders 3 on the front
                                                                                                 ai rbag syst em s 3, but without seat
  Authorised Repairer.                            passenger’ s seat, in order to prevent
                                                                                                 occup ancy recog nition 3
                                                  malfunctions, no objects (e.g. plastic
                                                  sheet, stick ers or heated mats) may be         Vehic les with passenger airba g and no
                                                  placed under the child restraint system.        side airbag 3: child seats facing the rea r
                                                                                                  of the vehicle m ust not be fitted to the
                                                 C hild restraint system s a s well as other      passeng er seat, risk of fatal injury . Child
                                                 hea vy objects must never be ca rried on         seats fac ing the front (child safety seats
                                                 the lap of passengers; risk of fatal injury .    for weight ranges I, I I and I II – see
                                                 If ca rried in this way, child restraint         following pa ges) are permitted on the
                                                 systems with transp onders 3 in vehicles         passeng er seat, providing that it is
                                                 with seat occupancy recog nition 3 could         pushed back as fa r as possible and the
                                                 lead to front passenger airbag sy stems          backrest has been ad justed so that the
                                                 not being trig gered in the event of a n         lap belt fits snugly.
                                                 accident.




108
A vehicle w ith front passenger a irba g can                                                   Use of child restra int systems 3 on fr ont
                                                  Vehicles with side airbag 3 : No c hild
be identified by the word AI RBAG above                                                        pa ssenger sea t in vehicl es wi th airba g
                                                  restraint system 3 may be fitted on the
the g lov e com partment and by the stick er                                                   systems 3 and wi th sea t occupa nc y
                                                  front passenger’s seat; risk of fatal
on the pa ssenger sid e sun visor – see                                                        recognit ion 3
                                                  injury .
Fig. 12863 J. O n some vehicles 1 ) the
warning sticker is loc ated on the side of the                                                  Only Vauxhall child restraint systems
                                                 A vehicle with side a irba gs can be           with transpond ers 3 ca n be fitted on the
instrument panel – see Fig. 11704 A.             identified b y the word AIRBAG on the          front passenger seats. Use of systems
                                                 outboard sides of the front seat backrests.    without transponders poses a risk of
                                                 Sea t occupancy recognition 3 –                fatal injury.
                                                 see p age 105.




1)
     Co untry-specific versio n.


                                                                                                                                        109
                                                                                                Child res traint sys te ms 3
                                                                                                The Vauxhall c hild restraint system is
                                                                                                designed specifically for your vehicle and
                                                                                                thus provides op tim um safety for your child
                                                                                                in the event of impact. If a different child
                                                                                                safety seat is used, follow the
                                                                                                ma nufacturers’ instructions for fitting and
                                                                                                use.
                                                                                                Selecti ng the right syst em
                                                                                                Y our child should be transported facing
                                                                                                bac kwards in the car as long a s possible. It
                                                                                                is appropriate to change the system when
                                                                                                the child’ s head can no longer be properly
                                                                                                supported a t eye heig ht. The child’s
                                                                                                cervical vertebrae are still v ery weak and in
Seat occupancy recognition in a vehicle is           Vauxhall c hild restraint system s w ith   an ac cident they suffer less stress in the
indicated by the control indica tor in the           tra nsponders 3 can be identified by the   sem i-p rone backwards position than when
courtesy light. I f this control indicator lig hts   sticker on the child restraint system.     sitting up right.
for approx. 4 seconds when the ignition is
switched on, it indica tes that the v ehicle is
equipp ed with seat occupancy rec ognition
– see pa ge 105.
Seat occupancy recognition in a vehicle is
also indicated by a sticker on the side of
the instrum ent panel, visible when the
driver’s door is open – see previous page,
Fig. 12106 A.
The seat occupancy recognition system
detects Vaux hall child restraint sy stems
with transponders 3 and switches off the
front a nd side airbag systems for the front
passenger’s sea t. The curtain airbag
system rem ains activated. Seat occ upa ncy
recognition – see pa ge 105.




110
Permissible opti ons for fi tting a child safety sea t                                B 1 = p rov id ed: only with seat occupancy
                                                                                            recognition and Vauxhall child safety
Weight           Fr ont passeng er seat      O uter rea r seat s   Centre rear seat         systems with transponders
and                                                                                   B 2 = p rov id ed: no side airbag, if the front
age cl ass                                                                                  passenger seat is slid all the wa y bac k
0:                                                                                          and seat height 3 is set to its highest
                                                                                            position, or with seat occupancy
up to 10 kg               B 1, +                     U+                   U                 recognition and Vauxhall child safety
or approx.
                                                                                            systems with transponders
10 months
                                                                                      U = universally suitable in conjunction with
0+:                                                                                       three-point seat belt
up to 13 kg               B 1, +                     U+                   U           + = sea t with ISO -FI X m ounting ava ila ble;
or approx.
2 years                                                                                   only child safety system s app rov ed for
                                                                                          the vehicle may be used
I:
9 to 18 k g               B 2, +                     U+                   U
or approx.
8 months to
4 years

II :
15 t o 25 kg               B2                        U                    U
or approx.
3 to 7 years

II I:
22 t o 36 kg               B2                        U                    U
or approx.
6 to 12 y ears




                                                                                                                                 111
Vauxha ll safety c radle wi thout      Va uxhall sa fety crad le with t ransponders   Vauxhall Top S afe child safety seat
tra nspond er                          From b irth up to a weig ht of 10 kg.          w ith or wi thout ISO -FIX securing ,
From birth up to a weight of 10 k g.                                                  w ith transponders
                                       The transponders a re integ ra ted in the
                                                                                      From birth up to a w eight of 18 kg.
                                       seat cushion.
                                                                                      The tra nsponders are integrated in the
                                                                                      seat console.
                                                                                      C om prising:
                                                                                      1 Child seat,
                                                                                      2 Carrying c ra dle 3 ,
                                                                                      3 Floor sup port 3,
                                                                                      4 Seat belt 3,
                                                                                      5 Safety supp ort.




112
                                                      Note                                           z Only a llow the child to enter and exit on
                                                                                                       the side of the vehicle facing away from
                                                      z C hildren under 12 y ears or under 150 cm
                                                                                                       the road.
                                                        tall should only travel in an appropriate
                                                        child safety seat.                           z A child restraint sy stem which has been
                                                                                                       subjected to stress in an accident must
                                                      z When transporting children, use the child
                                                                                                       be replaced.
                                                        restraint systems suitable for the child’s
                                                        weight.                                      z You should also ob serve the instructions
                                                                                                       on installa tion and use supplied with the
                                                      z Ensure that the child restraint sy stem is
                                                                                                       child restraint sy stem.
                                                        fitted correctly.
                                                      z The cov ers of the safety cradle and
                                                        safety seat can be wiped clean.
                                                      z Do not stic k anything on the child
                                                        restraint sy stems a nd do not cover them
                                                        with any other materia ls.
Vauxhall child safety seat wit hout
transponder
From 9 kg1 ) to 36 k g.
Com prising:
1 Seat backrest,
2 Safety support,
3 Seat cushion.




1)
     Use of th e s ys tem is n ot recomm ended fo r
     children weig hing less tha n 11 kg.


                                                                                                                                             113
                                                                                               The m irrors do not dip to prev ent dazzle if:
                                                                                               z the ignition is switched off,
                                                                                               z reverse gear is engaged or selector lever
                                                                                                 set to R,
                                                                                               z the interior lights are on,
                                                                                               z a door is open.
                                                                                               Adjusting interior a nd ex terior mirrors –
                                                                                               see page 8.
                                                                                               Automatically regulated centre console
                                                                                               lighting – see pa ge 118.




Exterior mirrors                               Automatic anti-daz zle interior
For the safety of pedestrians, the exterior    mirror 3 and e xte rior mirror 3
mirrors will swing out of their normal         on the driver’s side
mounting p osition if they are bumped with     Dazzle at night is automa tic ally red uc ed.
sufficient force. Reposition the m irror by    For vehicles with position m emory for
apply ing slight pressure to the mirror        electrica lly operated front seats 3 the
housing.                                       sensor is in the top right-hand side of the
                                               mirror.
Asphe rical exterior mirror 3
increases the field of view. Estim ating the
distance aw ay of vehicles follow ing you is
only possible to a limited extent because of
slig ht distortion.




114
Head restraints                                 Safety access ories 3
Do not attach objec ts or com ponents that      The wide range of Vauxhall a ccessories
are not approved for your vehicle to the        allow s y ou to equip y our vehicle in
head restraints. These affec t the protective   accordance with your own wishes. In
effect of the head restraints and can be        addition to safety acc essories, items for
propelled through the vehicle in an             improving comfort and a complete range
uncontrolled manner if the driver brakes        of v ehicle care products y ou will find many
hard or an a ccident occurs.                    artic les which will be of great value to y ou
                                                when needed .
                                                "Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories"
                                                guarantee high qua lity a nd an accurate fit.
                                                A Vaux hall Authorised Repairer w ill be
                                                ha ppy to ad vise you, for exam ple w ith
                                                regard to:
                                                z Vauxhall child restraint sy stems,
                                                z Tow ropes,
                                                z Tow rods,
                                                z Jump lead s,
                                                z Sp are bulb kit,
                                                z Sp are fuse kit,
                                                z Halogen fog lights,
                                                z Mudflaps,
                                                z Magnetic light,
                                                z Warning tria ngle,
                                                z First-aid k it,
                                                z First-aid k it (cushion).




                                                                                                 115
Lighting




           Exte rior lights                             Front fog lights > 3
           Turn light switch:                           On =     Press >
                                                        O ff =   Press > again
           7 = O ff
                                                                 or switch ignition off
           8 = Parking lights
           9 = Dipp ed or m ain beam                    C ontrol indicator > in instrument panel.
           Dip ped beam , main b eam and head lig ht
           flash – see p ages 16, 17.                   Fog tail light r
                                                        On =     Press r
           In positions 8 a nd 9, the tail lights and   O ff =   Press r again
           numb er plate lights are also lit.                    or switch ignition off
           Vehicles with daytime running lig hts 3:     C ontrol indicator r in instrument panel.
           With the ignition on and the light switch
           on 7, d ip ped beam without instrum ent      The fog tail lights on the vehicle are
           illumination is on.                          deactivated when towing a caravan /
                                                        trailer.
           Driv ing abroad – see page 119.

           Turn signal lights, hazard warning
           lights , parking lights,
           door-to-door lighting
           see p ages 16, 17.


116
Instrument illum ination k,                       Vehicles without headlight range            Autom atic headli ght range adj ustm ent 3
Inform ation display illum ination                adjustment                                  C ontrols the hea dlight rang e in v ehicles
Brightness c an be adjusted when the              z Front sea ts occupied        =   0        with x enon headlight systems. If the control
exterior lights are on: Push to release the                                                   indicator q illum ina tes in the tachometer
                                                  z All seats occupied           =   1
knob and then turn it cloc kwise or                                                           dial display whilst driv ing , a fault has
                                                  z All seats occupied and                    occurred. Have cause of fault remed ied
anticlockwise and hold until the desired
brightness is obtained.                             luggage compa rtm ent        =   2        imm ediately. We recomm end that y ou
                                                  z Driver’s seat occupied and                consult a Vaux ha ll Authorised Repairer.
Headlight range adjustm ent ?                       luggage compa rtm ent        =   3
Manual hea dlight range adjustm ent 3             Vehicles with headlight range adjustm ent
With dipped bea m switched on, adjust             z Front sea ts occupied        =    0
head lig ht range in four steps to suit vehicle
load. Turn wheel aga inst resistanc e and         z All seats occupied           =   0
click it to the req uired position.               z All seats occupied and
Correct adjustment of the headlight range           luggage compa rtm ent load =     0
red uces dazzle for other road users.             z Driver’s seat occupied and
Autom atic Level Control Sy stem –                  luggage compa rtm ent load =     1
see page 179.




                                                                                                                                       117
Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) 3
O n vehicles w ith Bi-Xenon headlights,
improves illumination of
z curv es (curv e lighting),
z intersections and tight turns (turn
  lig hting).
Curv e lighting
The Xenon light beam p ivots b ased on
steering wheel position and speed (from
approx. 6 mph / 10 km/h).
The headlights shine a t an angle of up to
15° to the right or left of the direction of
travel.
Turn light ing
An a dditional light is switched on based on      Front courtesy light                            Front reading lights 3
steering wheel position (when turned p ast        When the door is c losed , the courtesy light   Reading lights at left and right indiv idually
approx. 90°), turn signal use and speed (up       switches off after a slight delay .             operable. With ignition turned on:
to approx. 25 mph / 40 km /h).
                                                  Courtesy light when doors are closed:           On =     Press button a
The light shines at an angle from approx.                                                         O ff =   Press button a again
                                                  On =     Press button b
90° to the left or right of the vehicle up to a
                                                  Off =    Press button b again
distance of ap prox . 30 metres.
                                                  The courtesy light can b e deactivated 3
Reversing lights                                  using button c.
Com e on when reverse gear is engaged
and ignition is switched on.                      Automatically regulated centre
                                                  cons ole lighting 3
                                                  Spotlight in housing of interior mirror.
                                                  Daylight-dependent, automa tic ally
                                                  regulated centre console lig hting with
                                                  ignition switched on.




118
                                           Glove compartment lighting                        Do as follows to prevent glare:
                                           Glov e compartm ent is illuminated when lid       Vehicles without
                                           is open and ignition on.                          Ad aptiv e Forwa rd Lighting (AFL) 3
                                                                                             Place covers on both hea dlights. We
                                           Illum inated m irror in the sun visors 3          recommend that you consult a Vauxhall
                                           The lighting sw itches on when the cov er is      Authorised Repa irer.
                                           op ened .
                                                                                             Vehicles with
                                                                                             Ad aptiv e Forwa rd Lighting (AFL) 3
                                           Cigarette lighter and ashtray
                                                                                             1. Open and remove the cover of the
                                           illum ination 3
                                                                                                fuseb ox in the engine comp artm ent –
                                           Lights up when ignition is switched on.              see page 216.
                                           Luggage com partm ent lighting 3                  2. Fit fuse (ma xi-fuse) 3 (with designation
                                           Comes on when the boot lid / tailgate is             "Transport") in slot 38. Fuse positions –
                                           op ened .                                            see page 214.
Courtes y lights and                                                                         3. Switch on ignition.
re ar reading lights 3                     Safeguarding the battery
                                                                                             After the conversion, the AFL control
On               = Switch setting 1        To prevent the ba ttery from b ecoming            indicator lights for 4 second s each time the
                                           discharged, the courtesy light, reading
Light comes on                                                                               ignition is switched on.
                                           lig hts, luggag e com partment lighting and
when a door                                glove com partment lighting switch off            C ontrol indicator – see pa ge 36.
is opened        = Centre switch setting   autom atic ally 20 minutes after the ignition
O ff             = Switch setting 0        is switched off.

                                           He adlights when driving abroad
                                           The asymm etrical dipped b eam increases
                                           the field of v ision on the p assenger sid e of
                                           the lane.
                                           This c auses glare for oncoming tra ffic if the
                                           vehicle is driven in countries where traffic
                                           drives on the opp osite side of the road.




                                                                                                                                      119
Windows, sun roof                               Electric windows 3
                                                The electric windows can be used
                                                z with ignition on,
                                                z within 10 m inutes of switching ignition
                                                  off,
                                                z within 10 m inutes of opening or closing
                                                  the driver’s door,
                                                z within 10 m inutes of inserting or
                                                  rem oving the ignition key.
                                                Readiness for operation stops when the
                                                vehicle is lock ed.



                                                                                             Two rocker buttons. O peration via 2 rock er
 Care must b e taken when operating the
                                                                                             buttons in the driver’ s door. Additional
 electric windows 3 and electric sun roof 3 .
                                                                                             rocker buttons located in the front
 There is a risk of injury, particularly for
                                                                                             passenger door and the rear doors 3.
 children, and a danger that articles could
 become trapped.                                                                             To operate window in stages, tap switch.
                                                                                             For autom atic opening or closing, keep
 Vehicle passengers should be informed
                                                                                             switch pressed for slightly longer; to stop
 according ly .
                                                                                             window m ovement, tap switch ag ain.
 If there are children on the rea r seat,
 switch on the child safety system 3 for
 the electric windows.
 Keep a close wa tch on the windows and
 sun roof w hen closing them . Ensure that
 nothing becomes trapped in them as
 they m ov e.




120
                                                                                             Autom atic closing 3
                                                                                             If the rain sensor 3 detects water with the
                                                                                             mechanical anti-theft locking system
                                                                                             activa ted, all electronic wind ow s a re
                                                                                             closed. The windows are also
                                                                                             automatically closed after four hours.
                                                                                             I nt err up tion of pow er supp ly
                                                                                             Automatic opening and closing of the
                                                                                             windows is not possible after interruption
                                                                                             of the power supply or a drop in battery
                                                                                             voltage. Ac tiv ate the w indow electronics as
                                                                                             follows:
                                                                                             1. Close doors.
                                                                                             2. Switch on ignition.
Vehicles with rea r 3 electric windows have    Child sa fety system for r ear window s 3     3. Open windows completely.
a slide switch b etween the switches in the    Switch z in the driver’s door                 4. Close window and press on button for at
driver’s door:                                 z Press (switch z lit red): Buttons in the       least 3 seconds.
z Up: The front windows can be opera ted         rea r doors inopera ble.                    5. Repeat for ea ch window.
  using the b uttons,                          z Press again (switch z no longer lit red):
z Down: The rear windows can be                  Buttons in the rear doors operab le.
  op erated using the buttons.
Protectiv e func tion
If the window glass encounters resistance
above the middle of the window during
automatic closing , it is immediately
stop ped and the window op ened again.
If the windows do not move easily (e.g. on
account of frost), keep pressing the switc h
for the window in question until the window
has been closed in stages.




                                                                                                                                       121
O per ating w indows from outside             To close:                                        Rear windows
The w indows can be opened and closed         Press button p until windows are closed          C an be operated using the window
using the radio frequency remote control.     – or –                                           winder 3.
To open:                                      Hold key in driver’s door lock in the door
                                              lock ing position until wind ow s a re closed.
Press button q until windows are open
– or –                                        Overloa d
Hold k ey in driver’s door lock in the door   If the system is ov erloaded, the power
locking position until windows are open.      supply is automa tic ally cut off for a short
                                              tim e.
                                              The system is protected b y fuses in the
                                              fusebox – see pag e 212.




122
Sun roof 3                                                                                     To rai se
The electric sun roof can be operated                                                          Turn the rotary switch to any position
                                                                                               between d and e. The sun roof will
z with ig nition on,                                                                           automatically move to the desired position.
z within 10 minutes of switching ignition                                                      When the switch is in position e, the sun
  off,                                                                                         roof is fully raised.
z within 10 minutes of opening or closing                                                      To low er
  the driver’s door,                                                                           Turn rota ry switch to d.
z within 10 minutes of inserting or                                                            Position m em ory
  removing the ignition k ey.                                                                  After the ig nition has b een switc hed on, the
                                                                                               sun roof ca n be a utomatica lly returned to
Readiness for operation stops when the
                                                                                               its last position by briefly p ressing the
vehic le is locked.
                                                                                               rotary switch.


                                            Operated using the rotary switch b etween
                                            the sun v isors.
                                            To op en:
                                            Turn the rotary switc h to any position
                                            between d and ü . The sun roof will
                                            autom atic ally m ov e to the d esired position.
                                            When the switch is in position ü, the sun
                                            roof is fully opened.
                                            Comfort position
                                            Set rotary sw itc h to position f. With the
                                            roof in this position, wind noise is reduced.
                                            To close:
                                            Turn rotary switch to d.




                                                                                                                                          123
Protectiv e func tion                                                                             I nt err up tion of pow er supp ly
If the sun roof encounters resistance during                                                      After interruption of the power supply or a
automatic closing , it is immediately                                                             drop in battery voltage the desired sun roof
stop ped and opened again, a s long as the                                                        position is no longer set a utoma tica lly . The
vehic le is stationary.                                                                           electronics of the sun roof must be
                                                                                                  reprog ra mmed as follows:
 If, when the vehicle is being driven, the
                                                                                                  1. Switch on ignition.
 sun roof encounters resistance during
 automa tic closing, because of the higher                                                        2. Press the rota ry switch until the sun roof
 closing forces involved the p rotective                                                             is shut, then keep it pressed for at lea st a
 function cannot be g uara nteed, and                                                                further 3 seconds.
 there is a risk of injury.                                                                       3. Turn rotary switch to ü and keep it
                                                                                                     depressed until the sun roof is open.
If the sun roof movement is stiff, e.g. due to
frost, turn rotary switch to d and keep it                                                        4. Turn rotary switch to d and keep it
pressed until the sun roof is closed.                                                                depressed until the sun roof is closed.
                                                 Closing sun roof from out si de                  5. Turn rotary switch to e a nd leave there
Autom atic c losi ng 3
                                                 Closing sun roof using radio frequency              until the sun roof is fully extended.
If the rain sensor 3 detects water w ith the
                                                 remote control: press p button and hold
mechanic al anti-theft locking system                                                             6. Turn rotary switch to d and keep it
                                                 until sun roof is closed,
activated, the sun roof is closed. The sun                                                           depressed until the sun roof is closed.
                                                 – or –
roof is also automatically closed after four
                                                 Turn key in d riv er’s side door lock to rear    O verload
hours.
                                                 and hold until sun roof has closed.              If the sy stem is overload ed, the power
Sun shade                                                                                         supply is automatically cut off for a short
                                                 If the windows are to be closed from
The sun shad e can be opened and closed                                                           time.
                                                 outside the vehicle, but the sun roof is to be
with the sun roof either closed or raised.
                                                 left open, briefly press the rotary switch
When the sun roof is opened, the sun shad e      before switching off the ignition.
is also op ened.




124
Fault                                              Roller blinds at re ar side windows 3       Electrically operated rear window
If the electric drive fails, the system is         Pull the blind upwards using the grip and   blind 3
protected by a fuse in the fuseb ox -              engage it at the top in the d oor frame.    Reduces intensity of sunlight shining on to
see page 212. Until the fault is remed ied,                                                    rear seats. O perational with ignition
opera te the sun roof as follows:                                                              switched on.
Disengage drive cover with a screwdriv er                                                      To raise   =    Press N
and remove. Take Allen key from drive                                                          To lower   =    Press N again
cover, insert in sun roof d riv e and turn until                                               Do not opera te blind if there are objects
sun roof is closed.
                                                                                               lying in front of the rear window.




                                                                                                                                        125
Climate control




Dep ending on how the v ehicle is equipped ,     He ating and ventilation system with             Electronic air conditioning system 3
the c lim ate w ill be controlled by a heating   optional air conditioning system 3               The electronic air conditioning system
and v entilation system with optiona l air       Ventilation, heating and cooling 3 a re          provides maxim um comfort under any
conditioning system 3 or by an electronic        combined into one unit that is d esigned to      weather conditions, at any outside
air conditioning sy stem 3.                      prov ide com fort regardless of the season,      temperature and at a ll tim es of the y ear.
                                                 weather or outside temperature.                  To ensure a constant and com fortable
                                                 When cooling 3 is activated, the air is          climate in the vehicle, the temperature of
                                                 cooled and dried.                                the inflowing air, the air-flow rate and the
                                                                                                  air distribution are changed a utomatically
                                                 The heating unit heats the air a s required in
                                                                                                  acc ording to clim atic conditions outside
                                                 all operating m od es depending on the
                                                                                                  the vehicle.
                                                 position of the temperature switch. The air
                                                 supply can be adjusted to suit                   S ettings are shown on the inform ation
                                                 requirements by means of the fan.                display.
                                                 The version without air conditioning             Electronic air conditioning system – see
                                                 sy stem 3 d oes not hav e b uttons for           pag e 134.
                                                 cooling n, air rec irculation 4 or
                                                 demisting and defrosting V.




126
Heate r controls                                 Centre rotary switch: Tem perature   Rig ht-hand rot ary swi tch: Air flow
Left -hand rota ry swit ch: Air d istributi on   red z one    =    warm               Four fan speeds:
L      to head area ab ov e ad justable          blue zone    =    cold               x O ff
       air vents and to footwell                                                      4    Max imum air flow
M      to headroom via adjustable                                                     The ra te of air flow is determined by the
       air vents                                                                      fan. The fan should therefore also be
                                                                                      switched on d uring a journey .
l      to the windscreen and
       front door windows
J      to the windscreen, front d oor
       wind ow s to footwell
K      to footwell
O pen the air vents when the switch is set
to L or M.




                                                                                                                               127
Heate d re ar window,                        Air conditioning system 3                       Air rec irculati on system 4
heated exterior mirrors 3                    Cooling n                                       Air recirc ulation button 4 is used to
O peration with ignition switched on:        Button n is used to a ctivate the cooling       switch the air conditioning system to a ir
                                             sy stem (cooling compressor) in the air         recirc ulation mode (control indica tor).
On =     Press Ü
                                             conditioning system (control indicator).        If fumes or unpleasa nt od ours penetrate
O ff =   Press Ü again
                                             The cooling system (cooling c om pressor) is    from outside: temporarily switch on air
Control indicator in pushbutton.             only operational when the engine is             recirc ulation system 4.
Heating operational only with engine         running.
                                                                                             The air recirculation sy stem minimises the
running.                                     When the c ooling unit (cooling comp ressor)    entry of outside air. The humidity
The heating is switched off autom atically   is on, the air is cooled and dehumidified.      increa ses, and the w indows can mist up.
after approx. 15 minutes.                    Switch off the cooling to conserve fuel         The quality of the pa ssenger com partment
                                             whenev er cooling or drying is not req uired.   air d eteriorates w hich m ay ca use the
                                             At low outside temp eratures the c ooling       vehicle occupants to feel drowsy.
                                             unit (cooling compressor) switches off          Air distribution to l: air rec irculation
                                             autom atic ally.                                system is a utomatically switched off to
                                                                                             speed up d emisting of windows.




128
Centre and side air vents (1)                   To close the v ents turn the adjustment         Rear air vents 3
Pleasant ventilation to the head area           wheel fully downwards.                          The air flow can be adjusted using the
controlled by the position of the               To increase the air supply , set the fan to a   adjuster wheel. Turn adjuster wheel
tem perature switch.                            higher sp eed and set the air distribution      upwards: Vents will be fully opened.
To open air vents: Turn vertica l adjuster      switch to M.                                    To close the vents turn the vertical
wheel upwards. The air flow can be                                                              adjustment wheel fully d ow nwa rd s.
direc ted a s desired by adjusting the          Windscre en defroster nozzles (2 )
                                                                                                The air flow can be directed as desired by
horiz ontal and v ertical adjustm ent wheels.   Air distribution switch to l or J: a ir flows
                                                                                                tilting and swivelling the slats.
                                                onto windscreen and side wind ow s.
                                                                                                To increase the air supply, set the fan to a
                                                Additional vents                                higher speed and set the air distribution
                                                Located in front of the wind screen, in front   switch to M.
                                                of the door windows and in the footwells.




                                                                                                                                         129
Heate d front seats 3                         He ated rear seats 3                          Driver’s se at with climate control 3
Two knurled wheels beneath the centre air     Tw o pushbuttons at rear of centre c onsole   K nurled wheel at driver’s side below centre
vent for the left a nd right-hand seats.      in front of the rear seats.                   air v ents.
Turn relevant wheel to set required heating   After switching ignition on, press ß button   Move knurled wheel to required ventilation
lev el.                                       again to heat outboard seats.                 or hea ting setting as per requirements.
Control indica tor above adjustm ent wheel.   On    =    Press ß                            C ontrol ind icator ab ov e adjustm ent wheel.
                                              Off   =    Press ß again
To switch off, set wheel to 0.                                                              To switch off, set wheel to 0.
                                              Control indica tors in pushbuttons.
Heating only with ignition switched on.                                                     Function only av ailable with ignition
                                                                                            switched on.




130
                                                 He ating
                                                 The amount of heat is dependent on the
                                                 engine temperature and is thus not fully
                                                 attained until the engine is warm.
                                                 For rapid warming of the p assenger
                                                 compartment:
                                                 z Set the air distribution sw itch to the
                                                   desired position – see page 127.
                                                 z Set the temperature switch in the red
                                                   zone.
                                                 z Set the fan to speed 3.
                                                 The comfort and general well-b eing of the
                                                 vehicle occupants a re to a large extent
                                                 dependent on a suitable ventilation and
Ve ntilation                                     heating setting.                               Heating the footwe ll
z For max imum ventilation in head area:         To obtain a stratification of temperature in   z Set air distribution switch to K.
  set air distribution switch to M and open      the vehicle with the pleasant effect "cool     z Set the temperature switch in the red
  all vents.                                     head a nd warm feet", set the air                zone.
z For ventila tion to footwell: set air          distribution switch to K or L and the
                                                                                                z Switch on fan.
  distribution switch to K .                     temperature switch to the m id position,
                                                 and open the centre air vents.
z For simultaneous ventilation to the hea d
  area and the footwell: set air distrib ution
  switch to L .
z Set the tem perature to the desired
  setting.
z Set the fan to the d esired setting.




                                                                                                                                          131
Window de misting and de frosting           Operation of the s yste m 3                   Ma xim um cooling
                                            Comfort sett ing                              O pen w indows and sun roof 3 briefly so
 Disreg ard of the settings described can                                                 that warm air can esca pe rap idly.
 cause the windows to become m isted up     z C ooling n a s required.
 which c an lead to accidents due to lack                                                 z Cooling n on.
                                            z Air rec irculation system 4 off.
 of p roper vision.                                                                       z Set air distribution switch to M.
                                            z Set air distribution switch to M or L.
z Move a ir distribution sw itch to l.                                                    z Turn the temp erature switch as far into
                                            z Tem perature switch: as required.             the blue zone (cold) as possible.
z Turn the temperature switch as far into   z Fan: as req uired.
  the red zone as possib le.                                                              z Set fa n to 4.
                                            z O pen v ents as required.                   z Open all vents.
z Set fan to 3 or 4.
                                            Temperature switch in centre of
z Open side air v ents as required and                                                    The sy stem will switch automatically to
                                            adjustment range: warmer air will flow into   recirc ulation mode.
  direct them towards door windows.         the footwell and cooler air into the upper
z Switch on heated rea r window.            zone, with warm er air coming from the side
                                            air vents and cooler air from the c entre
For simultaneous warming of the footwell,   vents.
set air d istribution switch to J .




132
                                                                                                    Note
                                                                                                    see page 143.

                                                                                                    Mainte nance
                                                                                                    see page 143.




Window dem isting                                 De-ic ing the wind ow s
Wind ow m isting because of wet weather or        z C ooling n off,
dam p clothing:                                   z Press button V: The fan w ill
z Cooling n on.                                     automatically switch to 4, air distribution
                                                    directed on to the windsc reen.
z Press button V: The fan will
  automa tic ally switch to 4, air distribution   z Set temperature switch a s p er
  directed on to the windscreen.                    req uirements.
z Set temperature switch as per                   Operation with cooling (cooling
  requirements.                                   compressor) is not possible at low outsid e
                                                  temperatures.
To switch off, press button V again; the
air conditioning will op erate a t the settings   To switch off, press button V aga in; the
selected p reviously .                            air c onditioning w ill operate at the settings
                                                  selected previously.
 Disreg ard of the settings described can
 cause the windows to become m isted up            Disregard of the settings described can
 which c an lead to accidents due to lack          cause the windows to bec om e misted up
 of p roper vision.                                which can lead to ac cidents due to la ck
                                                   of proper vision.




                                                                                                                    133
Ele ctronic air conditioning system 3
The system provides m aximum com fort in
any w eather, at any outside temperature
and during any season.
To ensure a constant and com fortable
climate in the v ehicle, the tempera ture of
the inflowing air, the air-flow rate a nd the
air distrib ution are cha nged automatically
according to clim atic conditions outside
the v ehicle.
The a ir is a utomatica lly regulated in
accordance with the settings personally
selected for the driver and pa ssenger sides.
Tem perature cha ng es due to externa l
influences, such as direct sunlig ht, are       Manua l settings e. g. operating w ithout         The autom atic air rec irculation system 3
automatically compensated.                      cooling and a ir distrib ution c an be selected   has an air quality sensor 3 to detect
                                                using the menu – see p age 136.                   harmful a mbient gases, in which case it will
                                                                                                  switch automatically to recirculation.
                                                When the c ooling unit (cooling comp ressor)
                                                is on, the air is cooled and dehumidified.        When set to automa tic mode, the
                                                                                                  electronic air c onditioning system prov ides
                                                Settings are shown on the information
                                                                                                  the op tim um settings under almost all
                                                display .
                                                                                                  conditions. If necessary , the system can be
                                                The display can v ary according to the ty pe      influenced manually.
                                                of presentation – see page 41.
                                                                                                  The electronic air conditioning system is
                                                The pollen filter removes d ust, soot, pollen     only fully operational when the engine is
                                                and spores from the inflowing outside air.        running.
                                                                                                  At low outsid e temperatures the cooling
                                                                                                  unit (cooling com pressor) switches off
                                                                                                  automatically.




134
                                                The temperature c an be set higher or lower      Autom atic air cir culation m ode 3
                                                as desired.                                      Air recirculation is automatically activated
                                                                                                 as soon as the system d etec ts harmful
                                                Different tem peratures can b e set for the
                                                                                                 gases in the outside air. The circuit is
                                                driver a nd passeng er sides.
                                                                                                 controlled by an air q uality sensor.
                                                Operation without cooling (EC O appears in
                                                                                                 At low outsid e temperatures and with the
                                                the display) m ay imp air the level of
                                                                                                 cooling (cooling compressor) switched off,
                                                comfort – see page 137.
                                                                                                 automatic recirculation operation will be
                                                All air vents (ex cept the rea r air vents 3 )   disabled. This prevents the windows from
                                                are controlled automa tic ally in automatic      misting up. S witch manually to air
                                                mode. The front air vents should therefore       recirc ulation as nec essary .
                                                always be open.
                                                                                                 Sw itching automatic recirculation on or off –
                                                                                                 see page 138.
                                                                                                 Manual recircula tion operation – see
                                                                                                 pag e 139.
Autom atic m ode
Basic setting for max imum comfort:
z Press AUTO button.
z Open all front a ir vents. If d esired, the
  rear vents a lso 3 .
z Set the pre-selected tempera ture for the
  driv er and pa ssenger sides to 22 °C using
  the rotary knobs.




                                                                                                                                           135
Temperature
Using the outer k nobs, temperatures can
be set to va lues between 16 °C and 28 °C.
For reasons of comfort, tempera ture can
only be changed in sm all increments.
If a temperature below 16 °C is set, Lo
appears in the display: the electronic air
conditioning system runs consta ntly at
max imum cooling power. The temperature
is not regulated .
If a temperature ab ov e 28 °C is set, Hi
appears in the display: the electronic air
conditioning system runs consta ntly at
max imum heating power. The temp erature
is not regulated .
                                             Common tempera ture setting                  Manual settings
Tem perature settings are stored when the    Press the knob for the driver’s sid e. The   Under certain circumstances (e.g. iced-up
ignition is switched off.                    temperature on both the driv er and          or misted-up w indows), the functions of the
                                             passenger side together can be set using     electronic air conditioning system can be
                                             the knob on the driver’s side.               influenced manually.
                                             Individual tem perature settings             Electronic air conditioning settings can b e
                                             Press the knob for the passenger side.       changed using the central rota ry knob , the
                                             Temperatures can be set independently of     buttons a nd using menus shown in the
                                             each other using the k nobs for the driver   display. Calling up the menus:
                                             and passenger sides.
                                                                                          Press the centre knob, and the m enu for
                                             The tem perature on both the driver and      ma nual a djustments to the electronic air
                                             passenger side are shown in the display.     conditioning sy stem will app ear on the
                                             For reasons of comfort, the tempera tures    display.
                                             cannot d iffer by m ore than 2 °C .




136
Individual m enu item s a re selected by      Wi nd ow demi st ing and d e-i cing            Act ivat ing and d ea ctiv ating c ool ing
turning the central knob and deselected b y                                                  S witc h off the cooling (cooling compressor)
pressing it. For some menu items a sub-        Disregard of the settings described can       to c onserve fuel whenever cooling or drying
menu will appear as soon as the resp ective    cause the windows to bec om e misted up       is not needed. In the m enu for manual
menu has been deselected by pressing.          which can lead to ac cidents due to la ck     settings, highlight menu item AC a nd press
                                               of proper vision.                             to select. ECO appears in the display.
Ea ch menu can be exited by selecting Bac k
and pressing the central rotary k nob.        Press button V, Def ap pears in display,       Inflowing air is neither c ooled nor
                                              control indicator in button illum inates.      dehum idified. This restricts the lev el of
Manual settings are stored when the
                                                                                             comfort provided by the electronic air
ignition is switched off.                     The tem perature and the a ir distribution     conditioning sy stem. This may cause the
                                              are adjusted autom atically, the fan runs at   windows to mist up, for example.
                                              a faster sp eed and the windows are rapidly
                                              cleared of ice and moisture.                   To activate cooling: I n the m anua l settings
                                                                                             menu, selec t menu item AC and press to
                                              The air flow can be increased or decreased     activa te cooling.
                                              by turning the centra l knob.
                                              To return to automa tic m ode: press button
                                              V or AUTO .
                                              Aux iliary heating 3 – see pag e 140.




                                                                                                                                       137
Air d istributi on                             Air flow                                       Sw itching automa tic recirc ul ation 3
In the menu for manual settings, select item   Turn the centre rotary knob clockwise or       on or off
Air Distr ibution.                             anticlock wise (if no menu for manual          The automatic air recircula tion system has
                                               settings is displayed). The selected fan       an air qua lity sensor to d etect harmful
Display of air d istribution m enus:
                                               level is ind icated by x and numb ers in the   gases in the outside air, in whic h case it will
s     Air distrib ution to windscreen          display .                                      switch automatically to recirculation.
      and to front sid e windows
                                               At speed 0 both the fan and the cooling        In the manual settings menu, select menu
M     Air distrib ution to vehicle occupants   (the cooling compressor) a re switched off.    item Air Q uality Sensor a nd switch it on or
      through a djustable air vents                                                           off by pressing.
                                               To return to a utoma tic mode: Press A UTO
      front and rear
                                               button.                                        S witc h to manual air rec irculation as
K     Air distrib ution to footwell                                                           nec essary .
Display of selected air distribution by
means of sym bols in display .
Reverting to automatic a ir distribution:
Select menu item Auto or press the AUTO
button.




138
Manual air recirc ulation m ode                  Air conditioning with the engine                Cooled glove compartm ent 3
The a ir recirculation sy stem prevents the      not running                                     C ooled air is fed into the glove
entry of outside air and the air in the          When the vehicle is stop ped and the            compa rtm ent through an opening.
passenger com partment is circulated .           ignition off, the heat or cooling power still   If g lov e com partment cooling is not
Press button 4 , the c ontrol indicator in       in the sy stem can b e used to condition the    needed, turn the wheel d ow nwa rd s.
the b utton will light up.                       passenger compa rtm ent, for example
                                                 when stop ped at a level crossing.
The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air
recirculation mode. The quality of the           Press button AUTO with the ignition off.
passenger com partment a ir deteriorates         Resid ua l Air C onditioning On will ap pear
which may cause the vehicle occupants to         on the display.
feel drowsy. I n op eration without c ooling     The air conditioning will operate for a
the a ir humid ity increases, so the wind ow s   lim ited p eriod of time.
may mist up. C onseq uently , m anual air
                                                 If necessary, the auxiliary heating 3 also
recirculation should only be run for short
periods of time.                                 autom atic ally switches on. O bserve notes
                                                 on p age 140.
To deactivate manual air recirc ulation:
Press button 4 again, the control                To cancel a ir conditioning, press the AUTO
                                                 button.
indicator in the b utton will go out.




                                                                                                                                          139
Auxiliary heating / ventilation 3                 Di rec t act ivat ion                             Sw itching on at a p rogram med tim e
If the engine is switched off, the interior is    To activa te directly with ignition on, call up   Three p rogram med times can be stored for
heated or ventilated d epending on the            the manual settings menu a nd select item         switching on.
values that hav e been set and the interior       Auxili ary H eat ing then select menu item        For safety reasons only one p rogram med
tem perature.                                     On.                                               time for sw itc hing on ca n be a ctiv e a t any
The regulation is in ac corda nc e with the       When the system is ac tiv ated, the control       one tim e. After the heating cyc le has been
most recent temp erature settings in the          indica tor in the button AUTO will lig ht up.     completed, the next required time for
electronic air conditioning – see pag e 136.                                                        switching on must b e ac tiv ated afresh.
                                                  The system switches itself off automatically
When the system is switched on, the               after a maximum of 60 minutes depend ing          To store a p rogram med time for switching
tem perature setting can be varied using          on the values that hav e been set and the         on, ca ll up the menu for manual settings
the outer rotary knobs.                           interior temperature.                             and select item Auxiliary Heating .
The a ir is led to the windscreen and the         To switch off sooner, press AUTO button or        After the m enu item Auxilia ry Heating the
front side windows if the V button is             select m enu item Auxil iary Hea ting and         current status w ill be shown.
pressed before switching the ignition off.        then re-select menu item O n.
 Do not sw itc h auxiliary heater on in filling
 stations or closed sp aces – risk of fire or
 injury.




140
To set a time, select menu item Setting .    Select the required tim e for programm ed       Remot e cont rol
                                             switching on.                                   The sy stem can also be switched on and off
Then select menu item S tart 1, Start 2 or
                                                                                             using the rem ote control:
Sta rt 3 and set the req uired time. Then    When the system is ac tiv ated, the control
select menu item C onfi rm.                  indica tor in the button AUTO will lig ht up.   On     =    Press b utton b, the control
                                                                                                         ind ic ator in the rem ote control
                                             The system switches itself off automatically
                                                                                                         unit will lig ht up
                                             after a maximum of 60 minutes depend ing
                                             on the values that hav e been set and the       O ff   =    Press b utton § , the control
                                             interior temperature.                                       ind ic ator in the rem ote control
                                                                                                         unit will lig ht up
                                             To cancel a ir conditioning, press the AUTO
                                             button.                                         Whilst the control indicator is lit up, no
                                                                                             further signa l can be sent.
                                             The menu for a ux ilia ry heating c an be
                                             called up within 2 hours of switching the       When the sy stem is activated, the control
                                             ignition off, by pressing on the central        indicator in the button AUTO will light up.
                                             rotary knob, and settings entered.
                                                                                                                                           6




                                                                                                                                          141
The remote control has a range of approx.
600 m. The range can be reduc ed b y
obstructions between the sender a nd
receiver (e. g. walls) and by low power in the
battery.
The sy stem switches itself off autom atically
after a max imum of 60 minutes dep ending
on the v alues tha t have been set and the
interior tem perature.
The a ux ilia ry heating c an be switched off
at any time by pressing the button § .
Dea ctivating an activa ted switch-on tim e:
1. Press button §.
2. Delay of at least 3 seconds.
                                                 Changing the rem ote control ba ttery            Air intake
3. Press button § a gain.                        Replace the battery immediately if the           The air intakes in front of the windscreen on
If required, up to three additional remote       ra ng e of the remote control starts to          the fa r right and left sides of the engine
control units can be programm ed. We             become reduc ed.                                 compa rtm ent must be kep t clear to allow
recom mend that y ou consult a Vauxhall          Insert a pointed ob ject into the opening in     air inta ke. Remove any leav es, dirt or snow.
Authorised Repairer.                             the underside of the rem ote c ontrol and flip
                                                 op en the cover. Replace batteries               Air outlet
                                                 ob serving installation position. For ba ttery   Do not cover the air outlets when storing
                                                 type – see page 275.                             items in the luggag e compartment storag e
                                                                                                  compa rtm ents.
                                                 Alw ays exc hange all batteries a t the sam e
                                                 tim e.
                                                 Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
                                                 in accordance with environmental
                                                 protection regulations.




142
Pollen filter                                  When the auxiliary heating 3 is switched          Mainte nance
The p ollen filter cleans dust, soot, pollen   on there m ay briefly be som e smoke and          In order to ensure consistently efficient
and spores from the air entering from          noise.                                            performa nc e, the cooling system 3 must be
outside. The active carbon layer 3             When the auxiliary heating / auxiliary            switched on for a few m inutes once a
elim inates most od ours and harmful           ventilation 3 is switched on the anti-theft       month regardless of the weather or season.
amb ient gases from the air.                   alarm system monitoring of the vehicle            O peration with cooling 3 (cooling
                                               interior 3 is dea ctivated.                       compressor) is not possible a t low outside
The filter must b e replaced in accordance
                                                                                                 temperatures. Aux ilia ry heating 3 should
with the interv als specified in the Service   Aux iliary hea ting 3 consumes fuel (approx.      be run for a few minutes every 6 months at
Booklet.                                       0.3 litres p er hea ting proc ess on a verage).
                                                                                                 a pre-selected temperature over 22 ° C.
Note                                           Aux iliary heating 3 will only switch on if       In the event of a fault, consult a workshop .
                                               coolant temperature is less tha n approx.
If the windscreen is misted due to da mp                                                         We recommend a Vauxhall Authorised
                                               80 °C .                                           Repairer.
weather, temporarily set the system a s
described under "Window demisting".            In order to im prov e heating power and
                                               ensure that the engine operating
Cooling 3 functions most effic iently when
                                               temperature is rea ched quickly , auxiliary
the w indows and sun roof 3 are closed. I f
                                               heating 3 also switches on automatically
the p assenger compartment has heated
                                               when driving if the outside temp erature is
up consid erably after a long period in
                                               less than ap prox . 8 °C . This occurs
direc t sunlight, briefly open the windows
                                               irresp ective of stored auxiliary heating
and sun roof 3 so that the hot air can
                                               switch-on tim es. Aux iliary heating switches
escape quickly .
                                               itself off automatically when the engine is
When cooling 3 (air c onditioning              switched off, while the combustion air fa n
compressor) is switched on condensation        continues running for ap prox . 2 minutes
forms, which is ex pelled from the underside   (humming noise).
of the v ehicle.
At lea st one air vent must b e open while
cooling 3 (air conditioning compressor) is
on in order to prevent the evaporator from
icing up due to lack of air movement.




                                                                                                                                          143
Automatic        The automatic transmission allows you to
                 cha ng e gears autom atically (autom atic
transmission 3   mode) or manually (m anual mod e).
                 Selecting D puts the transmission in
                 autom atic mode. If the selector lever is
                 moved to the left in the D position, ma nual
                 mode is ac tiv ated, and the gears can be
                 selected manually by tapp ing the selector
                 lever forw ard or back ward.
                 After sta rting the engine and before
                 shifting into a gea r, depress the brake
                 pedal, If the brakes are released w hen a
                 gear is engaged , the v ehicle will "creep".
                 Nev er ac tuate accelerator and b rake
                 pedals simultaneously .
                                                                Selector lever in P , R, N and D
                  Disregard of these instructions may lead      (Automatic mode)
                  to injuries or endanger life.                 P   Park. Front wheels loc ked.
                                                                    O nly with vehic le stationa ry and
                                                                    handbrake on.
                                                                R   Reverse. O nly engage when
                                                                    vehicle stationary.
                                                                N   N eutral.
                                                                D   Drive position for normal driving
                                                                    conditions in first to fifth gear.




144
                                                                                                If the engine speed is too slow, the
                                                                                                transmission automatically shifts to a lower
                                                                                                gear.
                                                                                                Increased engine speed will not result in an
                                                                                                automatic upshift to a higher gear.
                                                                                                For reasons of safety , K ic kdown also
                                                                                                functions in manual mode – see page 147.
                                                                                                The selected gear is ind ic ated in the
                                                                                                transmission displa y.




The selector lever ca n only b e moved out of       Se lector leve r in + or -
P or N when the ig nition is switched on and        Active Se lect (Manual mode)
the foot brak e is depressed (selector lever        +   Shift to a higher gear
lock).
                                                    -   Shift to a lower gear
In positions P or N the control indica tor j
                                                    If a higher g ear is selected when the
in the selector lever indica tor strip will light
up red – see figure.                                running speed is too low, or a lower gear
                                                    when the speed is too high, no shift is
The engine can only be started with lever in        effected. This prev ents the engine from
position P or N. When position N is selected,       running at too low or too high rev s.
press foot brake or engage handbrake
before sta rting.
Do not accelerate during the selection
proced ure.
The selected gea r is indica ted in the
transm ission display .




                                                                                                                                          145
                                             Electronically controlled driving             z Automatic neutral shift function
                                             programmes                                      autom atically sets the transm ission to N
                                             z Adaptive programm es automatically            to reduce fuel consum ption, e.g. at
                                               adap t gea r shifting to suit the driving     tra ffic lig hts.
                                               style, e. g.:                                 The automatic neutral shift function is
                                               – Sporty driving: Transmission changes        activated when the following occurs
                                                 gear a t higher engine speeds.              simultaneously:

                                               – Economical driving: Transmission            – The selector lever is in D or m anual
                                                 cha ng es gear at lower engine speeds.        mode
                                               – Ad aptation to special driving              – The foot brak e is depressed
                                                 conditions still tak es place, such         – The vehicle is stationary
                                                 as: driving up and down hills, w hen
                                                 tow ing a carava n or tra iler, and         – The accelerator ped al is not a ctuated
                                                 with a heav y load.                         – Transm ission oil temperature is
Transm ission dis play                                                                         over 0°C.
The transmission display in the tachometer                                                   As soon as the brake is released and the
dial shows the currently engaged gear or                                                     accelerator ped al is depressed, the
current mode.                                                                                vehicle sta rts off in the usual manner.
P     Park position.                                                                       z By m eans of delay ed gear cha nging
                                                                                             (higher engine speed s) following a cold
R     Reverse gear.
                                                                                             start, the opera ting temperature
N     Neutra l or idling position.                                                           programme quickly and automatically
D     Autom atic mode.                                                                       bring s the catalytic conv erter to the
                                                                                             temperature required for optimum
1-5 Manual mode, selected gea r.                                                             pollutant reduction.
                                                                                           z Winter programme: press button T – see
                                                                                             next c olumn.




146
                                                                                               Engine braking
                                                                                               The autom atic transmission will select the
                                                                                               driving p rogram me for op tim um engine
                                                                                               brak ing effect.
                                                                                               If required, low er gears can also be
                                                                                               ma nually selected to increase the engine
                                                                                               brak ing effect. First gear has the greatest
                                                                                               brak ing effect.

                                                                                               Rocking the car
                                                                                               If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle
                                                                                               to free it from sand, m ud , snow or a hole,
                                                                                               mov e the selector lever from D to R in a
                                                                                               repeat p attern while simultaneously
                                                                                               app ly ing light pressure to the a ccelerator
Winter programm e T                             Kickdown                                       pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid
In the event of starting-off diffic ulties on   Ac celera tor pedal pressed past the           sudden a cceleration.
slip pery roa ds, press button T (can be        pressure point: dep ending on engine           This applies only to the ex ceptional
opera ted only in D – T lights up). The         speed, the transmission shifts down into a     circumstances mentioned above.
vehic le will start off in fourth gear.         low er gear. Full engine power is av ailable
                                                for a cceleration.
The w inter programme is sw itc hed off by:
z pressing button T a gain,                     For reasons of safety, K ickdown also
z switching off the ignition,                   functions in m anual mode.
z selector lev er in m anual mode.
To protect against d amage, the starting-
off aid automatically cuts out at very hig h
transm ission oil temperatures.




                                                                                                                                        147
                                             Stopping the vehicle
                                             The selector lever ca n b e left in the c hosen
                                             gear w ith the engine running.
                                             When stopping on grad ients engage
                                             ha ndb ra ke or depress brak e pedal. To
                                             prevent overheating of the transm ission,
                                             do not increase engine revolutions to
                                             ensure smooth idling while stand ing if a
                                             gear has been selected .
                                             Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy
                                             period, e.g. in traffic jams or at lev el
                                             crossings.
                                             Before leaving the vehicle, apply
                                             handbrake, then place selec tor lever in
                                             position P a nd remove ignition key.
Manoeuvring the vehicle                                                                        Fault
To manoeuv re the vehicle back and forth     The ignition key can only be removed when         In the ev ent of a fault the control
during attem pts to park or in garage        the selector lever is in position P.              indicator A lig hts up. The transmission
entrances, the vehicle’s creeping            If the selector lever is not in P when the        no longer shifts automatically .
movement c an be utilised by releasing the   ignition is switched off, control indicator j
brake pedal.                                 in the selector lever indicator strip flashes –
Never actuate a ccelerator and brake         see p age 145, Fig. 15086 J. S hift the
pedals simultaneously.                       selector lever to P.
                                             If the ignition key is not removed, the
                                             battery m ay be discharged if the vehicle is
                                             then left to stand for a lengthy period of
                                             tim e.




148
Driving can b e continued:
In ma nual m ode second and fifth g ears
can be selected. Depending on the fault, it
may be that only fifth gea r can be selected.
In automatic m ode, only fifth gear is
ava ilab le when in D.
Illumination of control indicator A can
also indicate a fault in the engine
electronic s – see page 164.
Hav e ca use of fa ult remedied. We
recom mend that y ou consult a Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer. The system ’s
integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to
be quickly remedied.
                                                Inte rruption of power supply                       4. Push bar down with a screwdriver and
                                                If the v ehicle b attery is flat, the selector         move selector lever out of P.
                                                lever cannot be moved out of position P.            5. Refit ashtra y socket in centre console
                                                If the ba ttery is flat, start the v ehicle using      and latch into position.
                                                jump lead s – see page 200.                         6. Refit ashtra y.
                                                If the cause is not a discharged battery,           Re-selecting P locks the selector lever
                                                unlock selector lev er:                             aga in. Have cause of power sup ply
                                                1. Apply hand brake.                                interruption remedied . We recommend
                                                                                                    that you consult a Vaux hall Authorised
                                                2. Remove the ashtray – see page 90.                Repairer.
                                                3. Pull out ashtray socket upwards.




                                                                                                                                              149
CVTronic 3                                      In continuously variable automatic mode
                                                the transm ission ra tio is continuously
                                                                                                 Gears can be selected manually in manual
                                                                                                 mode. H ig her or lower tra nsmission ratios
                                                variable. The engine speed is in the             are manually selected by moving the
                                                op tim um torque range. Moving the               selector lever from D to the left and
                                                selector lever from N to D puts the              tapping towa rd + or -.
                                                tra nsmission into this m od e.                  After starting the engine, op erate the
                                                When op erating out of continuously              brak e before selecting a mode. If a mode is
                                                variable autom atic mode, the CVTronic           selected and the b ra ke is released, the
                                                electronically simulates the shifting of a       vehicle " creeps" . Never operate the
                                                conv entional autom atic transmission w ith      acc elerator and brake ped als
                                                defined gears. This mode is selected by          simultaneously.
                                                moving the selec tor lever from D to the left.
                                                                                                  Disregard of these instructions ma y lead
                                                                                                  to injuries or endanger life.


CVTronic is an autom atic transmission with
the following facilities:
z Continuously va riabl e autom atic m od e,
z Out of c ontinuousl y vari able a utomat ic
  mode,
z Manual m ode.




150
                                                                                             The engine can only b e started with lever in
                                                                                             position P or N . When position N is selected,
                                                                                             press foot brake or enga ge handbrak e
                                                                                             before starting.
                                                                                             Do not accelerate during the selection
                                                                                             procedure.
                                                                                             The selector lever p osition is indica ted in
                                                                                             the tra nsmission display.




Sele ctor lever in P, R and N           The selector lever can only be mov ed out of
P   Park. Front wheels lock ed.         P or N when the ignition is switched on and
    O nly with vehicle stationary and   the foot brake is depressed (selector lever
    handbrake on.                       lock ).
R   Reverse. Only engage when           In positions P or N the control indicator j
    vehic le stationa ry .              in the selector lev er indicator strip w ill light
                                        up red – see figure.
N   Neutra l or idling position.
                                        If the transmission oil temp erature is less
                                        than -25 °C the selector lever cannot be
                                        moved until the transmission oil
                                        temperature reaches -25 ° C when the
                                        engine is running (P or N flashes in the
                                        tra nsmission display as long as the selector
                                        lever is loc ked).




                                                                                                                                        151
                                                                                             Ratio ad aptation takes plac e in 6 gears in
                                                                                             this mod e. The max imum sp eed is reached
                                                                                             in 5th gear, and 6th gear is for econom ical
                                                                                             driving.
                                                                                             A is shown in the transm ission display .




Continuously variable                           Out of continuously variable
autom atic mode                                 automatic mode
Move selector lever from N to D (d o not        Move selector lever to left in position D.
move to left in D).
Drive position for norm al driving positions.
D is shown in the transmission display.




152
                                                     If the engine speed is too slow , a lower gear
                                                     is a utomatically selec ted.
                                                     At high engine speeds a higher gear is not
                                                     autom atic ally selected.
                                                     For reasons of safety, K ickdown also
                                                     functions in manual mode – see page 155.
                                                     The enga ged gear is show n in the
                                                     tra nsmission display.




Manual m ode (ActiveSelect)                                                                           Trans miss ion display
Shift the selector lev er from D first to the left                                                    The transm ission display in the tachometer
and then forward or rearward.                                                                         dial shows the currently engaged gear or
                                                                                                      current m od e.
+    Switch to higher gear
                                                                                                      P   Park p osition.
-    Switch to lower gear
                                                                                                      R   Reverse gear.
If a higher gear is selected at too slow a
speed or a lower gear at too high a speed,                                                            N   N eutral or idling position.
no change takes place. This avoids engine                                                             D   C ontinuously v ariable automa tic
speeds tha t are too high or too low.                                                                     mode.
The m aximum speed is reached in 5th                                                                  A   O ut of continuously variable
gear. 6th gear is d esigned for econom ic al                                                              automatic m ode.
driving.
                                                                                                      1-6 Manual m od e, selected transm ission
                                                                                                          ratio.




                                                                                                                                               153
Ele ctronically controlled driving              z Automatic neutral shift function           z After a cold start the operating
programme s                                       automatically sets the transmission to N     temperature program me ra pidly brings
z Ad aptive programmes a utoma tica lly           to reduc e fuel consumption, e.g. at         the cataly tic converter to the optimum
  adapt the tra nsmission ratio to the            traffic lights.                              temperature that is required to op tim ise
  driv ing sty le, e.g. :                                                                      pollutant reduction b y means of using
                                                  The automa tic neutral shift function is
                                                                                               the app ropriate ratio (increased engine
  – Sporty driving style: transmission            activa ted when:
                                                                                               speed ).
    changes at higher engine speed s.             – The selector lever is in autom atic
                                                                                             z The speed programm e lim its the engine
  – Ec onomical driving sty le:                     mode or manual mode
                                                                                               speed to protect the transmission from
    transm ission ra tio cha nges at              – The foot brake is depressed                damage at high transmission oil
    slow er speeds.                                                                            temperatures.
                                                  – The vehic le is stationary
  – Adaptation to special driving                                                            z Winter programme: press button T – see
                                                  – The accelerator pedal is not actuated
    conditions still takes pla ce, such as:                                                    next c olumn.
    driving up a nd down hills, tow ing a         – Tra nsmission oil tem perature is
    carav an / trailer and with heavy loa ds.       ov er 0°C .
                                                  As soon as the brake is released and the
                                                  accelerator pedal is depressed, the
                                                  vehicle starts off in the usual m anner.




154
                                                                                                Engine braking
                                                                                                C VTronic automatically selects the driving
                                                                                                programm e w ith the optimum eng ine
                                                                                                brak ing effect.
                                                                                                If necessa ry, lower gea rs ca n also b e
                                                                                                selected in manual mode to increase the
                                                                                                am ount of braking assistance. Gear 1 has
                                                                                                the greatest b ra king effect.

                                                                                                Rocking the car
                                                                                                If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle
                                                                                                to free it from sand, m ud , snow or a hole,
                                                                                                mov e the selector lever from D to R in a
                                                                                                repeat p attern while simultaneously
                                                                                                app ly ing light pressure to the a ccelerator
Winter programm e T                             Kickdown                                        pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid
In the event of starting-off diffic ulties on   Ac celera tor pedal pressed past the            sudden a cceleration.
slip pery roa ds press button T, which can      pressure point: dep ending on engine            This applies only to the ex ceptional
be selected either in or out of continuously    speed, the transmission shifts down into a      circumstances mentioned above.
variable automatic m od e (T lig hts up).       low er gear transm ission ra tio. Full engine
The v ehicle will start off with a hig h        power is av aila ble for acc elera tion.
transm ission ra tio.                           For safety reasons Kic kdown is available in
The w inter programme is sw itc hed off by:     all modes.
z pressing button T a gain,
z switching off the ignition,
z switching to Manual mode.
To protect against d amage, the starting-
off aid automatically cuts out at very hig h
transm ission oil temperatures.




                                                                                                                                         155
                                             Stopping the vehicle
                                             The selector lever ca n b e left in the c hosen
                                             gear w ith the engine running.
                                             When stopping on grad ients engage
                                             ha ndb ra ke or depress brak e pedal. To
                                             prevent overheating of the transm ission,
                                             do not increase engine revolutions to
                                             ensure smooth idling while stand ing if a
                                             gear has been selected .
                                             Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy
                                             period, e.g. in traffic jams or at lev el
                                             crossings.
                                             If the selector lever is not in P when the
                                             ignition is switched off, control indicator j
                                             in the selector lever indicator strip flashes –
Manoeuvring the vehicle                                                                        Fault
                                             see p age 151, Fig. 15086 J. S hift the
To manoeuv re the vehicle back and forth                                                       C ontrol indicator A illuminates if a fault
                                             selector lever to P.
during attem pts to park or in garage                                                          occurs.
entrances, the vehicle’s creeping            Before leaving the vehicle, app ly
                                                                                               Driving ca n be c ontinued:
movement c an be utilised by releasing the   ha ndb ra ke, then place selector lever in
brake pedal.                                 position P and remove ignition key.               The choice of transm ission ra tio is
                                                                                               restricted . The v ehicle accelerates more
Never actuate a ccelerator and brake         The ignition key can only be removed when
                                                                                               slowly and the max imum speed is limited .
pedals simultaneously.                       the selector lever is in position P.
                                                                                               C ertain faults p revent the use of ma nual
                                             If the ignition key is not removed, the           mode.
                                             battery m ay be discharged if the vehicle is
                                                                                               Illumination of control indicator A can
                                             then left to stand for a lengthy period of
                                                                                               also indicate a fault in the engine
                                             tim e.
                                                                                               electronics – see page 164.
                                                                                               Hav e c ause of fault remedied. We
                                                                                               recommend that you consult a Vauxhall
                                                                                               Authorised Repa irer. The sy stem’s
                                                                                               integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to
                                                                                               be quickly remedied .




156
                                                                                                Re-selecting P locks the selector lever
                                                                                                aga in. Have cause of power sup ply
                                                                                                interruption remedied . We recommend
                                                                                                that you consult a Vaux hall Authorised
                                                                                                Repairer.




Interruption of power supply                      4. Push ba r down with a screw driv er a nd
If the vehicle battery is flat, the selector         move selector lever out of P.
lev er ca nnot be moved out of position P.        5. Refit ashtray socket and click it into
If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using      place.
jump leads – see pag e 200.                       6. Refit ashtray.
If the battery is not the cause of the fault,
release selector lev er:
1. Ap ply handbrake.
2. Remove the ashtray – see page 90.
3. Pull out ashtra y socket upw ards.




                                                                                                                                          157
Driving hints                                     Never coast with engine not running
                                                  Many units w ill not function in this situation
                                                                                                       Diesel engine: On rising gradients of 10 %
                                                                                                       or more, do not drive faster than 20 mph
                                                  (e.g. brake servo unit, electro-hydraulic            (30 km/h) in 1st gea r, 30 m ph (50 km /h) in
                                                  power steering). Driving in this ma nner is a        2nd gear; with autom atic transmission 3 in
                                                  danger to y ourself a nd others.                     gear 1 and with C VTronic 3 in m anual
                                                                                                       mode in transm ission ratio 1, do not
                                                  Brake servo unit                                     exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
                                                  When the engine is not running, the brake
                                                  servo unit is no longer effective once the           Driving with a roof load
                                                  brake peda l has been depressed once or              Do not exceed the perm issible roof load –
                                                  twice. Braking effect is not reduced , but           see pages 188, 263. For reasons of safety,
                                                  braking requires significantly grea ter force.       distribute the loa d ev enly a nd secure it
                                                                                                       properly with reta ining straps so that it
                                                  Electro-hydraulic powe r ass isted                   cannot slip . Set the ty re p ressure to the
                                                  ste ering                                            va lue sp ecified for a full load. Do not drive
                                                  If the power-assisted steering fails when            faster than 75 m ph (120 km/h). C heck and
The first 600 miles / 1000 km                     being towed with the engine switched off,            retig hten the straps frequently.
Drive your vehicle at v arious speeds. Do         the vehicle can still be steered, but
not use full throttle. Never allow the eng ine    considera bly more forc e is req uired.              Switching off the e ngine
to labour at low revs.                                                                                 When y ou switch off, fans in the eng ine
                                                  Driving in mountainous te rrain or                   compa rtm ent may continue running for a
Make good use of all gea rs. Depress the
accelerator pedal a maximum of around             with a caravan / trailer                             time to cool the engine.
three quarters of the ava ila ble ped al travel   The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its        If the engine temperature is very high, e.g.
in all gears.                                     cooling p ow er is therefore independent of          after driving in mountainous terrain: allow
                                                  the engine speed.                                    the engine to id le for approx im ately two
Do not drive faster than three quarters of
max imum speed.                                   Since a considerable amount of heat is               minutes in order to prevent heat
                                                  genera ted at high engine speeds and less            acc um ulation.
Do not brake unnecessarily hard for the
                                                  at slower speeds, do not shift d ow n when
first 125 miles (200 km ).                                                                             Vehicles with engine Z 20 N ET 1 ):
                                                  climbing hills whilst the v ehicle is still coping
                                                                                                       After running at high eng ine speeds or high
                                                  with the gradient in the higher g ear.
                                                                                                       eng ine loads, op erate the engine briefly at
                                                                                                       a low load or run in neutral for approx.
                                                                                                       30 seconds before switching off in ord er to
                                                                                                       protec t the turbocharger.


                                                                                                       1)
                                                                                                            Sales des ig nation – see p ag e 256.


158
Save energy – more miles                        Engine s pe ed                                   Clutch operation
Please observe the running-in hints on the      Driv e in a low engine speed range for each      Alway s d epress the c lutch pedal hard to
previous pag e and the tips for energ y         gear a s m uc h as possible.                     the floor to p revent shifting difficulties and
saving on the following pages.                                                                   transmission damage.
Good, technica lly correct and economical       Warming up                                       When driving do not use the pedal as a
driving ensures ma ximum durability and         Allow the engine to warm up while driving.       footrest; this will cause sub stantial clutch
performance for your vehic le.                  Do not warm it up by letting it run at idling    wear.
                                                speed. Do not apply full throttle until the
Overrun 3                                       engine has reached op erating                    P edals
                                                temperature.
The fuel supply is autom atically shut off                                                       Do not place any ob jects in the footwell
during overrun, e.g. when the vehicle is        After a cold start, the automatic                which could slip under the ped als and
being driven down long gradients or when        tra nsmission or C VTronic does not shift to     inhibit the pedal trav el.
braking. To enable the overrun cut-off to       higher gears until faster speeds hav e been      To ensure the pedal travel is uninhibited,
take effect, do not acc elerate during          reached . This allows the catalytic converter    there must be no mats in the area of the
overrun and, if in manual transm ission         to quic kly reach the temperature req uired      pedals.
mode, do not de-clutch. To prevent              for optimum pollutant reduction.
dam age to the cata ly tic converter, overrun                                                    Battery care
cut-off is temp orarily deactivated when the    Correct gear sele ction
                                                                                                 When driving slowly or when the v ehicle
cataly tic conv erter temperature is high.      Engine in neutral a nd without rev ving in the   is sta tionary, e. g. in slow urban traffic ,
Vehi cles w ith engine Z       20 N ET 1):      low er gears. Stop-and-go traffic and            stop-start traffic or traffic jams, turn off
Flow -g enerated noises may be aud ible if      driving a t a speed too high for the selected    all unnecessary electric al loads where
the a ccelerator is released quickly on         gear or transmission ratio increases wear        possible (e. g. heated rear window, heated
account of air flow in the turbocharger.        and fuel consum ption.                           seats).
                                                Change down                                      Declutch w hen sta rting in order to relieve
                                                When decreasing speed, shift down into           the strain on the starter and the ba ttery.
                                                the next lowest gear. Do not slip the clutch
                                                with a high-revving engine. This is
                                                especially important when hill climb ing.




1)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ge 25 6.


                                                                                                                                            159
Save fuel,                                     New painting techniques employ wa ter as
                                               a solv ent.
                                                                                                Warming up
                                                                                                z Full throttle and w arming up at idle
protect the                                    End-of-life ve hicle recovery
                                                                                                  speed increase w ear, fuel consumption,
                                                                                                  ex haust em ission, the am ount of
environment                                    Information on end-of-life vehicle recovery
                                               centres and the recy cling of end-of-life
                                                                                                  pollutant in the exhaust and the am ount
                                                                                                  of noise.
                                               vehicles is availab le at ww w.vauxhall.co. uk
                                                                                                z Driv e off imm ediately after starting.
                                                                                                  Wa rm up the engine b y running it at
                                               Drive in an e nergy and
                                                                                                  moderate eng ine speeds.
                                               environme nt-conscious way
                                               z High fuel consumption, noise lev els and       Uniform speed
                                                 exhaust emission are often caused b y a
                                                                                                z Hectic driving significantly increases fuel
                                                 driving style that is not energy and
                                                                                                  consumption, the ex haust emissions, the
                                                 env ironment-c onscious.
                                                                                                  proportion of pollutant in the exhaust
                                               z Y ou should therefore drive with energy in       gas and the noise level.
                                                 mind – "more miles with less fuel" .
                                                                                                z Do not accelerate a nd brake
                                                 Reduce the noise level and exhaust               unnecessarily . Drive at uniform speed.
Trend-setting technology                         emissions b y adopting an environment-
                                                                                                  Avoid frequent starting off and stopping
When dev eloping and manufac turing your         consc ious driving style. This is ex tremely
                                                                                                  e.g . at traffic lights, in short distance
vehic le, Vauxhall used environment-             worthwhile and im proves the quality of
                                                                                                  tra ffic and in queues of traffic by m eans
friendly and in the m ain recyc la ble           life.
                                                                                                  of clever planning . Select road s w ith
materials. The production methods used to      Fuel consumption depends to a great                good traffic flow .
mak e y our v ehicle are likewise              extent on your own personal driving style.
env ironmenta lly -compatible.                 The follow ing hints are intended to help        Idling
Recycling of production wastes keeps the       you consume fuel at a rate that is as close      z The eng ine also consumes fuel when
circulation of material closed. Reduction of   as possible to the specified lev els – see         idling .
energy a nd water requirements a lso help s    page 260, 261.
                                                                                                z If you have to wait for more than one
to conserve natural resources.                 Check your vehic le’s fuel consum ption            minute, it is worthwhile switching off the
A highly adv anced design mea ns that your     every time you refuel. This facilita tes early     engine. Fiv e m inutes of idling
vehic le can be easily disassembled at the     detection of a ny irregularities causing           corresponds to ap prox imately 0.6 miles
end of its working life, and the individual    increased fuel consumption.                        (1 k ilom etre) of d riv ing.
materials separated for subsequent re-use.
Materia ls such as asbestos and cadmium
are not used . The refrigerant in the air
conditioning system 3 is C FC -free.


160
Overrun                                               z Slightly relea sing the accelerator ped al   Repair and maintenance
z The fuel supply is automatically shut off             results in distinct fuel savings with no     z Improper repairs or adjustm ent and
  during ov errun, e. g. when the vehicle is            major loss of speed.                           maintenance work can increase fuel
  being driven down long gradients or                   Drive at no more tha n around three            consumption. Do not carry out w ork on
  when braking – see page 159.                          quarters of max imum speed and you will        the eng ine yourself.
z To enable the overrun cut-off to take                 use up to 50 % less fuel, without losing a     You may out of ignorance infringe
  effect a nd sav e fuel, during overrun do             great deal of time.                            environmental law s b y not disposing of
  not ac celera te and do not declutch.                                                                materials properly.
                                                      Tyre inflation pres sure
                                                                                                       Appropriate parts m ight not be rec ycled .
Corre ct gear selection                               z Inadequate ty re p ressure, leading to
z High revs increase engine w ear and fuel              higher road resistance, costs m oney in        Contact with some of the materia ls
  consumption.                                          two wa ys: for more fuel and increased         inv olv ed may p ose a hea lth haz ard.
                                                        tyre wear.
z Do not race your engine. Avoid d riv ing at                                                        z We recom mend that repair and
  high engine speeds.                                 z Regular checks (every 14 d ays) pay off.       maintenance be entrusted to a Vauxhall
                                                                                                       Authorised Repairer.
  Driv ing with an ey e on the tachom eter            Electrical loads
  saves fuel. I f possib le, drive a t low rev s in                                                  Extre me driving conditions
                                                      z The power consum ption of electrical
  each gear and a t a consta nt speed.
                                                        equip ment increa ses fuel consumption.      z Driv ing up steep gradients, cornering,
  Driv e in top g ear as m uch a s p ossible,                                                          driving on poor roads and winter driving
  shift up as soon as possib le and do not            z Sw itch off additional consumers (e.g. air
                                                                                                       all increase fuel consumption.
  shift down until the engine is no longer              conditioning 3, hea ted rear window)
  running truly .                                       when they are no longer required.              Fuel consumption increa ses dramatically
                                                                                                       in urba n tra ffic a nd at winter
High speed                                            Roof racks, ski-holders                          temperatures, especially on short trip s
z The faster the speed, the higher the                z Roof loads can increase fuel                   when the engine operating tempera ture
  consumption and the noise level. Driving              consump tion by approx. 3.5 gal./1000          is not reached.
  at full throttle uses up a g reat deal of fuel        miles (1l/100 km) due to air resistanc e.    z Follow the hints given above to keep
  and generates ex cessive noise a nd hig h           z Remove them if they are not being used.        consumption to a m inimum under suc h
  emission levels.                                                                                     cond itions.




                                                                                                                                                 161
Fuel consumption,   Fuel consumption
                    Fuel consumption is determined under
                                                                    Fuel for pe trol engine s
                                                                    C om mercially availab le high-quality fuels
fuel, refuelling    specific driving conditions – see page 260.     are suitable (catalytic conv erter – see
                                                                    pag e 164, octane numbers – see
                    Fitting special equipment will increase the
                                                                    pag es 256, 257). Fuel quality has a d ecisive
                    weight of the vehicle. This in turn increases
                                                                    influence on the power output, running
                    fuel consumption and reduces the
                                                                    behaviour and service life of the engine.
                    specified m aximum speed of the vehicle.
                                                                    The ad ditiv es conta ined in the fuel play an
                    For the first few thousand miles /              important role in this reg ard. Y ou should
                    kilometres, friction between the engine and     therefore only use high-quality fuels
                    tra nsmission components is higher. This        containing additives.
                    increases fuel consum ption.
                                                                    Fuel with too low an octane number can
                                                                    cause pink ing. Va ux hall cannot be held
                                                                    liable for resulting damage.
                                                                    Petrol with a hig her octane number can
                                                                    alway s be used .
                                                                    The use of 91 octane fuel is not permitted
                                                                    in vehicles with engine Z 22 Y H1 ).
                                                                    Pump nozzles for leaded fuel ca nnot be
                                                                    inserted into the filler nec k of vehicles tha t
                                                                    operate on unlead ed fuel.
                                                                    The ignition timing adjusts automatically to
                                                                    the grade of fuel used (octane number) –
                                                                    see pages 256, 257.
                                                                    Use of petrol with an octane rating of 95
                                                                    will ensure economical driv ing.




                                                                    1)
                                                                         Sales des ig nation – see p ag e 256.


162
Fuel for diesel engine s                         Re fue lling
Diesel engines must be operated only on
                                                  C are must be ta ken when handling fuel.
commercially ava ila ble diesel fuel meeting
the specific ations of DIN EN 590. Do not         Before refuelling, it is absolutely vital to
use ma rine diesel oils, heating oils or          switch off the engine and any heating
entirely or partially plant-b ased diesel         systems with combustion cha mbers.
fuels, such as rape seed oil or b io diesel,      Sw itch off all mobile phones.
Aquazole and sim ilar diesel-w ater               Petrol is flamma ble and exp losive.
emulsions.                                        Please therefore avoid naked flames
The flow a nd filterability of diesel fuel are    and sparks when ha ndling fuel, even
tem perature-d epend ent.                         when you are in the vicinity of fuel. Do
                                                  not smoke! This also applies in places
Diesel fuels with improved low-
                                                  where petrol can only be detected by its
tem perature properties are therefore
                                                  characteristic smell. If you ca n smell
ava ilab le on the market during the winter
                                                  petrol in the vehicle, have cause thereof
months. Make sure that you fill the tank
                                                  rem edied imm ediately. We recomm end          C orrect filling depends to a large extent on
with winter fuel before the start of the cold
                                                  that you consult a Va ux hall Authorised       proper operation of the fuel disp ensing
weather season.
                                                  Repairer.                                      pump:
Additives can be used with d iesel fuels with
winter p roperties that are guaranteed by                                                        1. Fully insert the pump nozz le and switch it
                                                 The fuel tank filler neck is located on the        on.
the m anufacturer and when using diesel          rig ht, rear side of the vehicle.
fuel filters that are heated depending on                                                        2. After the automatic cut-off, the nominal
the outside temperature.                         The tank flap is locked together with the          capacity of the tank ca n be obtained by
                                                 doors – see page 58.                               top ping up with two doses of fuel. Make
                                                 Open the tank flap .                               sure the nozzle is fully inserted.
                                                 Unscrew fuel filler c ap to open, remove and    To close, position the fuel filler cap a nd
                                                 suspend from tank fla p.                        rotate until the cap audibly clicks over the
                                                                                                 reta iner.
                                                 The fuel tank has a limiting sy stem which
                                                 prevents ov erfilling of the tank.              C lose fuel tank cov er.
                                                                                                 Wipe off a ny ov erflowing fuel immediately .




                                                                                                                                           163
Catalytic converter,                                                      Dama ge to the catalytic conv erter or the
                                                                          vehicle m ay result if the following points
exhaust gases                                                             are not observed :
                                                                          z If the engine misfires or runs roughly
                                                                            after a cold start, the engine power has
                                                                            reduced significantly or other unusua l
                                                                            operating problems occur that indicate a
                                                                            fault in the ignition system , please
                                                                            contac t a workshop as quickly a s
                                                                            possible. We recommend that you
                                                                            consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
                                                                            Driv e a t a slower speed a nd with less
                                                                            engine revs for a short tim e if necessa ry .
                                                                            Irregular engine running a nd a loss of
                                                                            engine power when the Traction Control
                       Catalytic converter for petrol                       sy stem 3 or the Electronic Stability
                       engines 3                                            Program me 3 come into action are
                       Leaded fuel will da mage the cata ly tic             determined b y the op erating conditions
                       conv erter and parts of the electronic               and are therefore of no significance – see
                       sy stem, rend ering them inoperative.                pages 168, 170.
                       Use of high-qua lity fuels other than those        z If unb urnt fuel enters the c atalytic
                       specified on p age 162 (e.g. LR P1 )) could          conv erter, this may result in overheating
                       damage the catalytic converter.                      and irreparable damage to the c atalytic
                                                                            conv erter.
                       On vehicles with a c atalytic converter, the
                       fuel ta nk filler nec k is of a narrow design so     You should therefore av oid
                       that a dispensing pump for leaded fuel               unnecessarily long use of the starter
                       cannot b e inserted .                                when starting off, running the tank dry
                                                                            (an irregular fuel supply w ill lead to
                                                                            overhea ting) and starting the engine by
                                                                            pushing or towing.




                       1)
                            LRP = L ead Rep la cem ent Petro l.

164
z If the emission control indicator Z            Catalytic converter for dies el
  flashes, slow down until the flashing          engines 3
  stops a nd the control indicator is steady .   Damage to the ca talytic converter or the
  Conta ct a workshop immediately . We           vehicle may result if the follow ing points
  recommend that you consult a                   are not observed:
  Vauxhall Authorised Rep airer. For
  emission control indicator Z – see page        z If the engine runs roug hly , the engine
                                                   power ha s reduc ed significa ntly or other
  166.
                                                   unusual operating problems occur,
                                                   please contact a workshop as quickly a s
                                                   possible. We recomm end that y ou
                                                   consult a Vaux hall Authorised Repairer.
                                                   Drive at a slower speed and with less
                                                   eng ine rev s for a short time if necessary.
                                                   Irregular engine running and a loss of
                                                   eng ine power when the Traction C ontrol
                                                   system 3 or the Electronic S ta bility         Controlling exhaust emission
                                                   Programme 3 com e into action are              Throug h design-rela ted measures – mainly
                                                   determined by the opera ting conditions        in the a rea of the fuel-injection and ignition
                                                   and are therefore of no significance – see     systems – the proportion of nox ious
                                                   pages 168, 170.                                ma terials in the exhaust, such as carbon
                                                                                                  monoxide (CO ), hydrocarbons (HC) a nd
                                                                                                  nitrogen oxides (NO x), is reduced to a
                                                                                                  minimum.




                                                                                                                                             165
                                                                                                    In some cases the fault can be eliminated
                                                                                                    by sw itc hing the engine off and back on
                                                                                                    aga in. If the c ontrol indicator lights up
                                                                                                    aga in when the engine is running, consult a
                                                                                                    workshop to have the cause of the fault
                                                                                                    remedied. We recom mend a Va ux ha ll
                                                                                                    Authorised Repa irer.
                                                                                                    If it lights b riefly, but does not rec ur, it is of
                                                                                                    no significance.
                                                                                                    Flashing with the ignition switched on
                                                                                                    indicates a fault in the immobiliser system.
                                                                                                    The engine c annot be started – see
                                                                                                    pag e 55.


Cont rol indica tor Z for exhaust                Flashing with the engine running indicates
Lights up when ignition is switched on a nd      a fault that may damage the catalytic
rem ains illuminated during starting. Goes       conv erter. You can continue to drive
out shortly a fter engine starts.                without causing damage by slowing down
                                                 until the fla shing stop s and the control
If it lights while the engine is running there
                                                 indica tor is stead y. C onsult a workshop
is a fault in the emission control sy stem.
                                                 immed iately. We recommend tha t you
The p ermitted em ission values may be
                                                 consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
exceeded. C onsult a workshop immedi-
ately . We recomm end a Vauxhall                 Control i nd icator A for engine
Authorised Repairer.                             elect ronics
                                                 (w ithin tachometer display dial)
                                                 If it lights w hen the engine is running , there
                                                 is a fault in engine or transmission
                                                 electronics. The electronic system switches
                                                 to an emergency running programme. Fuel
                                                 consumption may be increased a nd the
                                                 driveab ility of the vehicle may be impaired.




166
Exhaust gases                                    Maintenance                                        Y ou are thereby making an im portant
                                                 Have all maintena nce work c arried out at         contribution towards keeping the air clean
 Engine ex haust ga ses contain poisonous                                                           and c om pliance w ith emissions legislation.
                                                 the intervals spec ified by Va ux ha ll. We
 carbon monox ide, which is colourless           recommend that you entrust this work to a          C hecking and adjustment of the fuel-
 and odourless and could be fatal if             Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, w ho has             injection and ignition systems is part of the
 inhaled.                                        prop er equipment a nd trained personnel           scope of inspec tion. For this reason you
 If ex haust fumes penetrate the vehicle         available. Electronic testing sy stems permit      should hav e a ll maintenance work carried
 interior, open the windows and c onsult a       ra pid diagnosis and remedy of faults. This        out a t the intervals specified in your Serv ice
 work shop imm ediately. We recomm end           way y ou can be certain that all                   Booklet.
 that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised          components of the vehic le’s electrical,
 Repairer.                                       injection and ignition system s operate
                                                 correctly, that your vehicle has a low level
When the vehicle is driven for the first time,   of polluta nt em ission and tha t the cataly tic
wax and oil on the exhaust sy stem ma y          conv erter system will have a long serv ice
evaporate, producing sm ok e-like                life.
emissions. Allow wax and oil to eva pora te
while the vehic le is in open a ir. Avoid
inhaling.




                                                                                                                                                167
Drive control systems   Traction Control system (TC P lus ) 3
                        TC P lu s p revents
                                        the driving wheels from
                                                                         TC Pl us is ready for operation as soon as the
                                                                         ignition is switched on and the c ontrol
                        spinning, irrespective of the road               indicator v goes out.
                        conditions and tyre grip.                        When the TCP lu s comes into ac tion, v
                        The system m onitors the rotational sp eed       flashes.
                        of all wheels. As soon as at lea st one          The vehicle is now in a critical situa tion;
                        driving wheel sta rts to spin, the engine        TC Pl us allows you to keep control of the
                        output is reduced (the sound of the engine       vehicle a nd reminds you to ad apt your
                        cha ng es) and the spinning wheel is b ra ked.   speed to the road conditions.
                        This improves the vehicle’s directional
                        control and d riv ing power, particularly on      Do not let this special safety feature
                        snow and ic e as well as on wet or slippery       tempt y ou into taking risks when driving.
                        road s.
                                                                          Tra ffic safety can only b e ac hieved by
                                                                          adopting a responsible d riv ing sty le.




168
Cont rol indica tor v
Lights up for a few sec onds when ig nition is
switched on. The system is now ready for
opera tion.
Flashing during driving
This shows the system has com e into
action. The engine output may be reduced
(the sound of the engine cha nges) a nd the
vehic le ma y be braked automatically to a
small degree.




                                                 Lights while driv ing                            Sw itching off 3
                                                 Fault in the sy stem: Driving ca n continue.     TC Pl us can be deactivated by pressing
                                                 Spinning drive wheels ca n cause driving         button v 3.
                                                 stability to worsen unless driving style is      Deactivation is only possible up to a speed
                                                 adapted, depending on ac celera tion and         of 40 mph (60 k m/h) and is indicated by
                                                 road surface.                                    illumination of control indicator v on the
                                                 Have cause of fault rem edied. We                instrument panel.
                                                 recommend that you consult a Va ux ha ll         TC Pl us is reactivated by pressing b utton v
                                                 Authorised Repairer. The system’s                aga in or the nex t time the ignition is
                                                 integrated self-diag nostics a llows faults to   switched on.
                                                 be q uick ly remedied.




                                                                                                                                            169
Ele ctronic Stability                                 ESP P lu s is read y for op eration as soon as the
Program me (ESP Plus ) 3                              ignition is switc hed on and c ontrol
ES P Pl us imp rov es driving stability when          indica tor v goes out.
necessary, irrespective of the road surface           When the ESP Pl us comes into action, v
and the ty re grip in all d riv ing situations. I t   flashes.
also contains the functions provided by the
Traction Control sy stem.                             The vehic le is now in a critical situation;
                                                      ESP P lu s allows you to keep c ontrol of the
The system monitors vehicle m ovements.               vehicle and remind s y ou to adapt y our
As soon as the vehicle starts to swerve               speed to the road c onditions.
(und ersteers / oversteers) engine output is
red uced (the sound of the engine changes)             Do not let this special safety fea ture
and individual wheels are specifically                 tempt you into ta king risks when d riv ing.
braked. This considerably im proves the
                                                       Traffic safety c an only be achieved by
driving stability of the vehicle on snow and
                                                       adopting a responsible driving style.
ice and on wet or slipp ery road surfaces.
                                                                                                           C ont rol indic ator v
                                                                                                           Lights up for a few second s when ignition is
                                                                                                           switched on. The system is now ready for
                                                                                                           operation.
                                                                                                           Flashing during driving
                                                                                                           This shows the system has com e into
                                                                                                           action. The engine output may be reduced
                                                                                                           (the sound of the eng ine changes) and the
                                                                                                           vehicle m ay be brak ed a utoma tica lly to a
                                                                                                           small degree.




170
Lights while driving
Fault in the ES P system. Driv ing can be
continued. Poor road surfac e conditions
may how ever still ca use vehicle stability to
be impaired.
Hav e ca use of fa ult remedied. We
recom mend that y ou consult a Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer. The system ’s
integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to
be quickly remedied.




                                                 Swit ching off 3
                                                 ESP P lu s can be deactivated by pressing
                                                 button v 3.
                                                 Deactivation is only possible up to a speed
                                                 of 40 mph (60 km/h) and is ind icated by
                                                 illumination of control indica tor v on the
                                                 instrument panel.
                                                 ESP P lu s is reactivated by pressing button v
                                                 again or the next time the ignition is
                                                 switched on.




                                                                                                  171
Cruis e control 3
Cruise control can store and maintain
speeds from approx. 20 to 125 mph (30 to
200 km /h).
For safety reasons, the c ruise c ontrol
cannot be activated until the foot brake
has been activated once.
Cruise control is operated with buttons m ,
g, and § on the turn signal stalk.
Do not use the c ruise control if it is not
adv isable to maintain a c onstant sp eed
(e. g. in situations presenting a danger to
yourself and other road users, in heavy
traffic or on winding , slippery or greasy
roads).                                            Control i nd icator m                          To act ivat e:
With automatic transmission or C VTronic, it       Lights up for a few seconds when ignition is   Tap button m : the current sp eed is stored
is ad visab le to only use the cruise control in   switched on. The system is now ready for       and m ainta ined. The accelerator pedal
D gear or continuously v ariable a utoma tic       op eration.                                    can b e released .
mode.                                              When driving, the control indicator m will     Vehicle speed can be increased by
When the cruise control is active, reaction        lig ht up as soon as the system is switched    depressing the accelerator pedal. When
times may be increased due to the different        on.                                            the accelerator ped al is relea sed, the
position of the feet.                                                                             previously stored sp eed is resum ed.
                                                                                                  I nc rea se
 Disreg ard of these instructions may lead                                                        With cruise control a ctiv e, hold down
 to injuries or end ang er life.                                                                  button m or tap it repeatedly: speed is
                                                                                                  increa sed continuously or in steps of
                                                                                                  1.2 mph (2 km /h) without using the
                                                                                                  acc elerator pedal.
                                                                                                  When button m is released the current
                                                                                                  speed is stored and maintained.




172
Decel era te                                  To dea ctiv ate:                                  Resuming t he stored speed
With cruise control activ e, press button g   Ta p button § : cruise control is switched off,   Tap button g at a speed above 20 m ph
or tap it repeatedly: speed is reduced        control indicator m goes out and the              (30 km/h): the speed selected before the
continuously or in steps of 1. 2 mph          vehicle slowly dec elera tes. To continue         cruise control w as switched off is resumed.
(2 km/h).                                     driving, depress the accelerator pedal in         The stored speed is erased when the
                                              the usual manner.
When button g is released the current                                                           ignition is switched off.
speed is stored and m aintained.              For reasons of safety, c ruise control
                                              switches off automatically under certa in
                                              driving conditions.
                                              For example:
                                              z the vehicle’s speed drops below
                                                approx . 20 mph (30 k m/h) or
                                              z the brake peda l is depressed or
                                              z the clutch p edal is depressed or
                                              z automatic transmission or CVTronic
                                                selector lever in N.




                                                                                                                                        173
Parking distance se nsors 3                  The sy stem registers distance b y means of   To act ivat e:
The p arking dista nce sensors m akes        four sensors in each of the front and rear    With the ignition switched on and in
rev erse p arking easier by m easuring the   bumpers.                                      vehicles with automatic transmission or
distance b etween the vehicle and an                                                       C VTronic, the front and rear parking
obstacle, and giving an acoustic signal in                                                 distance sensors are a utomatically
the p assenger compartment.                                                                ena bled when rev erse gear is selected or
                                                                                           the selector lever is mov ed to the R
                                                                                           position.
                                                                                           The parking distance sensors c an also be
                                                                                           activa ted a t speed s of less than 15 mph
                                                                                           (25 km/h) by pressing the r button on the
                                                                                           instrument panel.
                                                                                           The functional read iness of the sy stem
                                                                                           is indicated by the LED in the button
                                                                                           lighting up.




174
If the vehicle approaches a n ob stacle to                                                        C arava n / trailer tow ing equipm ent 3,
the front or rea r, a series of signals is                                                        ca ravan / t railer tow ing
sounded in the vehicle interior. The interval                                                     The sy stem automatically detects if a
between the signals becomes shorter a s                                                           towbar is fitted to the vehicle.
the d istance is reduced. If the dista nce is                                                     When towing, inserting the tra iler plug in
less than 30 cm , the signal will b e                                                             the socket automatically switches off the
continuous.                                                                                       park ing distance sensors.
 Und er certain circum stances, various                                                           Fitti ng rear load racks 3
 reflective surfaces on objects or clothing                                                       Rear load rack s, e.g . bicy cle rack s, fitted
 as w ell as external noise sourc es may                                                          nea r the sensors could disrupt the system .
 cause the system to fail to detect
 ob stacles. For this reason, care must be
 ta ken when reversing ev en if the park ing
 distance sensors are op erational. This is
 of p artic ular im porta nce when in the
 vicinity of ped estria ns.                      Control i nd icator r
                                                 If it lights up
To deacti vate:                                  Fault in the sy stem. The system is not ready
To d eactiva te the sy stem, press button r      for operation. Have the fault remedied. We
again, the LED in the button w ill go dark.      recommend that you consult a Va ux ha ll
                                                 Authorised Repairer. The system’s
The sy stem switches itself off autom atically
                                                 integrated self-diag nostics a llows faults to
when the forwards speed exceeds approx.
                                                 be q uick ly remedied.
15 mph (25 k m/h).
                                                 If it flashes
                                                 The fault is d ue to sensors obstructed with
                                                 snow or ice. The sensors must be
                                                 undam aged a nd free of d irt, snow and ic e.
                                                 Interference due to ex ternal sources of
                                                 ultra sound (e.g . pneum atic drills, rota ry
                                                 machines). Once the source of interference
                                                 is removed, the sy stem will operate
                                                 normally .




                                                                                                                                             175
Tyre pressure control system 3
The ty re pressure c ontrol system
continuously monitors the pressure in all
four ty res whilst the vehic le is b eing driven.
Ea ch wheel is fitted with a pressure sensor.
Information on indiv id ua l tyre pressures is
sent to a c ontrol unit and the p ressures of
the ty res on the same axle are compared.
If the sy stem detects one or m ore
differences in tyre pressure, the ty res
affected will be show n in the tachometer
display. On vehicles with chec k control 3,
the p ressure in the respective ty re w ill be
accurately shown in the informa tion
display.
In order for the system to b e operable, all                                                                Displa y x in the ta chometer dial
                                                     The ty re p ressure control system does                (exam ple)
wheels must b e equipped with pressure               not replac e the need to check tyres
sensors and the tyres m ust be filled to the                                                                If it lights while driving , tyre pressure
                                                     manually using a suitable pressure                     differences are ind icated by an a rrow
correct pressure. The ty re pressure control         gauge.
system detects automatically if the vehicle                                                                 pointing to the ty res in question.
is driven with a tyre pressure correct for a         C heck ty re pressures no less tha n every             If d isplay is yellow
load of up to 3 persons or for a full load.          14 days and p rior to any long journey .               the loss of pressure is minor, continue
                                                     Tyre pressures should be check ed when
O nce the ignition is switched on, the sy stem                                                              driving a t reduced speed. C heck tyre
                                                     cold. Don’t forget to check the spare.
is operational and w ill continuously                                                                       pressure at next opportunity using suitab le
monitor the tyre pressures at speeds of                                                                     tyre pressure gauge, and correct the
                                                    Ty re p ressures – see pages 184, 268.
approx. 20 m ph (30 km /h) and a bove.                                                                      pressure as required.
                                                    Control i nd icator w for system fault
                                                                                                            If d isplay is red
                                                    show n in tachom et er d isplay
                                                                                                            ma jor d ifference in pressure or complete
                                                    If it lig hts w hile driving, there is a fault in the
                                                                                                            loss of pressure! Stop imm ediately and
                                                    sy stem. Ha ve the cause of the fault
                                                                                                            check tyre. If necessary, fit spare ty re – see
                                                    rectified. We recommend tha t you consult
                                                                                                            pag es 205, 208.
                                                    a Vaux hall Authorised Repairer. The
                                                    sy stem’s integrated self-diagnostics allows
                                                    fa ults to be quickly remedied.
                                                    If a wheel without pressure sensor (e.g.
                                                    spare wheel) is mounted, w is displayed.


176
Displays in grap hical inform ation d isp lay
3 or colour informa tion displ ay 3
In version with c heck control 3 differing air
pressures a re displayed in m essa ges in the
inform ation d isplay whilst d riv ing
(Fig. 13356 J shows colour informa tion
display, Fig. 13357 J shows graphical
inform ation d isplay ).




                                                 For example, the following m essa ges can                          Att ent ion!
                                                 be d isplay ed:                                           Rea r left tyre p ressure loss
                                                        C hec k rear left t yre pressure           At the sam e time a diagram is show n
                                                                                                   identify ing the rear left tyre and listing the
                                                 At the same time a diagram is shown
                                                                                                   tyre pressure: m ajor difference in pressure
                                                 identifying the rear left ty re and listing the
                                                                                                   or comp lete loss of pressure! S top
                                                 tyre p ressure: the loss of pressure is minor,
                                                                                                   imm ediately and c heck ty re. If necessary,
                                                 continue driv ing at red uc ed speed. Chec k
                                                                                                   fit spare tyre – see pages 205, 208.
                                                 tyre p ressure at nex t opportunity using
                                                 suitable tyre pressure gauge, and correc t        O n the colour informa tion display this
                                                 the pressure as required.                         report will appear in red.
                                                 On the colour information disp la y this          Acknowledgem ent of warnings – see
                                                 report will app ear in y ellow.                   pag e 42.

                                                                                                                                                 6




                                                                                                                                              177
Genera l informa tion                                Vehicles with the tyre pressure control
The spare wheel is not fitted with a                 sy stem can be recognised by metal ty re
pressure sensor. When the spare wheel is             valve stems with aluminium valv e cap s
fitted, the tyre pressure control sy stem will       instead of conv entiona l rubb er shafts with
not operate on this w heel, and the c ontrol         plastic valve caps. When m anually
indicator w will light up. The sy stem               checking ty re pressure w ith p ressure
rem ains operational for the other three             gauge, screw ada pter to v alve. Tyre
wheels.                                              pressure – see page 184.
If a complete set of wheels not fitted with          The tyre pressure monitoring system valve
sensors for the tyre pressure control sy stem        cores and sealing rings must be replaced
is used, e. g. four w heels with winter ty res, or   each time the tyres are changed. We
if retro-fitting a different size of tyre, no        recommend that you contact a Vaux hall
fault report will b e display ed. The system         Authorised Repairer.
will not be operational. Sensors for the tyre        The use of liquid filled run-flat systems or
pressure control sy stem can b e fitted              repair kits can impair the functioning of the
retrospectively if so desired. We                    sy stem.
recom mend that y ou consult a Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.




178
                                                During travel, the vehicle is automatically
                                                ra ised at the rear, increasing the spring
                                                tra vel a nd ground clearance.
                                                The Autom atic Level Control Sy stem is
                                                activated after ap prox . 2 miles
                                                (3 k ilometres), depending on the vehicle
                                                loa ding and the nature of the road surface.
                                                Head lig ht range adjustment – see
                                                page 117.
                                                In the event of m alfunctions, do not utilise
                                                the vehicle’s full load capa city. H ave the
                                                cause rem edied without delay . We
                                                recommend that you consult a Va ux ha ll
                                                Authorised Repairer.
Autom atic L evel Control System3
The Automa tic Lev el Control Sy stem a llows
the v ehicle height to be kept practically
constant thus significantly imp rov ing the
handling when the rear of the vehicle is
sub jected to varying loads – such as when
towing a ca ravan / trailer.




                                                                                                179
Brakes




Brake s yste m                                  Control i nd icator F for brak e pad w ea r       Foot bra ke
The effectiveness of the brakes is a n          If it lights when the engine is running : front   The foot brak e comprises two independent
                                                disc brake pads worn down to minimum              brak e circuits.
important factor for traffic safety.
                                                thick ness.
To improve effectiveness, do not b ra ke                                                          If a brak e circuit fails, the vehicle can still be
                                                Have worn brake pads replaced. We                 brak ed using the other brak e circuit. If this
unnecessarily hard for the first 125 miles
(200 km) after new brake pads have been         recommend that you consult a Va ux ha ll          occurs, howev er, the brake pedal must be
                                                Authorised Repairer, who will fit pads that       depressed q uite far using considerab le
fitted.
                                                ha ve b een tested a nd approved by               force before braking effect occurs. The
Brake pad wear must not exceed a                Vauxhall and guarantee optimum braking            distance required for b ra king will be
specified limit. Regular maintenance as         power.                                            greater. Consult a work shop before
detailed in the Service Book let is therefore                                                     continuing your journey. We recommend a
of the utmost importance for traffic safety.                                                      Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.




180
To ensure that full pedal travel can be
utilised, especially if there is a fault in one
of the brak e circuits, there must b e no mats
in the p edal area.
When the engine is not running, the
assistance of the brake servo unit
disappears once the brake ped al has been
depressed once or twice. Braking effect is
not reduced, b ut b ra king requires
significantly greater force. This is especially
important to bear in mind when towing.
Check the brake lights b efore starting out
on a journey. On v ehicles with check
control 3 the brake lights are check ed
automatically – see page 46.
                                                   Handbra ke                                     Brak e system control indicat or R
Shortly after starting each journey the
                                                   Alw ays apply handb ra ke firmly . On slopes   The control indicator lights when the
effectiveness of the b ra ke system should
                                                   apply the handb ra ke as firmly as possible.   ignition is switched on, if the handbrak e is
be tested at low speed and without
                                                                                                  app lied or if the b ra ke or clutch fluid level is
inconv eniencing other tra ffic, especia lly if    The mechanic al handbrake acts on the
                                                                                                  too low. B ra ke fluid level – see page 240.
the b ra kes are wet, e. g. after the vehicle      brakes on the rear wheels. It engages
has been washed.                                   autom atic ally when applied.                   If the control indicator lights w hen the
The b ra ke fluid level should be check ed         To release the handbrake pull the lev er up     ha nd brake is not applied: Stop. Interrupt
reg ularly . If the brake fluid level is too low   slightly, press the ratchet knob , and fully    your journey immediately . C onsult a
and the hand brake is not ap plied, control        low er the lever.                               workshop. We rec om mend a Vaux hall
indicator R on the instrum ent panel lights                                                        Authorised Repairer.
up – see page 34.




                                                                                                                                                 181
ABS u                                            AB S control is m ade apparent though a
                                                                                               For optimum braking, keep the brak e
The Anti-lock Brak e S ystem (ABS )              pulse in the brak e pedal a nd the noise of
                                                                                               peda l fully dep ressed throughout the
continuously monitors the vehicle’s brake        the reg ulation process.
                                                                                               braking process, despite the fact that
system a nd prevents the wheels from                                                           the peda l is p ulsating. Do not reduce the
locking regardless of the road c ondition                                                      pressure on the pedal.
and ty re grip.
                                                                                               Do not let this special safety feature
It starts to regulate the braking p ressure as                                                 tempt y ou into taking risks when driving.
soon as a w heel shows a tendency to lock.
The v ehicle remains steera ble, even in the                                                   Tra ffic safety can only b e ac hieved by
event of very heavy braking, for instance                                                      adopting a responsible d riv ing sty le.
on bends or when sw erving to av oid an
obstacle. Even in the ca se of full-on
braking, the ABS makes it p ossible to drive
round an obsta cle without releasing the
brakes.




182
                                                                                              Hav e c ause of fault remedied. We
                                               If there is a fault in ABS , the wheels may    recommend that you consult a Vauxhall
                                               be subjec t to locking d ue to brak ing that   Authorised Repa irer. The sy stem’s
                                               is heavier tha n normal. The adva ntages       integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to
                                               of ABS are no longer op erational. The         be quickly remedied .
                                               vehicle ca n no longer be steered and
                                               may swerve.

                                              You can continue driving, prov ided you
                                              drive with care a nd antic ipation.




Cont rol indica tor u for ABS
If illuminates for several seconds when the
ignition is switched on and the system
undergoes a self-check at the same time
(may be audible). The system is ready
for operation when the control indica tor
goes off.
If the control indicator does not g o out
after a few second s, or if it lights while
driving, there is a fault in the ABS. The
brake system remains operational without
ABS regulation.




                                                                                                                                      183
Wheels, tyres                               Changing tyre / wheel type
                                            Before switching to different tyres or
                                                                                           Fitti ng new tyr es
                                                                                           Fit tyres in pa irs or in sets, which is even
                                            wheels, seek advice on technical               better. Ensure tha t tyres on one axle are
                                            possibilities. We recommend that you           z the same siz e,
                                            consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer,        z the same design,
                                            who will be able to advise y ou of any         z the same make,
                                            necessary mod ifications. If tyres of a size   z and have the same tread pattern.
                                            different than those fitted a t the factory
                                            are used, the electronic speedometer may       Fit directional tyres such that they roll in the
                                            require reprogramming to ensure tha t the      direction of trav el. The rolling direction is
                                            correct speed is displayed.                    indicated by a symbol (e.g. an arrow) on
                                                                                           the sidewall.
                                             Use of unsuitab le tyres or wheels m ay
                                             lead to accidents and render the vehicle      Tyres fitted opposing the rolling direction
                                             unroa d-worthy .                              (e.g. when a tyre is changed) should be
                                                                                           refitted as soon as possible. This is the only
Tyres                                       Vehicles with                                  way to obtain full benefit from the design
See page 268 for suitable tyres a nd        Ty re Pressure C ontrol S ystem 3              properties of the tyre.
restrictions.                               When using winter ty res or you change to
                                            other tyre sizes, tyre pressure control         We recom mend that you consult a
Factory -fitted tyres are m atched to the                                                   Vauxhall Authorised Repairer to hav e
                                            sy stem sensors can b e retro-fitted if
chassis and offer optimum driving comfort                                                   the tyres replaced. A Vauxhall
                                            required. We recommend tha t you consult
and safety .                                                                                Authorised Repairer k nows the legal
                                            a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. O therwise
                                            the system w ill not indicate tyre pressure     regulations concerning the disposal of
                                            differences.                                    tyres and therefore protects the
                                                                                            environment and your health.
                                            Ty re p ressure control system 3 – see
                                            page 176.
                                                                                           Tyre inflation pressure
                                                                                           C heck ty re pressures, including the spare
                                                                                           wheel, a t least every 14 da ys and prior to
                                                                                           any long journey ; the ty res should b e
                                                                                           checked when cold. Don’ t forget to chec k
                                                                                           the spare.




184
Use the valve cap key to mak e it easier to    After having chec ked the tyre pressures,         Tyre condition, wheel condition
unscrew the v alve c aps. The key is located   tig hten the va lv e ca ps using the v alve cap   Drive over edges slowly and at a right
on the inside of the tank flap. On vehicles    key .                                             angle if possible. Driv ing ov er sharp edg es
with Tyre pressure control sy stem 3, there                                                      can lead to hidd en ty re damage and wheel
                                               Incorrect infla tion pressures will imp air
is an adapter in the v alve cap k ey. For                                                        dam age which is only noticed later on.
                                               safety, v ehicle handling, comfort and fuel
fitting the pressure ga uge ada pter to the    economy and will increase tyre wear.              When p arking, ensure that the tyres are not
valv e – see page 176.
                                               If the pressure is too low, this can result in    pressed against the edge of the kerb.
Tyre inflation pressures – see page 268 and    considera ble ty re warm -up and internal         C heck ty res regularly for d amage (foreign
label on inside of tank flap. After changing   damage, leading to trea d separation and          bodies, punctures, cuts, cracks, bulges in
tyre siz es, have the la bel replaced.         even to tyre blow-out at high sp eeds.            sidewa lls). C heck wheels for dam age. In
Do not reduce tyre pressure when the ty res                                                      the event of damag e or ab normal wear,
                                               Hidden ty re d amage is not eliminated by
are warm. Otherwise the pressure m ay                                                            consult a workshop. We recommend a
                                               subsequently adjusting the inflation
drop below the permissible minim um when                                                         Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
                                               pressure.
the ty res cool down.
                                                Incorrect ty re pressure may result in tyre       Damage may lead to tyre blow-out.
                                                blow-out.




                                                                                                                                           185
                                                                                               z Never fit used tyres the previous history
                                                                                                 and use of which you do not k now.
                                                                                               z So as not to impair b ra ke cooling, use
                                                                                                 only wheel trims approved for use on
                                                                                                 your vehicle.
                                                                                               Tyre d esigna tions
                                                                                               Meaning s:
                                                                                               e.g. 195/65 R 15 91 H
                                                                                               195 = Tyre width in mm
                                                                                               65 = Aspect ratio
                                                                                                     (ty re height to tyre width) in %
                                                                                               R   = Belt ty pe: Radial
                                                                                               15 = Rim diam eter in inches
                                                                                               91 = Load ind ex
Tread dept h                                   The leg ally permissible minimum trea d               e.g .: 91 represents 618 kg
Check tread depth regularly. If the front      depth (1.6 mm) has been reached when            H = Speed cod e
tyres show greater wear than the rear          the tread has worn down as far as one of        S peed code letters:
tyres, swa p the front wheels with the rea r   the wear indicators (TWI1 )). A number of
wheels so that the tyres with deep er tread    wear indicators are sp aced at eq ual           Q   Up   to 100   mph   (160   km /h)
are on the front axle.                         intervals around the tyre within the trea d.    S   Up   to 112   mph   (180   km /h)
                                               Their position is indicated by m arkings on     T   Up   to 118   mph   (190   km /h)
For reasons of safety, tyres should be                                                         H   Up   to 130   mph   (210   km /h)
rep la ced when their tread depth has worn     the tyre sid ewall.
                                                                                               V   Up   to 150   mph   (240   km /h)
down to 2 to 3 mm (winter tyres: 4 mm).        General i nformati on                           W   Up   to 168   mph   (270   km /h)
                                               z The danger of aq uap laning is greater if
                                                 the ty res are worn.
                                               z Tyres age, even if they a re used only very
                                                 little or not at all. A spare wheel which
                                                 has not b een used for six years should be
                                                 used w ith ca re.




                                               1)
                                                    TWI = T rea d We a r Ind icator.

186
Winter tyre s                                                                                          Wheel trim on steel wheels could come into
For notes on fitting new tyres – see                                                                   contact with parts of the cha ins and b e
page 184.                                                                                              dam aged . Remove the wheel trim – see
                                                                                                       pag e 209.
See page 268 for restric tions.
                                                                                                       Tyre cha ins may only be used at sp eeds up
Winter tyres (M+ S tyres) im prove safety at                                                           to 30 mph (50 km/h) 1 ). When driving on
tem peratures below 7 °C and should                                                                    roads that are free of snow, they may only
therefore be fitted on all the wheels.                                                                 be used for brief periods since they are
The d esign of summ er tyres mea ns they                                                               subject to rap id wea r on ha rd roads and
have limited qualities for winter driving.                                                             could snap.
If the maxim um perm issible speed for the                                                             Tempora ry w heel 3
winter ty res is less than that of the vehicle,                                                        Tyre chains must not be used on the
a notice ind icating the ma ximum                                                                      temporary spare wheel. If y ou need to use
permissible speed for the tyres must be                                                                tyre chains after suffering a flat front tyre,
affixed within the driver’s field of v ision 1).                                                       fit the temporary spa re on the rear ax le
If y ou use the spare wheel when it is fitted          Tyre chains                                     and transfer one of the rea r wheels to the
                                                       See pag e 268 for restrictions.                 front axle.
with a summer tyre, the v ehicle’ s
driveability may be affected, espec ia lly on          Ty re chains are only p ermitted on the front   Wheel changing – see pag e 208.
slip pery roa d surfaces. Ob ta in a                   drive wheels.                                   Adjust tyre infla tion pressure. Tyre pressure
rep la cement for the faulty ty re as soon a s
                                                       Alw ays use fine mesh chains that add no        control sy stem 3 – see page 176.
possible, and hav e the wheel balanced
                                                       more than 15 m m to the ty re tread and the
and fitted to the v ehicle.
                                                       inboard sides (including chain lock).
                                                       We rec om mend that you consult a
                                                       Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.




1)
     Va ries fro m country to country o n account of
     nationa l regula tions .


                                                                                                                                                 187
Roof racks, caravan
and trailer towing




 Disreg ard of these notes ca n lead to    Version wit hout roof rail ing                   Versi on with roof ra iling 3
 injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle      Lift the covers from the fitting openings.       Attach roof rack to roof railing at p oints
 passengers should be informed                                                              show n in figure, see enclosed roof luggage
                                           Attac h roof rack a t app ropriate points, see
 according ly .                                                                             rack sy stem instructions.
                                           enclosed roof luggage rack system
                                           instructions.
Roof racks 3
For reasons of safety and to avoid
dam aging the roof, we rec om mend that
you use the Va ux ha ll roof rack system
approved for your vehicle. Consult a
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Driving hints – see page 158.




188
Towing equipment 3
If the vehicle is not equipped with towing
equipm ent, w e recommend having it
retro-fitted by a Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer, who will provide information
about possible trailer load inc reases. The
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer ha s
instructions on how to install the towing
equipm ent and any modifications that are
req uired to the vehicle tha t affect the
cooling sy stem or other equipment.

 The coupling ba ll bar should be removed
 or folded awa y when not in use.

For installation dimensions of the tra iler
towing equip m ent – see pages 278, 279,      Fit ting the coupl ing bal l bar              C hecking the tensioning of the coupling
280.                                          Push ends of closure plugs together and       ball bar:
                                              pull out of opening for coupling b all bar.   z Red marking on turn knob points
Towing equipment with rem ovable              Stow the closure p lugs in the lug gage          tow ards green marking on coupling
coupling ball bar 3 ,                         compartment.                                     ball bar.
Ve rsion with turn knob 3
                                                                                            z Gap of approx . 6 millimetres between
Stow age of coupl ing bal l bar
                                                                                              rotary knob and c oupling b all bar.
The c oupling ba ll bar is stowed in a bag
stra pped to the spare wheel – see                                                          z Key is in lock.
page 195.




                                                                                                                                   189
O therwise, the coup ling ball bar m ust be        Inserting the coupling ball ba r:             O pen coupling ba ll bar. Remove key and
tensioned before it is inserted into the           Insert the coupling ball b ar into the        put on provided protectiv e c lip .
coupling housing:                                  coupling housing and press the coupling       When the coup ling ball bar is locked the
z Open coup ling ball bar,                         ball bar firmly upwards until it engages in   turn knob can no longer be p ulled out.
z Pull turn knob out and then turn it              position.
  cloc kwise as far as it will g o – see figure.   The turn knob snap s b ack into its hom e
                                                   position resting against the coupling
                                                   ball bar.

                                                    Do not touch the turn knob when
                                                    inserting the coupling ball bar - risk of
                                                    injury .




190
Im portant
Check that the coup ling ball bar is correctly
attached :
z Red m arking on turn knob points
  towa rd s w hite marking on coupling
  ball bar.
z No g ap between turn knob a nd coupling
  ball bar.
z Coupling ball bar must be seated firmly
  in c oupling housing.
z Coupling ball bar must be locked and
  key must be removed.

 Towing a caravan / trailer is only
 permitted with a properly attached              Di sm ounting the coupl ing bal l bar          Towing e quipme nt with re movable
 coupling ball bar. If the coupling b all ba r   Close coupling ball b ar.                      coupling ball bar 3,
 cannot be properly attached, consult a                                                         version with levers 3
                                                 Pull the turn k nob out a nd then turn it
 work shop. We recom mend that y ou
                                                 cloc kwise as far as it will go. Pull the      St owage of coup ling ba ll bar
 consult a Vauxhall Authorised R epairer.
                                                 coupling b all bar downwards out of the        The coupling b all bar is stow ed in a bag
                                                 coupling housing and stow it in the            strapped to the spare wheel – see
                                                 lugg age compartment – see page 195,           pag e 195.
                                                 Fig. 14086 J .                                 Fitti ng the coupling b all b ar
                                                 Insert the sealing p lug in the hole for the   Removing the cover from the bumper
                                                 coupling b all bar.                            cut-out: push the two slider ca tches
                                                                                                towards each other and remove the cover
                                                 Do not use steam-jet cleaners or other         downwards.
                                                 high-pressure cleaners to clean the
                                                 coupling b all bar.




                                                                                                                                        191
Remove the sealing plug from the hole for      Check ing the tensioning of the coupling          Inserting the coupling b all bar:
the c oupling ba ll bar. S tow both parts in   ball bar:                                         Insert the coup ling ball bar into the
the lugga ge c om partment.                    Lever 1 m ust not protrude from the               coupling housing by apply ing slight
                                               housing.                                          pressure and allow it to engage in position.
                                                                                                 It will loc k automatically and loud ly.
                                               Otherwise, the coupling ball bar must be
                                               tensioned before it is inserted into the          Fit the protective c ap to levers 1 and 2 and
                                               coupling housing:                                 eng age. If it does not engage, re-tension
                                               Push lever 1 to the left with left hand, at the   the coupling ball bar and repeat the fitting
                                               sam e time pushing lever 2 forwa rd s – see       procedure. I f necessary, consult a
                                               diagram.                                          workshop. We recommend a Vauxhall
                                                                                                 Authorised Repa irer.




192
                                                Imp or tant
                                                Check that the coupling ball bar is correctly
                                                attached:
                                                z Protective cap for levers 1 and 2 m ust be
                                                  fitted and locked in place.
                                                z C oupling ba ll bar must be seated firm ly
                                                  in coupling housing.
                                                z C oupling ba ll bar must be locked and
                                                  key m ust be rem oved.

                                                 Towing a c aravan / trailer is only
                                                 permitted w ith a properly attached
                                                 coupling b all bar. If the coup ling ball bar
                                                 cannot be properly attached, consult a
                                                 workshop . We recommend that you
Insert the key in the lock cylinder on the                                                       Remove the protective c ap for lev ers 1
                                                 consult a Vaux hall Authorised Repairer.
left-hand side of the coupling ball ba r a nd                                                    and 2.
lock. The longer side of the key g rip must     Di sm ounting the coupl ing bal l bar            Push lever 1 to the left with left hand.
point downwards. Remove the key and fit         Remove the sealing cap from the lock
the sealing cap to the lock cy linder.                                                           Push lever 2 forwards.
                                                cylinder. Insert the key in the lock cy linder
                                                and unlock . Remove the key a nd fit the         Pull coupling ball bar out of coupling
                                                sealing cap to the lock cy linder.               housing.
                                                                                                 Insert the sealing plug in the hole for the
                                                                                                 coupling ball b ar.
                                                                                                 Fitting the cover for the bumper cut-out:
                                                                                                 Push the two slider ca tc hes tow ards each
                                                                                                 other, insert the cover and slide the catches
                                                                                                 bac k outwards.
                                                                                                 Do not use steam -jet cleaners or other
                                                                                                 high-pressure clea ners to clean the
                                                                                                 coupling ball b ar.




                                                                                                                                            193
Towing equipment with pivoting             Push the release lever down; the LED           Pivot the coup ling ball bar rearwards until
coupling ball bar 3                        remains lit as long as the coupling ball bar   it engages. The LED must go out and the
Folding out the c oup ling b all ba r      is not eng aged. A warning buzzer also         warning buzzer must cea se, otherwise
The release lever is in the stowage        sounds and the coupling ba ll bar pivots       repeat the proced ure.
compartment to the left in the luggage     down.                                          I mporta nt
compartment.                                                                              C heck tha t the coupling ball bar is correctly
                                            Mak e sure that no one is in the pivot
To open the stowa ge c om partment, push                                                  attached:
                                            zone of the coupling ball ba r. Risk of
both latches down and open the cover.       bodily injury.                                z LED is not lit
                                                                                          z No warning buzzer

                                                                                           Tow ing is only permissible if the coupling
                                                                                           ball bar is fitted properly. I f the coup ling
                                                                                           ball bar d oes not engage correctly , the
                                                                                           LED does not go out or the warning
                                                                                           buzzer does not stop sound ing, consult a
                                                                                           workshop. We rec om mend a Vaux hall
                                                                                           Authorised Repairer.




194
                                                                                                  Caravan and trailer loads1)
                                                                                                  The permissib le carav an / tra iler loads are
                                                                                                  vehicle d epend ent and engine dependent
                                                                                                  ma ximum v alues which must not be
                                                                                                  exceeded. The actua l carav an / trailer load
                                                                                                  is the d ifference between the actual gross
                                                                                                  weight of the carav an / tra iler and the
                                                                                                  actual c oupling socket load with the
                                                                                                  carav an / tra iler attached . When the
                                                                                                  carav an / tra iler load is being check ed,
                                                                                                  therefore, only the caravan / trailer wheels
                                                                                                  – and not the jockey wheel – must be
                                                                                                  standing on the weighing apparatus.
                                                                                                  The permissib le carav an / tra iler loads for
                                                                                                  y our v ehicle are giv en in the vehicle
Stow ing the coupl ing bal l bar                  Stow ing the removable coupling                 documents. Unless otherwise stated, they
O pen the stowage compa rtm ent – see             ball bar 3                                      are valid for g ra dients up to max . 12 %.
page 205.                                         Stow the coupling b all bar in the bag and
Push the release lev er down; the LED             strap it to the spare w heel a s shown in the
rem ains lit as long a s the coupling ball b ar   figure.
is not engaged. A warning buz zer a lso
sounds and the coupling ball bar p ivots
down.
Pivot the coupling ball bar to the right and
up. The LED must go out and the warning
buzzer must cease, otherwise repeat the
proced ure.




                                                                                                  1)
                                                                                                       Ob serve n atio nal regula tions.


                                                                                                                                             195
The p ermissible carav an / trailer load         Coupling socke t load
should b e fully utilised only b y drivers who   The coupling sock et load is the load
are adequa tely experienced in towing            exerted by the caravan / trailer on the
large or heavy carav ans / trailers.             coupling ball. It can be varied b y chang ing
The p ermissible carav an / trailer load         the weight distribution when loading the
applies up to the specified incline and up to    caravan / trailer.
an altitude of 1000 m etres above sea level.     The max im um perm issible coupling sock et
Since engine power decreases as altitude         loa d (78 kg ) is specified on the towing
increases because of the air becom ing           equipment identification plate and in the
thinner, therefore reducing climbing ability,    vehicle documents. Alway s a im for the
the p ermitted towing weig ht a lso              maximum loa d, especially in the case of
decreases by 10 % for every 1000 metres of       heavy caravans / trailers. The coupling
additional altitude. The towing weight           socket load should never fall below
does not have to be reduced when driv ing        25 kg.
on roads with slight inclines (less than 8 %,
e.g. m otorway s).                               When m easuring the coupling sock et load,
                                                 make sure that the draw bar of the loaded         Tyre inflation pressure
The ac tual ca ra van / trailer load plus the    caravan / trailer is at the same height as it     Increase tyre pressure on the towing
actual gross vehicle weight must not             will be when the c aravan / trailer is coupled    vehicle to the value specified for the loa d –
ex ceed the m aximum permitted towing            with the towing v ehicle loaded. Particularly     see page 268. Also check the tyre inflation
weig ht. For exam ple, if the perm itted gross   important for c aravans / trailers w ith          pressure on the caravan / trailer wheels
vehicle weight is utilised, the caravan /        tand em axle.                                     and the spare w heel.
trailer load m ust only be used until the
max imum perm itted towing weight is             Re ar axle load during towing
reac hed. The maximum permitted towing           When the carav an / trailer is coup led a nd
weig ht is shown on the identifica tion plate    the towing vehic le fully loaded (including
– see pag e 250.                                 all occupants), the perm issible rear ax le
                                                 loa d (see identification plate or v ehicle
                                                 docum ents) may be exceeded by 40 kg
                                                 (90 lbs). If the permissib le rear axle load is
                                                 exc eeded, a max imum speed of 60 mph
                                                 (100 km/h) a pplies. If national regula tions
                                                 specify a low er ma ximum speed for
                                                 vehicles towing a caravan / trailer, this
                                                 must b e observ ed.




196
Driving characteristics, towing tips               Check caravan / trailer lighting b efore             Diesel engine: On rising gradients of 10 %
Before attaching the ca ra van / trailer,          starting to drive. The fog tail lights on the        or more, do not drive faster than 20 mph
lubricate the ball of the caravan / trailer        vehicle are deactiv ated w hen towing a              (30 km/h) in 1st gea r or 30 mp h (50 km/h)
towing device. However, do not do so if a          caravan or trailer.                                  in 2nd gear; with automatic transmission
stabiliser, which acts on the coupling ba ll,                                                           3 , do not ex ceed 25 mph (40 km/h) in
                                                   Do not d riv e faster than 50 mph (80 k m/h)
is being used to damp hunting.                                                                          position 1.
                                                   if possible, ev en in countries where hig her
Handling is greatly influenced by the              speeds are permitted.                                The brakes are heav ily loaded when
loading of the caravan / trailer. Loads                                                                 towing a caravan / trailer d ow n long
                                                   Make sure that you have enough room
should therefore be secured so that they                                                                gradients, so select the sam e gear as y ou
                                                   when cornering and a void sud den
cannot slip and be placed in the c entre of                                                             would driving uphill and drive at roug hly
                                                   manoeuvres.
the c aravan / trailer if possib le, i. e. above                                                        the sam e speed. The automatic
                                                   If the carav an / trailer starts to swa y, driv e    transmission 3 or C VTronic 3 w ill
the a xle.
                                                   more slowly, d o not a ttempt to correct the         automatically select the driving
When pulling trailers whose stability on the       steering and b ra ke sharply if necessary.           programm e w ith the optimum eng ine
road is low, and caravans whose perm itted                                                              brak ing effect.
total weight exc eeds 1400 k g, speeds             The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its
                                                   cooling p ow er is therefore independent of          If necessary, the gears can a lso be selec ted
should b e kept below 50 mph (80 k m/h);
the use of an anti-hunting damper is               the engine speed.                                    ma nually.
emphatically recommend ed.                         Since a considerable amount of heat is               If it is necessary to apply the brak es fully ,
                                                   genera ted at high engine speeds and less            depress the brak e pedal a s hard as
                                                   at slower speeds, do not shift d ow n when           possible.
                                                   climbing hills whilst the v ehicle is still coping
                                                                                                        Remem ber that the braking d istance for
                                                   with the gradient in the higher g ear.
                                                                                                        vehicles towing carava ns / trailers w ith and
                                                                                                        without brake is always greater than that
                                                                                                        for vehic les not tow ing a carav an / trailer.




                                                                                                                                                    197
                                                 In vehicles with autom atic transmission 3
                                                 or CVTronic 3 , use full throttle.
                                                 Before starting off under extreme
                                                 conditions (high c om bination w eight,
                                                 mountainous terrain with steep inc lines),
                                                 switch off all unnecessary elec trica l loa ds
                                                 (e.g. heated rear wind ow , air conditioning
                                                 sy stem 3, heated seats 3).




Starting on inclines
Vehicles with ma nual transmission:
The m ost favourable engine sp eed when
starting off on an incline is b etween 2500
and 3000 rpm for p etrol engines a nd
between 2000 and 2200 rpm for diesel
engines. Hold engine rpm c onstant,
enga ge c lutch grad ually (let slip), release
brake and open throttle. If possib le, the
engine sp eed should not drop d uring this
proced ure.




198
Self-help                                Diesel fuel system, ble eding
                                         Nev er let the tank run dry ! If c ontrol
                                                                                               Do not start with quick charge r
                                                                                               This prevents d amage to electronic
                                         indica tor Y lights up, refuel as soon as             components.
                                         possible. Refuel immediately if it fla shes.
                                         It is p ossib le to restart the engine if the ta nk   Do not start by pushing or towing
                                         ha s b een run dry . A delayed start is to be         Because your vehicle is fitted with a
                                         exp ected. Attempt to start the engine for a          cataly tic converter, it must not be started
                                         maximum of 60 sec onds. If the eng ine d oes          by pushing or towing.
                                         not sta rt, wa it a few minutes and try aga in.




Disreg ard of these notes ca n lead to
injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle
passengers should be informed
according ly .




                                                                                                                                        199
Starting the engine with jump leads 3
A vehicle with a discharged battery can be
started using jump lead s and the battery of
another vehicle.

 This must be done with extrem e ca re.
 Any dev iation from the following
 instruc tions c ould lea d to personal injury
 or damage resulting from battery
 explosion, as well as to damage to the
 elec trical sy stems in both vehicles.




                                                 z Never ex pose the b attery to nak ed           z Do not disconnect the discharged
                                                   flames or spark s.                               battery from the vehicle.
                                                 z Do not allow battery fluid to come into        z Switch off all unnecessary electrical
                                                   contact with eyes, skin, fa bric s or            consumers.
                                                   painted surfaces. The fluid contains           z Do not lean over the ba ttery during jump
                                                   sulp huric ac id which can cause injuries        starting.
                                                   and d amage in the event of d irect
                                                   contact.                                       z Do not allow the terminals of one lead to
                                                                                                    touch those of the other lead .
                                                 z Wear eye protec tion and protective
                                                   clothing when handling a b attery.             z Apply handbrak e. Transmission in
                                                                                                    neutral, automatic transmission 3 or
                                                 z Mak e sure that the battery p rov id ing the     CVTronic 3 in P.
                                                   jump start has the same voltage as the
                                                   battery in your vehicle (12 V). Its            The battery is in a box at the front of the
                                                   capa city (Ah) must not be substantially       eng ine compartm ent, on the right-hand
                                                   lower than that of the discha rg ed            side as v iewed from the front. To open the
                                                   battery. The voltage and capa city are         box , pull the c ov er forwards and swing it
                                                   stated on the battery .                        upwards.




200
                                                z Do not connect leads to negative         z The eng ine of the v ehicle prov iding the
                                                  term inal of discharged battery!           jum p sta rt can be allowed to run d uring
                                                                                             starting. Attempts to start the engine of
                                                z The connection p oint should be as far
                                                                                             the vehicle with the disc ha rg ed b attery
                                                  away from the discharged battery as
                                                                                             should be made at interv als of one
                                                  possible.
                                                                                             minute and should not la st longer tha n
                                                z Route the lead s so that they cannot       15 seconds. After starting, allow both
                                                  catch on rotating parts in the engine      engines to idle for approx. 3 minutes w ith
                                                  compa rtm ent.                             the leads still connected.
                                                                                           z In order to a void ex cess voltage in the
                                                                                             electric al sy stem, b efore removing a
                                                                                             lead, sw itc h on a n electrica l consumer
                                                                                             (e.g. light, heated rear window) in the
                                                                                             vehicle receiving the jump sta rt.
                                                                                           z Reverse abov e seq uence exac tly when
Connect the lea ds in the order shown in the                                                 removing leads.
figure:
1. Connect one end of the first jump lead to
   the positiv e terminal 1 of the battery
   prov iding the jump start (identified by
   "+" sign on battery case or terminal).
2. Connect the other end of this lea d to the
   positive terminal 2 of the discharged
   battery (" +" sign).
3. Connect the first end of the other jump
   lead to the negativ e terminal 3 of the
   battery prov iding the start ("–" sign).
4. Connect the other end of the second
   jump lead 4 to ground on the other
   vehicle, e. g. engine block or screw
   connection in the engine suspension.




                                                                                                                                     201
                                                                                                 Drive slowly . Do not drive jerkily . Excessive
                                                                                                 tractive force c an damage the vehicle.

                                                                                                  Significantly greater force is req uired for
                                                                                                  braking: the brake servo unit is only
                                                                                                  operational when the engine is running .
                                                                                                  Considerably greater steering force is
                                                                                                  necessary since this unit is opera tiv e only
                                                                                                  when the engine is running.

                                                                                                 To prevent the entry of exhaust fum es from
                                                                                                 the tow ing vehicle, switch on the air
                                                                                                 recirc ulation 3 and close the wind ow s.
                                                                                                 Vehicles with automatic tra nsmission 3
                                                                                                 should b e towed facing forw ards only and
Towing the vehicle                              Screw in the towing eye anti-c lock wise as      must not be tow ed faster than 50 mph
To open the cover concealing the towing         fa r as it will go and use the wheel bolt        (80 km/h) or further than 60 miles (100 km).
eye socket at the front right of the vehicle:   wrench to tighten it until it is fully           If the transmission is defective, or if the
disengage the cover a t the bottom by           horizontal. Vehicle tools – see page 208.        abov e speed or distance is to be exceeded,
pressing and pull it off downwards.                                                              the front ax le m ust be raised off the
                                                Attac h the tow rope 3 – or better still a tow
                                                                                                 ground.
The towing eye is located in the                rod 3 – to the eye.
compartment containing the jack and                                                              Vehicles with C VTronic 3, always tow
                                                Switch on ignition to release steering
vehic le tools underneath the spare wheel in                                                     forward, no faster than 15 mph (25 km/h)
                                                colum n lock and to permit opera tion of         and no further than 50 miles (80 k m). If
the lugga ge c om partment. Vehicle jack        brake lights, horn and windscreen wiper.
and tools – see page 208.                                                                        transmission is d amaged or driving a t
                                                Manua l tra nsmission in neutral, automatic      faster speeds or longer distances, lift
                                                tra nsmission 3 or CVTronic 3 in N.              vehicle a t front ax le.
                                                                                                 C onsult a workshop . We recommend a
                                                                                                 Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will
                                                                                                 serve you b est to get your vehicle back on
                                                                                                 the roa d.




202
Towing se rvice
Entrust your vehicle only to the towing
service of your choice and obtain an
estimate on tow ing costs before employing
any towing serv ice. In this w ay y ou a void
unnecessary costs and possible insurance
problem s during c la im processing .




                                                Towing another vehicle                          S crew in the towing ey e anti-clockwise as
                                                To op en the cover c oncealing the towing       far as it will go and use the wheel bolt
                                                eye socket at the rear right of the v ehicle:   wrenc h to tig hten it until it is fully
                                                disengage the cover at the bottom and pull      horizontal. Vehicle tools – see pag e 208.
                                                it off d ow nwa rds.                            Attach the tow rope 3 – or better still a tow
                                                The towing eye is located in the                rod 3 – to the ey e.
                                                compartment containing the ja ck and            Drive slowly . Do not drive jerkily . Excessive
                                                vehicle tools underneath the spare w heel in    tractive force c an damage the vehicle.
                                                the luggage compartment. Vehicle jack
                                                and tools – see page 208.




                                                                                                                                           203
Warning triangle ¨ 3 ,                              First-aid kit + 3,                           To acc ess p ress d ow n bar and open the
Saloon                                              Saloon                                       cover.
The warning triangle is secured to the boot         The first-aid kit / cushion is stowed in a   When loading the vehicle, alwa ys make
lid with reta ining clips (see figure). Slide the   stowage comp artment in the left-hand side   sure the first-aid kit is ac cessible.
triangle up and out of the clips. In some           trim .
editions, the warning triangle is stowed
together with the first-aid kit in a stowage
compartment in the left-hand side trim.




204
Warning triangle ¨ 3 ,                      To op en, press down b oth latc hes in the     Spare whee l
First-aid kit + 3,                          cover a nd open.                               S a loon
Estate                                      When loa ding the vehicle, always ma ke        The spare wheel is located in the luggage
The w arning triangle and first-aid kit /   certain that the warning triangle and first-   compa rtm ent under the floor cov er. It is
cushion are stored in a stowage             aid kit are easily accessible.                 secured with a pla stic wing nut.
compartment in the left-hand side trim.                                                    To open the floor cover, pull up the handle
                                                                                           or strap.




                                                                                                                                   205
Est ate                                     To op en the load floor, pull the release     Disengage the hook 3 located on the
The spare wheel is located in the luggage   lever and lift the load floor c om pletely.   underside of the handle and suspend it
compartment under the load floor. It is                                                   from the up per sea ling edge so that the
secured with a plastic wing nut.                                                          load floor rem ains open.




206
Genera l informa tion                             Notes on tem porary spare wheel 3               z Replac e temporary spare w heel with full
Dep ending on version, the spa re wheel           z Using a temporary spare wheel may               specification wheel without delay.
may take the form of a temp orary sp are            change the driving behaviour of the           z Do not use tyre c hains. If y ou need to use
wheel 3. Refer to the notes on pag es 187,          vehicle, particularly if using winter           tyre cha ins after suffering a flat front
212, 268.                                           tyres 3. Replace defective ty re as quickly     tyre, fit the temporary spare wheel on
                                                    as possible, ba la nce wheel and fit to
O n vehicles w ith a lloy wheels 3 the spare                                                        the rear axle and transfer one of the rear
                                                    vehicle.
wheel may have a steel rim.                                                                         wheels to the front a xle. Chec k the ty re
                                                  z Fit only one temporary spare wheel.             pressure and adjust it if necessary.
If y ou use winter tyres 3, the spare wheel
may still be fitted with a summer tyre. I f you   z Do not drive faster than 50 m ph              z Follow temporary spare wheel
use the spare wheel the vehicle’s ha nd ling        (80 k m/h).                                     instructions on pages 187, 212, 268.
may be altered. O btain a replacement for         z Take bend s slowly.
the faulty tyre a s soon as possible, and
have the wheel b alanc ed a nd fitted to the      z Do not use the temporary spa re wheel
vehic le.                                           for a lengthy period.
The spare wheel may have a smaller tyre
and a smaller rim than the standard tyres:
using the spare w heel may a lter driving
characteristics. Replace a defective ty re as
soon as possible, hav e the wheel balanced
and fitted to the v ehicle.




                                                                                                                                            207
                                                                                           Changing whe els
                                                                                           In order to reduce the cha nce of possible
                                                                                           injuries, mak e the following preparations
                                                                                           and note the procedure:
                                                                                           z Park on a level, firm and non-slippery
                                                                                             surface.
                                                                                           z Switch on hazard warning system and
                                                                                             apply handb ra ke. With automatic
                                                                                             tra nsmission 3 or CVTronic 3 move
                                                                                             selector lever to park position P, and w ith
                                                                                             manual transmission select 1st gear or
                                                                                             reverse gear.
                                                                                           z Correctly set up the warning tria ngle.
                                                                                             Wa rning triangle – see page 204.
Jack £ and ve hicle tools                     After use, stow away the jack and tools in
The jac k and the vehicle tools hav e been    the compartm ent as shown in figure.
specially dev eloped for your vehicle and
must only be used on that vehicle. Only use
jack for changing w heels.
The jac k and the vehicle tools a re in a
stow age com partment in the luggage
compartment beneath the spare wheel.
O pening the floor cover – see
pages 205, 206.




208
z Ta ke the spare w heel from the luggage      z If the ground on which the vehicle is
  com partment.                                  standing is soft, a solid board (max. 1 cm
                                                 thick) should b e pla ced under the jack .
z Before raising the v ehicle, set the front
                                                 Using a thicker b oard c ould dam age the
  wheels to the straight-ahead position.
                                                 jack and the v ehicle.
z Nev er change more than one wheel at
                                               z No people or animals may be in the
  once.
                                                 vehicle when it is jacked up.
z Block the wheel d iagona lly opposite the
                                               z Never crawl under a jacked-up vehic le.
  wheel to be cha nged by placing w edge
  bloc ks or equivalent in front and behind    z Do not start or run the engine while the
  the wheel.                                     vehicle is on the jac k.
z Use the jack only to change wheels.



                                                                                              1. Prise off the wheel cover using the hook
                                                                                                 included with the vehicle tools. Vehicle
                                                                                                 tools – see p age 208.
                                                                                                Anti-theft wheel trims – see page 211.




                                                                                                                                      209
  Alloy wheels 3 : Prise off the wheel b olt   2. Slac ken wheel b olts using a wheel bolt   3. There a re plastic retainers at the front
  caps using a screwdriver and rem ov e           socket wrench, putting socket wrench on       and rea r of the vehic le underbody for
  them.                                           as far as it will g o.                        positioning the jack. The loca tion of each
                                                                                                retainer is indicated by a ma rk on the
                                                                                                bottom ed ge of the vehicle.




210
4. Set the jack to the necessary height by         Attach crank to eye of threaded rod and        7. Screw in wheel bolts and tighten slightly ,
   rotating the ey e of the jack by hand.          turn crank to raise v ehicle.                     inserting the w heel bolt wrenc h as far as
   Position the jack a t the front – or rear –                                                       the stop.
                                                   If this is not the case, carefully lower the
   so that the jack head fits in the plastic       vehicle imm ediately and reposition the          If wheel trims are anti-theft ty pe, first fit
   retainer on the vehicle und erbody.             jack.                                            wheel trim and click it into place. Va lve
   Make sure it is positioned correctly.                                                            sy mbol on bac k of wheel trim must point
                                                 5. Unscrew wheel bolts a nd put somewhere
  The jack b ase must be on the ground                                                              tow ards valve on wheel.
                                                    where the threads will not be soiled.
  directly b elow the jacking point.                                                              8. Lower vehicle.
                                                   If the wheel trims are the anti-theft type
                                                   they will be rem ov ed together with the       9. Tighten wheel bolts c rosswise, p utting on
                                                   wheel bolts.                                      wheel bolt wrench as far a s possib le.
                                                 6. C hange the wheel. For notes on the
                                                                                                                                                6
                                                    spare wheel – see page 205. For notes
                                                    on the temporary spare wheel – see
                                                    page 207.




                                                                                                                                              211
10. Align and refit wheel trim or w heel bolt   11. S tow away replaced wheel, tools and           Electrical sys tem
    caps 3.                                         wa rning triangle in the luggage
                                                    com partment.                                   Electronic ignition system s generate very
   Before refitting the wheel cover clean                                                           hig h voltages. Do not touch the ignition
   the wheel around the retaining clips.        12. H ave the tightening torque of the wheel        sy stem; high voltage can b e fatal.
   Valv e symbol 3 on back of wheel cover           bolts on the new wheel checked on the
   must point towards v alve on wheel.              v ehicle using a torque wrench as soon         Fuses
                                                    as possible and, if nec essary , c orrected.   There are three fuseboxes in the vehicle: in
   Alloy wheels 3: align a nd refit wheel
                                                    Tightening torque – see page 268.              the pa ssenger com partment on the far left
   bolt caps 3.
                                                13. Replace the faulty ty re on the wheel          of the dashboard, in the luggage
                                                    that wa s removed.                             compa rtm ent on the left in the stowage
                                                                                                   compa rtm ent, and in the engine
                                                14. Replace tem pora ry spare wheel 3 with         compa rtm ent front left.
                                                    a full specifica tion wheel w ithout delay.




212
It is adv isable to carry a full set of fuses –   Before replacing a fuse, turn off the          O nly fit fuses of the sp ecified current
ava ilab le from any Va ux ha ll Authorised       respective switch and the ignition.            rating. Each fuse has its current rating
Repairer. Store spare fuses at rear of                                                           written on it, in addition the ratings are
                                                  A defection fuse (Fig. 12892 J) ca n be
fusebox cover on instrument panel. See                                                           colour coded .
                                                  recognised by its melted wire. A new fuse
nex t page for how to open cov er.                should only be installed after the cause of        Fuse                   Fuse
                                                  the fault has been rectified .
                                                                                                     colour                 rating
                                                  There is a fuse extractor on the rear of the       Light brown            5A
                                                  fusebox cover on the instrument panel for
                                                                                                     Brown                  7.5 A
                                                  cha ng ing fuses – see figure above.
                                                                                                     Red                    10 A
                                                                                                     Light blue             15 A
                                                                                                     Y ellow                20 A
                                                                                                     White                  25 A
                                                                                                     Light green            30 A
                                                                                                     O range                40 A
                                                                                                     Dark blue              60 A




                                                                                                                                          213
                                                                                              No. Cir cuit                      Rat ing
                                                                                               10 Control unit
                                                                                                  Steering column module        7.5 A
                                                                                               11 Diagnostics plug            7.5 A
                                                                                               12 Battery overload protection 15 A
                                                                                               13 –                             –
                                                                                               14 –                             –
                                                                                               15 Control unit
                                                                                                  Driver’ s d oor m odule       30 A
                                                                                               16 –                             –
                                                                                               17 Instruments,
                                                                                                  informa tion display          15 A
                                                                                               18 Control unit
Fuses and the most important circuits            Some circuits may be protected by sev eral       Driver’ s d oor m odule       30 A
they protect                                     fuses.
                                                                                               19 –                             –
Fusebox in passenger compa rtment                No. C ircuit                     Rating
The fusebox is on the left, on the outside of                                                  20 Yaw sensor (ESP)              7.5 A
the instrum ent panel. O pen door.                 1 Rad io                       20 A         21 Telematics                    7.5 A
Disengage cover by p ulling firmly and             2 Interior fan, heating,                    22 Ciga rette lighter            30 A
rem ov e.                                            air c onditioning sy stem    7.5 A
                                                                                               23 Interior fan,
Spa re fuses, fuse ex tra ctor – see page 213.     3 S un roof                    20 A            air conditioning system       30 A
                                                   4 –                            –               electronic air conditioning
                                                   5 Door module control unit     7.5 A           system                        40 A
                                                   6 Brake light                  7.5 A        24 –                             –
                                                   7 Body work module control     30 A         25 Heating,
                                                     unit                                         air conditioning system       7.5 A
                                                   8 C ontrol unit                             26 Instruments,
                                                     Front passenger door         30 A            informa tion display          7.5 A
                                                     module
                                                   9 C entral control unit        7.5 A




214
                                                                                              No. C ircuit                      Rat ing
                                                                                               11 Battery voltage,
                                                                                                  termina l 30                  25 A
                                                                                               12 S eat heating , rear left     15 A
                                                                                               13 Towing equipment              20 A
                                                                                               14 Rear window wiper             15 A
                                                                                               15 S eat heating , front left    15 A
                                                                                               16 S eat heating , front right   15 A
                                                                                               17 S eat clim ate control        7.5 A
                                                                                               18 –                             –
                                                                                               19 Twin Audio,                   10 A
                                                                                                  Travel Assistant
Fusebox in lugga ge compa rtment                 Some circuits may be protected by sev eral    20 –                             –
The fusebox is loca ted on the left side of      fuses.                                        21 Anti-theft alarm system       5A
the luggag e compa rtm ent, in the stowage
                                                 No. Circui t                     Rating       22 Ultrasonic sensor,            5A
compartment.                                                                                      anti-theft alarm sy stem
                                                   1 –                            –
Saloon: press the latch down and open the                                                      23 Glass break age sensor
cover.                                             2 –                            –
                                                                                                  (anti-theft alarm system )    7.5 A
Estate: press both latches down and op en          3 Electric seat adjustment     40 A
                                                                                               24 Battery voltage,
the c ov er and interior trim .                    4 Heated rear window           40 A            termina l 30                  25 A
Spa re fuses, fuse ex tra ctor – see page 213.     5 Electric seat adjustment     40 A         25 –                             –
                                                   6 Power windows                30 A         26 Travel Assistant              25 A
                                                   7 Power windows                30 A         27 S eat occupancy               7.5 A
                                                   8 Sea t heating, rear right    15 A            recognition,
                                                                                                  tyre pressure monitoring
                                                   9 Horn,                        15 A
                                                     anti-theft alarm system                      system
                                                                                                  rain sensor,
                                                  10 Fuel pump                    20 A            air c onditioning sy stem
                                                                                               28 Parking d istance sensors     7.5 A
                                                                                               29 –                             –



                                                                                                                                        215
                                                                                              S om e circuits may b e protec ted by several
                                                                                              fuses.
                                                                                              No. C ircuit                        Rat ing
                                                                                                1 Eng ine electronic s,
                                                                                                  transmission electronics        30 A
                                                                                                2 S ta rter                       30 A
                                                                                                3 Horn                            20 A
                                                                                                4 Air conditioning system,
                                                                                                  electronic air conditioning
                                                                                                  system                          10 A
                                                                                                5 Windsc reen w ash system        15 A
                                                                                                6 –                               –

Fusebox in engine compa rtment                 Disenga ge the bar at the front of the cover
The fusebox is in the box a t the front left   of fusebox and swing it upwards.
side of the engine compartment.                Spare fuses, fuse extractor – see p age 213.
 Switch off engine before op ening the
 fusebox in the eng ine compartment, risk
 of injury.

Top op en, disengage front c ov er and op en
from top.




216
                                                                                               No. C ircuit                         Rat ing
                                                                                                    27 –                             –
                                                                                                    28 Tailgate m odule control unit 60 A
                                                                                                    29 ABS                           40 A
                                                                                                    30 Tailgate m odule control unit 60 A
                                                                                                    31 Vehicle interior module
                                                                                                       control unit                 60 A
                                                                                                    32 ABS                           40 A
                                                                                                    33 Vehicle interior module
                                                                                                       control unit                  60 A
                                                                                                    34 Tailgate m odule control unit 60 A
                                                                                                    35 C ooling fan 1 )             30 A
                                                                                                                                    40 A
No. Ci rcuit                                   Rat ing   No. Circui t                 Rating
                                                                                                    36 C ooling fan 1 )             20 A
      7 Central control unit, TC , ESP 20 A               17 –                        –                                             30 A
      8 Front headlights               10 A               18 –                        –                                             40 A
      9 Power steering,                        10 A       19 Head lig ht ra nge       5A            37 –                            –
        Wash jets                                            adjustment,
                                                                                                    38 –                            –
     10 –                                      –             Xenon headlight system   15 A
     11 Wind screen wiper                      30 A       20 –                        –

     12 Wind screen wiper              30 A               21 –                        –
     13 Central control unit, TC , ESP 7.5 A              22 –                        –

     14 Headlight wash sy stem                 30 A       23 Aux ilia ry heating      20 A
     15 Engine control unit 1)                 10 A       24 Battery voltage,
                                                             terminal 30              30 A
     16 ABS                                    7.5 A
                                                          25 Battery voltage,
                                                             terminal 30              30 A
                                                          26 –                        –

1)
      The brake lig hts are o n all the tim e if the                                           1)
      fuse is d efective and the ig nition is                                                        Depen ding on eng in e.
      switched on.


                                                                                                                                            217
Bulb replacem ent                                                                             Headlight aiming
Before replacing a bulb , switch ignition off                                                 We recommend that hea dlight aiming be
and switch relevant switch off.                                                               carried out by a Va ux hall Authorised
                                                                                              Repairer, who will have sp ecial equipment.
O nly hold new b ulb at base! Do not touc h
the b ulb glass with b are hands, otherwise
fingerprints on the glass evap orate.
Residue builds up on the reflector
eventually resulting in a dull reflector.
Inadvertently stained bulbs may b e
cleaned with a clean non-fluffy cloth, using
alcohol or white spirits.
Replacem ent bulb m ust be in accordance
with d ata on base of defective bulb. Do not
exceed wa tta ge g iv en on bulb b ase.

                                                When chang ing lights on the left-ha nd
                                                side, remove filler neck from windsc reen
                                                wash system bottle to g ain better access:
                                                disengage retaining clamp and withdraw
                                                filler neck by p ulling upwards. Wash fluid
                                                may escape if the bottle is full.

                                                 Protect the environment. Do not allow
                                                 wash fluid to seep into the ground or
                                                 drain into the sewage sy stem.




218
Haloge n headlight system dipped         Di pped beam                                   4. Rotate left bulb carrier and disengage.
and main beam                            1. O pen bonnet.
Headlights w ith separate system s for                                                                                           6
                                         2. When replacing bulbs on the left side,
dipped beam 1 (outer b ulbs) and m ain
beam 2 (inner bulbs).                       rem ove the screenwash bottle filler neck
                                            – see p age 218.
                                         3. Remove dipped head light p rotective
                                            cover.




                                                                                                                               219
5. Remove the bulb hold er with bulb from   6. Detach bulb from bulb mounting.                  Ma in beam
   the reflector.                           7. I nsert new bulb into bulb m ounting,            1. Open bonnet.
                                               without touc hing the glass.                     2. When replacing b ulbs on the left side,
                                            8. I nsert new bulb so that the two lugs on            remove the screenwash bottle filler neck
                                               the bulb mounting engage in the                     – see page 218.
                                               recesses in the reflector.                       3. Remov e main beam headlight protective
                                            9. Rotate bulb carrier to right as far as it           cover.
                                               will go.
                                            10. Place head lig ht protective cover in
                                                position and close.
                                            11. When changing b ulbs on the left-hand
                                                side, refit the filler neck of the hea dlight
                                                fluid container and click it home.




220
4. Rotate left bulb carrier a nd disengage.   5. Remove the bulb holder with bulb from   6. Detac h bulb from bulb mounting .
                                                 the reflector.                          7. Insert new bulb into bulb mounting,
                                                                                            without touching the g lass.
                                                                                         8. Insert new bulb so that the two lugs on
                                                                                            the b ulb mounting engage in the
                                                                                            recesses in the reflector.
                                                                                         9. Rotate bulb carrier to right as far a s it
                                                                                            will go.
                                                                                         10. Place headlight protec tiv e cov er in
                                                                                             position and close.
                                                                                         11. When changing bulbs on the left-hand
                                                                                             sid e, refit the filler neck of the headlight
                                                                                             fluid conta iner and click it hom e.




                                                                                                                                      221
Xe non headlight s yste m, dippe d and      Main beam                                      4. Rotate left bulb carrier and disengage.
main beam                                   1. O pen bonnet.
Headlights w ith separate system s for
                                            2. When replacing bulbs on the left side,
dipped beam 1 (outer b ulbs) and m ain
beam 2 (inner bulbs).                          rem ove the screenwash bottle filler neck
                                               – see p age 218.
Dipp ed beam
                                            3. Remove main beam head lig ht protective
 The xenon headlight dipped beam               cover.
 op erates at very hig h voltage. Do not
 touch; high v oltag e can be fatal. Have
 bulb s changed by a workshop. We
 recommend a Vauxhall Authorised
 Repairer.




222
                                                                                             10. Place headlight protec tiv e cov er in
                                                                                                 position and close.
                                                                                             11. When changing bulbs on the left-hand
                                                                                                 sid e, refit the filler neck of the headlight
                                                                                                 fluid conta iner and click it hom e.

                                                                                             Adaptive Forward Lighting 3
                                                                                             Xenon head lig ht system for main and
                                                                                             dipp ed b eam tog ether w ith curve
                                                                                             illumination based on steering angle.

                                                                                              Xenon headlights operate at very high
                                                                                              electric al voltage. Do not touch. Danger
                                                                                              to life. The bulbs for dipped beam, ma in
                                                                                              beam , park ing lig hts and turn signals
5. Remove the bulb hold er with bulb from   6. Deta ch bulb from bulb m ounting.              should only be replac ed b y a w orkshop.
                                                                                              We recom mend a Vauxhall Authorised
   the reflector.                           7. Insert new bulb into bulb mounting ,           Repairer.
                                               without touching the glass.
                                            8. Insert new bulb so that the two lugs on
                                               the bulb mounting engage in the
                                               rec esses in the reflector.
                                            9. Rotate bulb carrier to rig ht a s far as it
                                               will go.




                                                                                                                                          223
Parking lights                                4. Remove parking light bulb holder from   5. Remov e bulb from socket.
1. Open bonnet.                                  reflector.                              6. Insert new b ulb, without touching the
2. When replacing bulbs on the left sid e,                                                  glass.
   remove the screenwash bottle filler neck                                              7. Insert holder in reflector. Place headlight
   – see page 218.                                                                          protective ca p in position and close.
3. Remove m ain beam headlight protec tiv e                                              8. When changing bulbs on the left-hand
   cov er.                                                                                  side, refit the filler neck of the headlight
                                                                                            fluid container and click it home.




224
                                                                                               6. Insert light holder in reflector, rotate
                                                                                                  clockwise and engage in position.
                                                                                               7. When changing bulbs on the left-hand
                                                                                                  side, refit the filler neck of the headlight
                                                                                                  fluid container and click it home.

                                                                                               Front fog lights 3
                                                                                               We recommend that you have bulbs
                                                                                               changed by a Vauxhall Authorised
                                                                                               Repairer.




Front turn signal light                       4. Push bulb into holder a little, rotate left
1. Open bonnet.                                  and remove.
2. When replacing bulbs on the left sid e,    5. Insert new bulb, without touc hing the
   remove the screenwash bottle filler neck      glass.
   – see page 218.
3. Rotate bulb holder to left and
   diseng age.




                                                                                                                                             225
                                                                                                      4. Remov e bulb from socket.
                                                                                                      5. Insert new b ulb without touching the
                                                                                                         glass. Fit bulb m ounting into bulb
                                                                                                         housing . Connect plug . C lose stowage
                                                                                                         compartment.




Turn signal, brake, tail, fog tail and   2. Deta ch plug connector from bulb
re vers ing lights                          mounting .
Sal oon                                  3. Press the two retaining lugs on outer
1. Open the stowage compartment by          edges of bulb m ounting towards ea ch
   pressing the bar down.                   other and remove bulb m ounting.
                                              Bulbs from top to bottom:
                                              Turn signal light
                                              Tail light / brake light
                                              Tail light
                                              Fog tail light 1)
                                              Reversing light




                                         1)
                                              Coun try-sp ecific version : fog ta il light on left-
                                              ha nd sid e only. The b ulb fitted on the right
                                              ha nd sid e can b e used as a sp are.


226
Est ate                                      4. Undo the three screws using a       5. Remov e the bulb from the socket. Bulbs
                                                screwdriv er and d etach the bulb      in bulb mounting:
1. Open the compa rtm ent on the left or
                                                mounting .                             1 = Brake / reversing light
   right-hand side by pressing the latch
                                                                                       2 = Turn signal light
   down – see page 205.
                                                                                    6. Fit a new b ulb without touching the
2. Hold the bulb housing from the outside,
                                                                                       glass. Refit the bulb mounting and screw
   use a wheel nut wrench to loosen the
                                                                                       it into place. Position the light housing in
   retaining nuts and unscrew them by
                                                                                       the vehic le body and screw it into place.
   hand. Rem ov e the bulb housing to the
                                                                                       Close the compartment in the side trim.
   rear. Wheel nut wrench – see vehicle
   tools, pag e 208.
                                                                                                                                 6
3. Detach the cable from the bulb housing.




                                                                                                                               227
Tailgate lights                                   2. Use the Torx screwd riv er found with the   4. Unscrew the m ounting in question:
1. Use a screwd riv er to prise off the plastic      vehicle tools to remov e the screw from        1 = Tail light
   plugs in the tailgate panelling to the            the handle in the inner panelling.             2 = Fog ta il light
   right a nd left of the ta ilg ate lock.                                                          3 = Reversing lig ht
                                                  3. Remove the inner pa nelling and clips
                                                     from the tailgate.                          5. Remov e bulb from socket.
                                                                                                 6. Fit a new b ulb without touching the
                                                                                                    glass. Refit the m ounting in the ta ilg ate.
                                                                                                 7. Refit the inner panelling to the tailgate
                                                                                                    using the clips. Tighten the screw in the
                                                                                                    ha nd le. Refit the pla stic plugs in the
                                                                                                    openings.
                                                                                                 Bulb replacem ent should be entrusted to
                                                                                                 a work shop. We recom mend a Va ux ha ll
                                                                                                 Authorised Repa irer.




228
Number plate light                                 2. Remove the bulb housing downw ards    4. Rotate bulb holder anti-clockwise and
1. Insert screwdriver vertically into lig ht          without pulling on the lead .            disengage.
   insert as shown in figure, press to the sid e   3. Raise lug and detach connector from   5. Remov e bulb from socket.
   and disengage spring.                              bulb m ounting.                       6. Insert new b ulb, without touching the
                                                                                               glass.
                                                                                            7. Insert holder in light housing and enga ge
                                                                                               by turning clockwise.
                                                                                            8. Insert bulb soc ket in light housing.
                                                                                            9. Insert the bulb housing and lock it in
                                                                                               place.




                                                                                                                                        229
Front courte sy light and reading             2. Remove bulb from socket.                 Glove compartm ent lighting,
lights 3                                      3. Insert new bulb, without touc hing the   luggage compartme nt lighting,
Before removal, close the doors so that the      glass.                                   and footwell lighting 3
light is not liv e.                                                                       Before removal, c lose the doors or hold the
                                              4. Mount lens and eng age in position.      contact switch pressed down so that the
1. Lever the lens out of the housing
                                                                                          light is not live.
   recesses.
                                                                                          1. Prise the light out with a screwd riv er.




230
                                              Re ar courtesy lights 3, re ar reading
                                              lights 3
                                              We rec om mend that you have bulbs
                                              cha ng ed b y a Vauxhall Authorised
                                              Repairer.

                                              Instrum ent illumination, Information
                                              display illumination 3
                                              We rec om mend that you have bulbs
                                              cha ng ed b y a Vauxhall Authorised
                                              Repairer.




2. Press bulb slightly towards spring clip
   and remov e.
3. Insert new bulb, without touching the
   glass.
4. Insert lig ht in op ening and eng age in
   position.




                                                                                       231
If you have a problem                         the department c oncerned.                         They w ill review all the facts involved. Then
                                                                                                 if it is felt some further action can be tak en,
                                              The majority of areas of concern can be
                                              quic kly resolved in this way.                     the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer will b e
                                                                                                 adv ised accordingly. In any case, y our
                                              Should you wish to pursue the matter               contact will b e ac knowledged confirm ing
                                              further, the Principal of the Vauxhall             Vauxhall Motors’ position in the m atter.
                                              Authorised Repairer should be made
                                              aware of your concern. It is ad visab le in        If y ou are not satisfied with the outcome,
                                              cases such as this to write to him to confirm      y ou ca n if you wish, seek advice from an
                                              your problem and the solutions that have           independent third p arty suc h as:
                                              been offered.                                      Autom obile Association (A. A. )
                                              You can be assured the Authorised                  Fanum House,
                                              Repairer’s Principal w ill only be too anxious     BASI NGSTO KE,
                                              to fully inv estigate y our prob lems and          Hants., R G21 2EA
                                              correct any errors m ade. After a ll, he has a     Royal Autom obile Cl ub (R.A.C .),
                                              large investm ent in his business and is           R.A. C. M otoring S ervices Ltd.,
In our ex perience the m ost comm on ca use   proud of his reputation and                        89-91 Pall Mall,
of all comp la ints is the result of          professionalism and fully realises that            LON DON , SW1Y S 45
misundersta nding or la ck of                 satisfied c ustomers are his k ey to success.
communication between the customer and                                                           The Customer Relations Dep artment,
the Vauxhall Authorised Rep airer.            In the unlikely ev ent that you are still not      Soc iet y of Mot or Manufact ur ers and
                                              ha ppy with the answer your Vauxhall               Trad ers Ltd. (S .M.M. T.),
We sincerely hope you will nev er have        Authorised Repairer has given, or the              Forbes House, H alkin Street,
cause to c om plain about your vehicle.       action he prop oses to correct the problem,        LON DON , SW1X 7DS
However, if things do g o wrong, the b est    you may conta ct the C ustomer Care
course of action for you to take is to                                                           C ustomer Complaints Service,
                                              Department 1) w here a team of Custom er
contact your Vauxhall Authorised                                                                 Sc ottish Motor Tra de Associ ation,
                                              Care Consultants will spare no effort to
Repairer’s Service Rec eption Staff and                                                          (S. M.T.A.),
                                              ensure your complete satisfa ction.
explain the d ifficulty y ou are having. We                                                      3 Palmerston Place,
are confident they will do their utmost to    Va uxhall Motors Lt d.                             EDINBURGH, EH 12 5AQ
resolve the problem to y our comp lete        Customer Ca re,                                    The National Conciliation Serv ice,
satisfaction.                                 Griffin House,                                     Retai l Motor I ndust ry Federation,
                                              Osborne Road,
Sometimes, however, despite the b est of                                                         9 North Street,
                                              LUTO N,
intentions of all c oncerned,                                                                    RUGBY , C V21 2AB
                                              Beds., LU1 3YT
misundersta ndings can occur. If your                                                            I f you hav e a problem w hilst ab road:
                                              Telep hone: 01582 427200
problem has not been resolv ed to your                                                           The Service Departm ents of Adam Op el AG
satisfaction, please mak e an app ointment    1)                                                 and General M otors branches every where
                                                   Calls ma y be mo nito red and recorded fo r
to discuss the matter with the Manager of          tra in in g p urp oses.                       will provid e information and assistance


232
O pel Austria Vertriebs GmbH              Opel Hella s S .A.                    General Motors Poland Sp. z o. o.
Groß-Enzersdorfer S tr. 59                56 K ifisias Avenue & Delfon str.     Domaniewsk a 41
1220 Vi enna – Austria                    Am arousion                           06- 672 Wa rsa w – Pola nd
Tel. 01-2 88 77 444 or 01-2 88 77 0       151 25 Athens – Greece                Tel. 0 22-606 17 00
                                          Tel. 1-6 80 65 01
O pel Belgium N. V.                                                             O pel Portugal
Prins Boudewijnlaa n 30                   Opel Southeast Europe Ltd .           Q uinta da Fonte
2550 Konti ch – Belgium                   Szabad sag utc a 117                  Ed. Fernão Ma galhã es, Piso 2
Tel. 03-4 50 63 11                        2040 Buda örs – Hungary               Porto Salvo
                                          Tel. 06-23 446 100                    2780 Oeira s – Por tugal
O pel C & S spol. s. r. o.
                                                                                Tel. 01-4 40 75 00
Na Pank ráci 26                           General Motors India
140 00 Pra gue 4 – Czech R epub lic       Sixth Floor, Tow er A                 O pel España de Autom óv iles S.A.
Tel. 02-61 21-88 21                       Glob al Business Park                 Paseo de la Castellana, 91
                                          Mehrauli - Gurgaon Road               28046 Madrid – Sp ain
General Motors Da nm ark
                                          Gurgaon - 122 022, Ha ryana , India   Tel. 902 25 00 25
Jaegersborg Alle 4
                                          Tel. 0091 124 280 3333
2920 Charlot tenl und – Denmark                                                 S aab O pel Sverig e AB
Tel. 39 97 85 00                          Opel Irela nd Ltd.                    Esboga ta n 8
                                          Opel House, Unit 60, Heather Road     164 74 Kista – Sw eden
Vauxhall Motors Ltd.
                                          Sandyford, Dubli n 18 – I rel and     Tel. 08-632 85 00
Customer C are
                                          Tel. 01-216 10 00
Griffin H ouse, Osborne Road                                                    O pel Suisse S.A.
Luton, Bedfordshire, LU1 3YT – Eng land   Opel Italia S .p.A.                   S alzhausstra ße 21
Tel. 0 15 82-42 72 00                     Piaz zale dell'Industria 40           2501 Biel/Bienne – S witzerland
                                          00144 Rome – I taly                   Tel. 0848 810 820 or 0 32-3 21 51 11
O pel O y
                                          Tel. 06-5 46 51
Pajuniity ntie 5                                                                O pel Türkiy e Ltd. S ti.
00320 Helsink i – Finland                 For Luxemb ourg – contact             K emalp asa yolu üzeri
Tel. Helsinki 61 58 81                    Opel Service Department in            35861 Torb ali/Izmir – Turkey
                                          Kontich – Belgium                     Tel. 02 32-8 53-14 53
General Motors France
1 – 9, avenue du Marais                   Opel Nederland B.V.                   In Al bania, Bosnia -Her zegovi na ,
Angle Q uai de Bezons                     Baanhoekweg 188                       Bulga ria, C roatia , Macedonia ,
95101 Ar gent euil Cedex – Franc e        3361 GN Sliedrecht – Nether lands     Rom ania, S lovenia and Yugosla via
Tel. 1-34 26 30 00                        Tel. 0 78-6 42 21 00                  please contact the Opel
                                                                                S ervice Depa rtm ent in Budaörs – Hungary
ADAM O PEL AG                             General Motors Norge AS
                                                                                Tel. 00 36-23 446 100
Bahnhofsplatz 1                           Kjeller-Vest 6
65423 Rüsselsheim – Germany               2027 Kjeller – N or way
Tel. 0 61 42-77 50 00 or 0 61 42-7 70     Tel. 23 50 01 04



                                                                                                                       233
Maintenance,                                                                                      The service interval display takes acc ount
                                                                                                  of off-the-road periods during which the
Inspection system                                                                                 battery is disconnected.
                                                                                                  Further information on maintenance and
                                                                                                  the inspection system can be found in the
                                                                                                  S ervice Booklet, which is in the glove
                                                                                                  compa rtm ent.




In ord er to guarantee economical and sa fe      The rem aining driving dista nce can b e
vehic le operation a nd to maintain the          seen in the tachom eter disp la y when the
value of your vehicle, it is of vital            ignition is off: Press the reset button und er
importance tha t all maintenance work is         the trip odometer; v and the remaining
carried out at the p roper intervals as          driving dista nce will then be display ed.
specified by Vauxhall.                           If the remaining dista nce to the next
The oil c hange and serv ice interv als are      service is less than 1000 miles (1500 km ),
flex ible, based on a numb er of different       v is disp layed with a remaining dista nce
param eters and the conditions under             of 600 m iles (1000 km ) when the ignition is
which the v ehicle is used. Various engine-      switched on. v is displayed for several
specific da ta is c ontinuously record ed a nd   second s if the rem aining d istance is less
used to ca lc ulate the remaining distance       than 600 miles (1000 km ). Have the service
up to the next inspection date.                  work that is due ca rried out within one
                                                 week or 300 miles (500 km). Ha ve this work
                                                 carried out by a Vauxhall Authorised
                                                 Repairer in ord er to av oid loss of warranty
                                                 claims.




234
Hav e maintenance work, as well as repairs
to the b od ywork and equipment, carried
out by a professional. We recomm end a
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who is
familiar with Vauxhall vehicles and in
possession of the nec essary sp ecial tools
and the latest Service Instructions from
Vauxhall. It is particularly advisable to use
a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer during the
warranty p eriod to av oid inv alidation of
warranty claims. S ee the Serv ice Booklet for
further information.
Separ ate anti-cor rosion servi ce
Hav e this carried out every 2 years, either
within the scope of a S ervice or separately,
see Service Book let. We recomm end that                                                       N ever carry out any repairs or adjustment
                                                 A note on safety
you c onsult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer
                                                 To avoid injury from cables cond ucting       and m aintenance work on the vehicle
in order to avoid loss of warranty claims for                                                  y ourself. This especially applies to the
                                                 ignition voltage, only c arry out engine
rust d amage.
                                                 compartment checks (e. g. checking the        eng ine, chassis and safety parts. You may
                                                 brake fluid level or engine oil level) when   unwittingly infringe the p rov isions of the
                                                 the ignition is switched off.                 law and, by not performing the work
                                                                                               properly , endanger y ourself and other
                                                  The cooling fan is controlled by a           road users.
                                                  thermo-switch and can therefore start
                                                  unexp ectedly even if the ignition is        Checking and topping up fluids
                                                  switched off. Risk of injury.                To aid identification, the engine oil filler
                                                                                               cap , coolant ex pansion tank ca p,
                                                  Electronic ignition systems generate very
                                                                                               hea dlight 3 and w indscreen wash fluid
                                                  high voltages. Do not touch the ignition
                                                                                               container ca p and the ha nd le of the oil
                                                  system; hig h voltage can be fatal.
                                                                                               dipstick a re coloured y ellow.




                                                                                                                                          235
Engine oil                                      Engine oil l ev el and consumpt ion               C heck ing the engine oil level,
The oils listed on pag e 252 are particularly   It is norma l for every engine to consum e        top ping up engine oil
suitab le for this engine.                      some oil. Engine oil consum ption cannot be       The figures on this page show the chec ks
                                                reliably ascertained until the vehicle has        for various petrol and d iesel engines,
These high-quality oils are suitable for        covered a substantial numb er of                  Fig. 15175 J on the nex t page shows check s
sum mer and winter operation.                   miles / kilometres. During the running-in         for engine Y 30 DT 1) .
Com mercially available oils must only be       phase, it may b e abov e the spec ified lev el.   The oil level must be checked with the
used in the grades a nd viscosities shown on    Frequent running at high engine speeds            vehicle horizontal and with the engine
page 252. This may reduce the cha nge           increases oil consumption.                        (which must be at operating tempera ture)
interval. In case of doubt, conta ct a          The engine oil lev el is check ed                 switched off. Wait a t least five minutes
workshop. We recommend consulting a             autom atic ally – see p age 38. Before            before checking the level to allow the
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.                   emba rk ing on a long journey it is               normal oil acc um ulation in the engine to
In the case of brand oils the ma nufacturers    recommended tha t the eng ine oil lev el is       drain ba ck into the oil pa n.
are responsible for ensuring that the oils      checked.
they supply are suitable for Vauxhall
vehic les.                                                                                             Imp ortant: It is the ow ner’s responsibility
                                                                                                       to maintain the proper lev el of an
                                                                                                       appropriate qua lity oil in the engine.


                                                                                                  1)
                                                                                                        Sales des ig nation – see p ag e 257.


236
To check the level, rem ov e the oil gauge           When top ping up, use the sam e oil a s a t       O il chang e, oi l filter cha ng e
(dipstic k), w ipe it clean and reinsert it as far   the la st oil change, and pa y strict attention   C ha nge the oil at the displayed serv ice
as it will g o. At the very latest, top up if the    to the instructions on pa ge 252.                 interva ls.
oil level has dropped to just ab ov e the " add      Lubricant charts – see p age 253, 254, 255.       We recommend that y ou use g enuine
oil" ma rk MIN .                                                                                       Vauxhall oil filters.
                                                     Capacities – see page 276.
The oil level must not go above the upper
mark MAX on the dipstick. Excess oil m ust           The oil consumption will not stabilise until       Used oil filters and empty oil cans do not
be drained or extracted b y suction. If the oil      the vehicle has been driven several                belong in the domestic garb age. We
lev el does go above the mark MAX there is           thousand miles. Only then can the ac tual          recommend having oil changes and oil
a risk of d amage to the engine or cataly tic        ra te of consum ption b e estab lished .           filter changes carried out by a Va ux hall
converter.                                                                                              Authorised Repairer. The Vauxhall
                                                                                                        Authorised Repairer k nows the laws
The a mount filled must be between the                                                                  conc erning the disposa l of used oil and
MIN and MA X marks – see pag e 276.
                                                                                                        therefore protects the env ironment and
                                                                                                        your health.




                                                                                                                                                    237
Diese l fue l filter                             Coolant
Check fuel filter for a ny w ater residue when   During operation the system is pressurised.
each engine oil cha ng e tak es place. We        The temp erature ma y therefore rise briefly
recom mend that y ou consult a Vauxhall          to ov er 100 °C.
Authorised Repairer.                             The glycol-ba sed coolant provides
Hav e filter checked at shorter intervals in     exc ellent corrosion protection for the
the c ase of ex treme opera ting conditions      heating and cooling systems as well as
suc h a s high humidity (prima rily in coastal   anti-freeze protection down to – 28 °C . It
areas), extremely high or low outside            remains in the cooling system throughout
tem peratures and substantially varying          the year and need not b e changed.
day tim e a nd nig ht-time tem peratures.        Certain a ntifreezes ca n lead to engine
                                                 damage. We therefore strongly
                                                 recommend the use of antifreezes that
                                                 ha ve b een approved by Vauxhall.

                                                  Anti-freeze is a da nger to health; it must   Anti -freeze a nd corrosion prot ect ion
                                                  therefore be kept in the original             Before the sta rt of the cold weather season,
                                                  container and out of the reach of             have the coolant checked for correct
                                                  children.                                     concentration. We recommend that you
                                                                                                consult a Vaux ha ll Authorised Repairer.
                                                                                                The amount of a ntifreeze must provide
                                                                                                protec tion up to approx.–28 °C . If the
                                                                                                antifreeze concentra tion is too low, this
                                                                                                reduc es protection from freezing and
                                                                                                corrosion. Top up antifreeze if necessary .
                                                                                                If c oolant loss is topped up with wa ter,
                                                                                                have concentration checked and a dd anti-
                                                                                                freeze if necessary.




238
                                                Top up anti-freeze. I f no anti-freeze is        C ool ant temp era ture
                                                available, top up w ith c lean tap water. If     For physical reasons, the engine
                                                tap water is unav ailable, distilled water       temperature gauge shows the coolant
                                                can be used.                                     temperature only if the coolant level is
                                                                                                 adequate.
                                                After topping up w ith tap or distilled water,
                                                ha ve the anti-freez e concentration             During operation the system is pressurised.
                                                checked, a nd anti-freeze added if               The tem perature may therefore rise to ov er
                                                necessary. H ave the cause of the coolant        100 ° C.
                                                loss remedied. We recommend that you             If the temp erature g auge enters the right-
                                                consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.          hand (w arning) zone or control indicator W
                                                When closing, tighten coola nt filler cap as     lights up, chec k the c oolant level
                                                fa r as it will go.                              imm ediately.
                                                                                                 z Coolant level low:
                                                                                                   Top up coolant. Pay strict attention to
                                                                                                   the instructions given under "Anti-freeze
C oola nt level
                                                                                                   and corrosion protection" a nd "Coolant
Hardly any losses occur since the cooling                                                          level". Have the cause of coolant loss
system is sealed and it is thus rarely
                                                                                                   remedied . We recommend that you
necessary to top up the c oolant.                                                                  consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
The c oolant in the compensation tank
                                                                                                 z Coolant level O K:
should b e slightly above the mark                                                                 Have the c ause of inc reased coolant
KALT / COLD with the cooling system cold.
                                                                                                   temperature remed ied. Contact a
It rises when the engine is warm and fa lls                                                        workshop. We rec om mend that you
again as it c ools. If it drop s b elow the
                                                                                                   consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
marking in this case, it should be topped up
to a level just abov e the marking.

 Allow engine to cool d ow n before
 removing coola nt filler ca p. Remove filler
 cap carefully so that p ressure can
 escape slowly, otherwise there is a risk of
 scalding.




                                                                                                                                            239
                                                Extreme cleanliness is im porta nt, since      Windscreen wiper
                                                brake fluid contam ination can lead to         C lear v ision is essential for safe driving.
                                                brake sy stem malfunctions.
                                                                                               Y ou should therefore perform regular
                                                After correcting the brake fluid level, have   checks on the windscreen wiper a nd
                                                the cause of the loss rem edied. We            hea dlight wiper system 3 to m ake sure
                                                recommend that you consult a Va ux ha ll       they are operating correc tly .
                                                Authorised Repairer.
                                                                                               If the windsc reen is dirty, operate the
                                                Brake fluid change                             screenwash b efore switching on the
                                                Brake fluid is hygroscopic, i. e. it absorbs   windscreen wiper or setting the wiper to
                                                water. If the brak es become hot, such as      automatic op eration with the rain sensor 3.
                                                when driving on long downhill stretches,       This will avoid wip er blad e wear.
                                                vapour bubbles ca n oc cur in the water,
                                                whic h can have an ex tremely ad verse         Do not switch on the windscreen wiper or
                                                                                               set to a utoma tic operation with the rain
                                                effect on brak ing power (depending on the
                                                prop ortion of water).                         sensor 3 if the windscreen is iced up as this
                                                                                               could da mage the wiper blades or the
Brake fluid                                     The fluid change intervals specified in the    wiper system.
Brak e fluid level                              Serv ic e Booklet must therefore be
                                                                                               If the wiper bec om es frozen on to the glass,
 Caution – brake fluid is poisonous and         ob served.
                                                                                               we recomm end that it be released with the
 corrosive. Do not allow it to come into
                                                 We recommend that you have brak e             aid of Vauxhall De-icer S pray.
 contact with ey es, sk in, fabric or painted
 surfaces. Direct contact could cause            fluid changed by a Vauxhall Authorised        S mearing wiper blades c an be cleaned with
 injury and damage.                              Repairer, who will be familiar with the       a soft cloth and Vauxhall Wind screen
                                                 req uirements of the law as regards           Wash Solvent.
The fluid level in the reserv oir must b e       disposal of brake fluid a nd can thus help
                                                                                               Wiper blades whose lips have become
neither higher than the MAX m ark nor            to protec t the env ironment and your
                                                                                               hardened, crack ed or covered with silicone
lower than the MIN mark.                         hea lth.
                                                                                               must be replac ed. This may be necessary
Use of some brake fluid s could c ause                                                         as a result of the effects of ic e, thawing salt
dam age or im pair braking effectiveness.                                                      or hea t, or the incorrect use of cleaning
Stay well informed. We recomm end that                                                         agents.
you only use Vauxhall-approved high                                                            S witc h off the windsc reen w ip er and
performance brake fluid.                                                                       automatic operation with rain sensor 3 in
                                                                                               car washes – see pages 19, 246.




240
To ensure proper operation of the ra in        Service set ting for front w indscreen w iper   Wiper bl ades on the windscreen
sensor 3, the sensor a rea must be free from   (e.g. for cha nging or cleaning the front       Activating serv ice p osition, see preceding
dust, dirt and ice. The windscreen w ash       wiper b la des).                                column. Lift wiper arm. Press the release
system m ust also be operated at regular                                                       lever a nd detac h the wiper blade.
                                               Within 8 seconds of switching off the
intervals and the sensor a rea m ust be de-    ignition, press the windscreen wip er stalk
iced. Vehicles with rain sensor 3 ca n be      downwards. Release the windscreen wip er
identified by the sensor area near the top     stalk as soon as the w ip er blad es are
of the w indscreen.                            vertical.




                                                                                                                                        241
                                                 The windscreen wash system and
                                                 headlight wash system w ill not freeze in
                                                 winter:

                                                  Frost protection     Mixture strength
                                                      down to        Vauxhall Windscreen
                                                                     Wa sh S olv ent: Water
                                                       a–5 °C                 1 :3
                                                       –10 °C                 1 :2
                                                       –20 °C                 1 :1
                                                       –30 °C                 2 :1

                                                 When closing the container, press the lid
                                                 firmly over the beaded ed ge a ll the way
                                                 round.
Winds creen and headlight wash                                                                Battery
systems 3                                                                                     The battery is m aintenance-free.
The filler neck for the windscreen w ash
reserv oir and the headlight washing                                                           We recom mend that you have battery
system 3 is at the front left of the engine                                                    chang es carried out by a Vauxhall
compartment near the battery . The fluid                                                       Authorised Repairer. The Vauxhall
lev el in the reservoir ca n be c hecked using                                                 Authorised Repairer k nows the laws
the d ipstick. Do not fill fluid level to more                                                 conc erning the disposa l of used
than 1/ 1. Capa city – see p age 276.                                                          batteries a nd therefore protects the
                                                                                               environment and your health.
Fill only with clean w ater to prevent the
nozzles from clogging. To improve                                                             Retro-fitted electrical or electronic
cleaning efficiency, we recommend that                                                        acc essories can p lace an additional load
you add a little Vauxhall Wind screen Wash                                                    on the battery or even discha rg e the
Solvent.                                                                                      battery. We recom mend that y ou consult a
                                                                                              Vauxhall Authorised Repairer regarding
                                                                                              technical possibilities, suc h as fitting a
                                                                                              more powerful battery.




242
Laying up the vehicle for more than            Protecting electronic com pone nts              The battery m ust b e disconnected from the
4 weeks can lead to ba ttery d ischarge,       In order to prevent faults in electronic        vehicle b efore b eing charged: first
which may reduce the service life of the       components in the electrica l sy stem, nev er   disconnect the neg ativ e cable and then the
battery. Disconnect battery from on-board      connect or disconnect battery with engine       positive cable. The polarity of the battery ,
power supply by detaching negative             running or ignition switched on. Never start    i.e. the connections for the positive and
term inal (anti-theft alarm system 3 is then   engine w ith b attery disconnected, e.g.        neg ative cables, m ust not be
disabled ).                                    when starting using jump leads.                 interchanged. When reconnecting , first
                                                                                               connect the positiv e cab le and then the
Do not connect battery with ignition
                                                                                               neg ative cable.
switched on. Then perform the following
opera tions:                                                                                   To av oid damaging the vehic le, d o not
                                                                                               ma ke a ny modifications to the electrical
z Remove radio b lock 3, see rad io
                                                                                               system, e. g. connecting ad ditional
  op erating instructions.
                                                                                               consum ers or tampering with electronic
z Set date and time in information display –                                                   control units (chip tuning).
  see page 44.
z Activ ate w indow and sun roof                                                                Electronic ignition system s generate very
                                                                                                hig h voltages. Do not touch the ignition
  elec tronics 3 – see pages 121, 124.
                                                                                                sy stem; high voltage can b e fatal.
In order to prev ent the b attery from
discharging , som e c onsumers suc h as the
courtesy light automatically switch off
after approx. 20 minutes.




                                                                                                                                        243
Ve hicle decom mis sioning                       Vehicle storag e                                  V ehicle recomm issioning
O bserve na tional regulations.                  z Park vehicle in dry, well v entilated plac e.   O bserve national regulations.
                                                   With manual transmission select first
If the vehicle is decomm issioned for several                                                      Perform the following work before
                                                   gear or reverse gear, and with autom atic
months, the follow ing work must be ca rried       transm ission 3 or C VTronic 3 mov e            recommissioning the vehicle:
out in order to prevent damage. We                 selector lever to P. Prev ent vehicle from      z Connect ba ttery – see page 243.
recom mend that y ou consult a Vauxhall            rolling using wedges or the like.
Authorised Repairer.                                                                               z Check tyre pressure – see pa ge 268.
                                                 z Do not apply handbrake.
z Wash and preserve the vehicle – see                                                              z Fill up w indscreen wash system – see
  page 246.                                      z Disconnect battery by disengaging                 page 242.
                                                   neg ativ e terminal from vehicle electrical
z Check protective coating in engine                                                               z Check engine oil level – see p age 236.
                                                   system – see page 243.
  com partment a nd on underbody a nd                                                              z Check the coolant level; top up with anti-
  rectify where necessary .                                                                          freez e if necessa ry – see pa ge 239.
z Clean and preserv e rubber seals on                                                              z If necessa ry , fit the number plates. When
  bonnet and doors.                                                                                  fitting the front numb er plate, do not use
z Change engine oil – see page 237.                                                                  any number plate reinforcement.
z Check anti-freeze and c orrosion
  protection – see page 238.
z Check the coola nt level, top up with anti-
  freeze if nec essary – see pag e 239.
z Empty windsc reen w ash system and
  headlight wash system.
z Inc rease ty re pressure to value sp ecified
  for m aximum load – see page 268.




244
Vehicle care   Consult a Vauxhall Authorised Rep airer
               with regard to care a id s tested and
                                                                  V ehicle care aids 3
                                                                  Vehicle wash:
               recommended by Vauxhall.                           z Wa sh brush,
               When caring for your vehicle, observe all          z Shampoo,
               na tional environm ental reg ulations,             z Sponge,
               particula rly when wa shing it.                    z Insect Removal S ponge,
                                                                  z Chamois.
               Regular, thorough care helps to improve
               the appearance of your vehicle and                 Vehicle care:
               maintain its v alue over the y ears. It is a lso   z Paintwork Clea ner,
               a prerequisite for warranty claims for any         z Paintwork Polish,
               paint or corrosion damag e. The following          z Crea m Polish,
               pages contain tips for vehicle care which, if      z Metallic Paintwork Wax ,
               used properly , will help combat the               z Hard wa x,
               unav oida ble d amaging effects of the             z Vauxhall Touch-Up Paint,
               environment.                                       z Vauxhall Touch-Up / Aerosol Paint,
                                                                  z Wheel Preserver,
                                                                  z Tar Rem ov er,
                                                                  z Insect Remover,
                                                                  z Window Cleaner,
                                                                  z Vauxhall Windscreen Wa sh S olv ent,
                                                                  z Silicone O il for Rubber Sea ls,
                                                                  z Cleaner.




                                                                                                           245
Washing                                         Clea n edges and folds on op ened doors        P olishing
The paintwork of your v ehicle is exposed to    and flaps as well a s the area s they cover.   Polishing is necessary only if the pa int has
env ironmenta l influences, e. g. continuous    Thoroughly rinse off and leather-off the       become dull or if solid deposits hav e
changes in weather conditions, ind ustrial      vehicle. Rinse leather frequently . Use        become attached to it.
waste gases and dust or tha wing sa lts, so     separate leathers for paint and w indow        Paintwork polish with silicone forms a
wash and wax your v ehicle regularly. When      surfaces: remnants of wax on the wind ow s     protec tiv e film, making w axing
using a utoma tic car washes, select a          will impair vision.                            unnecessary.
programme which includes wax ing.
                                                Observ e national regulations.                 Plastic body parts should not be treated
Bird droppings, dead insects, resin, pollen                                                    with wax and polish.
and the like should be cleaned off              Waxing
immediately , as they contain aggressive                                                       Use Metallic Paintwork Wax on vehicles
                                                Wax your vehicle regularly, in pa rticular
constituents which can cause paint                                                             with a metallic-effect paint finish.
                                                after it has been washed using shampoo
dam age.                                        and at the latest when wa ter no longer
                                                                                               Whe els
Please follow the wash sy stem                  forms beads on the pa intwork, otherwise
                                                the paintwork will d ry out.                   Use a pH-neutral w heel c leaning agent to
manufacturer’s instructions w hen using
                                                                                               clean the wheels.
wash systems. The wind screen wiper and         Also wax edg es a nd folds on op ened doors
the autom atic wiper w ith rain sensor 3 and    and flaps as well a s the area s they cover.   Wheels a re painted and ca n be treated
the rear window wiper 3 must be switched                                                       with the same ag ents as the body. For alloy
off – see page 19. Unscrew the antenna rod                                                     wheels we recomm end use of Alloy Wheel
3 a nd the roof rack 3, standing on the                                                        Preserv er.
door sill to make them easier to reach.
If y ou w ash y our v ehicle by hand, make
sure that the insides of the wing s a re also
thoroughly rinsed out.




246
Paintwork damage                               Plastic and rubber parts                     Interior and upholste ry
Repair small area s of p aint damage suc h     For add itional cleaning of plastic and      C lean the vehicle interior, including the
as stone impacts, scratches etc.               rubb er parts use C leaner. Do not use any   instrument panel fac ia , using interior
immediately using a Va ux ha ll touch-up       other agent, and in particular do not use    cleaner.
applicator or Vauxhall sp ra y and touch-up    solvents or petrol.                          C lean fabric upholstery w ith a vacuum
paint before rust can form . If rust has                                                    cleaner and brush. To remove stains, use
alrea dy formed, ha ve the c ause remedied.    Wheels and tyres                             cleaner tha t is suitable for both fabrics and
We recommend that you consult a                Do not use high-pressure jet clea ners on    vinyl.
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Please also      wheels and tyres.
pay attention to surfaces and edg es                                                        Do not use cleaning agents suc h as
beneath the v ehicle where rust ma y have                                                   acetone, c arbon tetrachlorid e, paint
formed unnoticed for some time.                                                             thinner, paint remover, nail varnish
                                                                                            remover, washing pow der or b leach to
Exterior lights                                                                             clean fabrics, carpets, the dashboard or
Headlight and other protective lig ht bezels                                                leather trim 3 in the vehicle interior.
are made of plastic. If they require                                                        Benzine is also unsuita ble.
additional cleaning after the vehicle has
been washed, clea n them with C ar                                                          Seat belts
Shamp oo. Do not use any ab ra sive or                                                      Alway s k eep seat b elts clean a nd dry.
caustic agents, do not use an ice scraper,                                                  C lean only w ith lukewa rm water or C leaner.
and do not clean them dry.




                                                                                                                                         247
Windows                                         Windscre en wiper blades                        Engine compartme nt
When cleaning the heated rear window,           Smearing wiper blades can be c leaned with      Area s in the engine compartment painted
mak e sure tha t the heating element on the     a soft c loth and Vauxhall Windscreen           in the vehicle colour a re cared for like any
inside of the wind ow is not d amaged.          Wash Solvent, and replaced if necessary –       other pa inted area. It is adv isable to wash
                                                see p age 240.                                  and w ax the engine compartment before
Use a soft lint-free cloth or chamois leather
                                                                                                and a fter winter. Cover the alternator a nd
in conjunction with Wind ow Cleaner and
Insect Remover.                                 Locks                                           brak e fluid reservoir with plastic sheeting
                                                The locks are lubricated with a hig h-grad e    before washing the engine.
Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent is             lock cylinder grease at the fac tory .          When washing the engine with a steam -jet
suitab le for de-icing windows.                 Vauxhall lock cylinder grease prevents the      cleaner, d o not direct the steam jet at
For mechanical removal of ice, use a            lock s from freezing up. O nly use de-ic ing    components of the Anti-lock Brak e Sy stem,
commercially a vailable sharp-edged ice         agent in emerg encies, a s they have a          the a utoma tic air cond itioning system, the
scraper. Press the sc ra per firmly against     degreasing effect a nd will impair the          auxiliary heating system hea ter or the belt
the g lass so that no dirt can get und er it    function of the locks. After using a de-icing   drive and its components.
and scratch the glass.                          agent, hav e the locks re-greased. We
                                                recommend that you entrust this to a            Protective wax that has been applied is
                                                Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.                   also rem ov ed during the engine wash. For
                                                                                                this reason, have the engine, brake sy stem
                                                                                                components in the engine c om partment,
                                                                                                ax le components with steering , body parts
                                                                                                and c avities thoroughly preserved with
                                                                                                protec tiv e w ax after the wash. We
                                                                                                recommend that you consult a Vauxhall
                                                                                                Authorised Repa irer.
                                                                                                An eng ine wash can be performed in the
                                                                                                spring in order to remove dirt that has
                                                                                                adhered to the engine compartment,
                                                                                                which ma y also have a high salt content.
                                                                                                C heck protective wax layer and make good
                                                                                                if nec essary .
                                                                                                Do not use high-pressure jet c leaners on
                                                                                                wheels and tyres.




248
Underbody                                      On vehicles which are washed frequently in      C aution – commercially av aila ble
Your vehicle has a fa ctory -applied PVC       autom atic car washes with underbody            bitumen / rubber materials can damag e
undercoating in the wheel arches               washing facility, the protective wax            the PVC coating. We recommend that you
(includ ing the longitudinal members) w hich   coating may b e impaired by d irt-dissolv ing   have underbody work carried out by a
provides permanent protection and needs        additives, so check the underbody after         Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who knows
no special m aintenance. The surfaces of       washing and ha ve it waxed if necessary .       the prescribed materials and has
the vehicle underbody not covered b y PVC      Before the start of the cold weather season,    experience in the use thereof.
are provided with a durable protective w ax    check the PVC c oa ting a nd protective wax     The underbody should be washed
coating in critical areas.                     coating and, if necessary , have them           following the end of the cold weather
                                               restored to perfect condition.                  season to remov e any dirt adhering to the
                                                                                               underbody since this may also contain salt.
                                                                                               C heck p rotective wax c oa ting and , if
                                                                                               nec essary , have it restored to perfec t
                                                                                               condition.




                                                                                                                                      249
Technical data




                 Vehicle docum ents,                              Information on identification plate:
                 identification plate                             1   Manufac turer
                 The tec hnical d ata is determined in            2   Type approval number
                 accordance with European C ommunity              3   Vehic le Id entific ation N umber
                 standards. We reserve the right to make          4   Permissible gross v ehicle weight
                 modifications. S pecifications in the vehic le   5   Permissible gross train weight
                 docum ents alwa ys have priority ov er those     6   Maximum permissib le front axle load
                 given in this manual.                            7   Maximum permissib le rear axle load
                 The identification plate is affix ed to the      8   Vehic le-specific or country-specific da ta
                 front right door frame.




250
                                              In other design v ariants, the identification   Coolant, brake fluid, oils
                                              plate m ay also be affixed to the               When topping up
                                              dashboard.                                      – coola nt,
                                              Engine code and engine number: stamp ed         – brake fluid,
                                              on left-ha nd side of engine on crankcase.      – manual transmission oil,
                                                                                              – autom atic transmission oil,
                                                                                              – CVTronic transmission oil,
                                                                                              – power steering oil

                                                                                              We recommend that you consult a
                                                                                              Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who can
                                                                                              adv ise you on the correct products to use.
                                                                                              C aution: Use of unsuitable fluids can cause
                                                                                              serious damage to the vehicle.

Ve hicle ide ntification data
The Vehicle Identification Numb er is
stamped on the identification plate (see
previous pag e) and in the vehicle floor on
the right-hand side under a cover between
the front passenger d oor a nd seat.




                                                                                                                                      251
Eng ine oi ls                                   Your Vectra is deliv ered from the fac tory       The engine oil that has been specially
For more information, see the S ervice          with engine oil of q uality GM-LL-A-025           developed for vehicles with
Booklet.                                        (S AE 5W-30) 3 or GM-LL-B-025                     ECO Serv ice-Flex can be obtained from a
                                                (S AE 5W-40) 3.                                   Vauxhall Authorised Repairer or on the
The oil change intervals for engine oils are
                                                                                                  open market (e.g. filling stations). A list of
flex ible (ECO Serv ic e-Flex).                 With this eng ine oil, the nex t oil c hange is
                                                                                                  oil companies can be found on the Internet
                                                after a maxim um of 2 y ears or 25,000 miles
The next eng ine oil change will be                                                               at w ww.vaux hall. co.uk
                                                / 35,000 km (petrol eng ines) or a maximum
displayed on the v ehicle instruments and
                                                of 2 y ears or 30,000 miles / 50,000 km           When topping up, alwa ys use engine oil of
will depend on how you drive the vehicle.
                                                (diesel eng ines). The service interval display   quality GM -LL-A-025 or GM-LL-B-025 (see
Driving patterns take into account e. g.
                                                ta kes into a ccount off-the-road p eriods        table on the following page), to benefit
frequent cold sta rts, short trip s, avera ge
                                                during which the battery is disconnected –        from the flexible maintenance intervals.
driving conditions or p redominantly long
                                                see pag e 234.
distance d riv ing.                                                                               If these engine oils a re unavailable – see
                                                                                                  pag e 254.




252
Maximum oil chang e i nt erv al for oi l grad e GM- LL-A-025 or GM-LL-B-025         I nform ation rega rding oil qualit y
                                                                                    GM-LL-A-025 or GM-LL-B-025
Interva l                   Engine code                         Q uality classes    GM          = General Motors
                                                                                    LL          = Long Life
Max . 2 years or     Z 18 XE,                                   GM -LL-A-025        A or B      = Internal designation
approx. 25,000 miles Z 18 XEL,                                                      025         = Validity index
(35,000 km)          Z 20 NET,
                                                                                    Higher validity indices indicate
                     Z 22 SE,
                     Z 22 YH,                                                       progressively more refined c lassifications.
                                                                                    O ils w ith higher validity indices can be
                     Z 32 SE
                                                                                    used.
Max . 2 years or            Y 20 DTH,                           GM -LL-B-025
 30,000 miles               Y 22 DTR,
(50,000 km)                 Y 30 DT 1 )




1)
     Recomm ended : Shell H elix Plus S (SAE 5W-40), M ob il Synt S (SA E 5W-40),
     Es so Ultro n (SAE 5W-40).



                                                                                                                             253
Topping up engine oils of oil gra de ACEA       Oil c hange interval s i f top-up q uantity is more than 1 lit re of ACEA qualit y engine oil
A ma ximum of 1 litre of AC EA quality
engine oil can be ad ded before the next oil    Interval           Engine code                      Quality classes    S AE v iscosity classes
change without reducing the oil change
interval. See a djacent table for quality       1 year or          Z   18   XE,                     ACEA   A3,         0W-30, 0W-40,
classes.                                        20,000 m iles      Z   18   XEL,                    ACEA   A3/B3,      5W-30, 5W-40,
                                                (30,000 km )       Z   20   NET,                    ACEA   A3/B3/B4,   10W-30, 10W-40
If more than 1 litre must be added, the oil                        Z   22   SE,                     ACEA   A5,
change interval for petrol and diesel                              Z   20   YH,                     ACEA   A5/B5
engines is reduced to 1 year or 20,000 miles                       Z   32   SE
(30,000 km), see adjoining table.
The servic e interval d isplay should then be   1 year or          Y 20 DTH ,                       ACEA B4,           0W-30, 0W-40,
disregarded.                                    20,000 m iles      Y 22 DTR                         ACEA A3/B4,        5W-30, 5W-40,
                                                (30,000 km )                                        ACEA A3/B3/B4      10W-30, 10W-40
For more information, see the S ervice
Booklet.                                        1 year or          Y 30 DT 1 )                      ACEA B4,           0W-30, 0W-40,
                                                15,000 m iles                                       ACEA A3/B4,        5W-30, 5W-40,
                                                (20,000 km )                                        ACEA A3/B3/B4      10W-30, 10W-40




                                                1)
                                                     R ecom mend ed en gine oils – see pa ge 253.



254
Inform ation on AC EA oil grade
cla ssific ation
The Association d es Constructeurs
Européens d’Automobiles classifies engine
oils according to their perform anc e
(quality).
Ea ch class is identified by letters and
numbers, e.g. A3.
The letter indicates the field of a pplication.
A = Petrol eng ines in passenger cars
B = Diesel engines in passenger cars
E = Diesel engines in trucks
The number indicates the quality in
ascending numeric al order.
                                                  Informat ion on SAE oil vi sc osit y             I = O nly approved and recommended
Im portant note
                                                  Engine a nd transmission oils are grouped            Long -Life engine oils with the
For countries in which the specified oils         in SAE classes b y the S oc iety of Automotive       identification GM-LL-A-025
(GM-LL-, ACEA A3/B3) are not availab le,
                                                  Engineers b ased on their v iscosity.                or GM-LL-B -025 – see page 253.
more detailed inform ation is found in the        Viscosity is the measure of interna l friction
Service Booklet.                                                                                   I I = O nly if the higher quality I is
                                                  of the oil in flux , dependent on its                  unavailable may engine oils of AC EA
                                                  temperature.                                           oil quality be used in this case the oil
                                                  The SAE classification does not provide                change interval is reduced to
                                                  information on the quality of the oil; it              20, 000 miles (30, 000 km) or 1 y ear –
                                                  merely indicates the range of application              see page 254.
                                                  of the oil dependent on the outside
                                                  temperature – see diagram.
                                                  The first number indicates v iscosity at low
                                                  temperatures (cold sta rt behaviour). The
                                                  second num ber indicates visc osity a t hig h
                                                  temperatures.




                                                                                                                                              255
Engine data
Sales designation                                                   1. 8                       1.8                         2.0 Turbo                  2.2
Eng ine code                                                        Z 18 XE                    Z 18 XEL                    Z 20 NET                   Z 22 S E

Numb er of cylinders                                                4                          4                           4                          4
Bore dia. (mm )                                                     80.5                       80. 5                       86.0                       86.0

Stroke (mm)                                                         88.2                       88. 2                       86.0                       94.6
Piston displacement         (cm 3)                                  1796                       1796                        1998                       2198

Max . engine outp ut (k W)                                          90                         81                          129                        108
  at rpm                                                            6000                       5600                        5500                       5600

Torque (Nm )                                                        167                        167                         265                        203
  at rpm                                                            3800                       3800                        2500 to 3800               4000

Com pression ratio                                                  10.5                       10. 5                       9.5                        10.0
O ctane requirement          (RO N) 1 )
  unleaded                                                          95                         95                          95                         95
                                                                         2)                          2)                          2)                         2)
  or unleaded                                                       98                         98                          98                         98
                                                                         2 )3)                       2)3 )                       2 )4)                      2 )4 )
  or unleaded                                                       91                         91                          91                         91
Max . permissible engine speed,
 continuous operation (rpm) approx.                                 6400                       6400                        6500                       6500
O il consumption (l/1000 km)                                        0. 6                       0.6                         0.6                        0.6




1)
     Stan da rd high-q uality fuels , e.g . unlea ded DIN EN 228; value p rinted in b old: reco mmend ed fuel.
2)
     Kn ock contro l s ys tem a utoma tically a d jus ts ig nition tim ing a ccording to typ e o f fuel used (octa ne nu mber).
3)
     Slight reduction in engine ou tp ut a nd to rq ue if 91 R ON is used .
4)
     If n o u nlea d ed Prem iu m fuel is availab le, 91 RON can be used taking ca re to a void high engine lo ad o r full loa d as well a s for d rivin g in mo untainou s
     terra in with a caravan / trailer loa d o r hig h pa ylo ad .


256
Engine data
Sales designation                               2.2 d irect              3.2 V6                  2.0 DTI                 2.2 DTI        3.0 C DTI
Eng ine code                                    Z 22 YH                  Z 32 SE                 Y 20 DTH                Y 22 DTR       Y 30 DT

Numb er of cylinders                            4                        6                       4                       4              6
Bore dia. (mm )                                 86.0                     87.5                    84.0                    84.0           87.5

Stroke (mm)                                     94.6                     88.0                    90.0                    98.0           82.0
Piston displacement        (cm 3)               2198                     3175                    1995                    2172           2958
Max . engine outp ut (k W)                      114                      155                     74                      92             130
  at rpm                                        5600                     6200                    4000                    4000           4000
Torque (Nm )                                    220                      300                     230                     280            370 / 330 1 )
  at rpm                                        3800                     4000                    1500 to 2500            1500 to 2750   1900 to 2800 /
                                                                                                                                        1600 to 3600 1)

Com pression ratio                              12.0                     10.0                    18.5                    18.5           18.5
O ctane requirement (RO N) 2 )
  unleaded                                      95 3)                    95                      –                       –              –
  or unleaded                                   98 4 )                   98    4)                –                       –              –
                                                –5)                            4 )6)
  or unleaded                                                            91                      –                       –              –
Cetane requirement (CN) 2 )                                              –                       49 (D) 7 )              49 (D) 7 )     49 (D) 7 )
Max . permissible engine speed,
 continuous operation (rpm)                     6500                     6800                    5000                    5000           4500 to 4700
  ap prox .

O il consumption (l/1000 km)                    0.6                      0.6                     0.6                     0.6            0.6

1)
     Version w ith a utoma tic trans mission.
2)
     Stan da rd high-q uality fuels , e.g . unlea ded DIN EN 228, Diesel DIN EN 590; va lue p rinted in b old: reco mmen ded fuel.
3)
     The use o f fuel tha t is a t leas t 95 o ctan e is p res crib ed.
4)
     Kn ock contro l s ys tem a utoma tically a d jus ts ig nition tim ing a ccording to typ e o f fuel used (octa ne nu mber).
5)
     91 octa ne fu el m ust not be used .
6)
     Slight reduction in engine ou tp ut a nd to rq ue if 91 R ON is used .
7)
     A lo wer va lue is pos sib le with w inter fu els.




                                                                                                                                                          257
Pe rform ance (approx. mph; k m/h) ,
Saloon
Eng ine 1 )                                                                Z 18 XE               Z 18 XEL               Z 20 N ET             Z 22 S E

Max imum speed2)
 Manual tra nsmission                                                      126; 203              122; 196               –                     –
 Sport transmission                                                        127; 205              123; 198               143; 230              134; 216
 Automatic transmission                                                    –                     –                      –                     131; 210
 CVTronic                                                                  118; 190              –                      –                     –

Eng ine 1 )                                                                Z 32 SE               Y 20 DTH               Y 22 DTR              Y 30 DT

Max imum      speed2)
 Manual tra nsmission                                                      154; 248              119; 192               125/128;2023 )/206    140; 226
 Sport transmission                                                        –                     –                      –                     –
 Automatic transmission                                                    153; 246              –                      125; 202              139; 223
 CVTronic                                                                  –                     –                      –                     –




1)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 256, 257.
2)
     The ma xim um s peed is a ch ieva ble with a m aximum of h alf p ayloa d. Optiona l eq uipm ent m ay reduce th e specified m aximum speed of the vehicle.
3)
     Co untry-specific versio n.



258
Pe rform ance ( approx. mph ; km/h ) ,
Estate
Eng ine 1 )                                                                Z 18 XE               Z 18 XEL               Z 20 N ET             Z 22 YH

Max imum speed2)
 Manual tra nsmission                                                      –                     –                      –                     –
 Sport transmission                                                        124; 199              119; 192               138; 222              132; 212
 Automatic transmission                                                    –                     –                      –                     129; 208
 CVTronic                                                                  112; 180              –                      –                     –

Eng ine 1 )                                                                Z 32 SE               Y 20 DTH               Y 22 DTR              Y 30 DT

Max imum      speed2)
 Manual tra nsmission                                                      149; 239              116; 186               123/126;1983 )/202    138; 222
 Sport transmission                                                        –                     –                      –                     –
 Automatic transmission                                                    147; 237              –                      124; 199              137; 220
 CVTronic                                                                  –                     –                      –                     –




1)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 256, 257.
2)
     The ma xim um s peed is a ch ieva ble with a m aximum of h alf p ayloa d. Optiona l eq uipm ent m ay reduce th e specified m aximum speed of the vehicle.
3)
     Co untry-specific versio n.



                                                                                                                                                                 259
Fuel cons umption, CO2 e miss ions        The direc tiv e is oriented to actual driving   The figures given m ust not be taken as a
Directive 80/1268/EEC (last c hanged by   practices: Urban driv ing is rated at approx.   guarantee for the actual fuel consumption
                                          1/ and extra-urb an driving with approx .
1999/100/EC) has ap plied for the           3                                             of a p artic ular vehicle.
                                          2/ (urban and extra-urban consum ption).
measurement of fuel consumption since       3                                             The calculation of fuel consumption as
1996.                                     Cold starts and acceleration phases are         spec ified by directive 1999/100/EC takes
                                          also tak en into consideration.                 acc ount of the v ehicle’ s kerbweight,
                                          The specification of CO 2 emission is also a    ascertained in accordance with these
                                          constituent of the directive.                   regula tions. O ptional extras ma y result in
                                                                                          slightly higher fuel consumption and CO 2
                                                                                          emission lev els than those quoted.
                                                                                          To conv ert l/100km into mp g, divide 282 by
                                                                                          number of litres/100km.
                                                                                          S aving fuel – see page 160.




260
Fuel cons umption (app rox . l/100 km) , CO2 emis sion (ap prox . g/km) ,
Saloon
Eng ine 1 )                                                             Z 18 XE              Z 18 XEL          Z 20 N ET       Z 22 SE

Manual transm ission / sport transm ission / automatic
transm ission / C VTronic
   urban                                                                10.4/10.7/– /11. 6   10.4/10. 7/–/–    –/12.8/–/–      –   /11.5/13. 4/–
   extra-urban                                                           5.5/ 5.8/–/ 6.3/     5. 5/ 5.8/– /–   –/ 6.6/– /–     –   / 6.3/ 6.6/–
   total                                                                 7.3/ 7.6/–/ 8.3      7. 3/ 7.6/– /–   –/ 8.9/– /–     –   / 8.2/ 9.1/–
   CO 2                                                                 175/ 182/– / 199      175/ 182/–/–     –/ 214/–/–      –   / 197/ 218/–

Eng ine 1 )                                                             Z 32 S E             Y 20 DTH          Y 22 DTR        Y 30 DT
Manual transm ission / sport transm ission / automatic
transm ission / C VTronic
   urban                                                                14.0/–/15.4/–        7. 6/–/–/–        8.2/–/10.3/–    9.8/– /10.7/–
   extra-urban                                                           7.3/– / 7. 5/–      4. 5/–/–/–        4.7/–/ 5.4/–    5.4/– / 5. 5/–
   total                                                                 9.8/– /10.4/–       5. 6/–/–/–        6.0/–/ 7.2/–    7.0/– / 7. 4/–
   CO 2                                                                 235/–/ 250/–         151/–/–/–         162/– / 194/–   189/–/ 200/–




1)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 256, 257.


                                                                                                                                                261
Fuel cons umption (app rox . l/100 km) , CO2 emission (approx. g /km ),
Estate
Eng ine 1 )                                                          Z 18 XE           Z 18 XEL      Z 20 NET         Z 22 YH

Manual transm ission / sport transm ission / automatic
transm ission / C VTronic
   urban                                                              –/11.0/–/11.9    –/11.0/–/–    – /13. 1/–/–     – /10. 6/12.1/–
   extra-urban                                                        –/ 6. 1/–/ 6.6   –/ 6.1/– /–   – / 6.9/–/–      – / 6.6/ 6.9/–
   total                                                              –/ 7. 9/–/ 8.6   –/ 7.9/– /–   – / 9.2/–/–      – / 8.1/ 8.8/–
   CO 2                                                               –/ 190/–/ 206    –/ 190/–/–    – / 221/–/–      – /194/ 211/–

Eng ine 1 )                                                          Z 32 SE           Y 20 DTH      Y 22 DTR         Y 30 DT
Manual transm ission / sport transm ission / automatic
transm ission / C VTronic
   urban                                                             14.3/–/15.6/–     7.9/– /–/–    8.5/– /10. 5/–   10. 1/–/11.0/–
   extra-urban                                                        7. 6/–/ 7.7/–    4.8/– /–/–    5.0/– / 5.6/–     5.7/–/ 5. 8/–
   total                                                             10.1/–/10.6/–     5.9/– /–/–    6.3/– / 7.4/–     7.3/–/ 7. 7/–
   CO 2                                                               242/–/ 254/–     159/–/– /–    170/–/ 200 /–    197/–/ 208/–




1)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 256, 257.


262
Weights, payload and roof load                                 The combined total of front a nd rear ax le   Roof loa d
The p ayload is the difference between the                     loa ds must not exceed the perm issible       The permissib le roof load is 75 kg
permitted g ross vehicle weight (see                           gross vehicle weight. For exa mple, if the    (Estate with roof railing – 100 kg). The roof
identification plate, page 250) and the EC                     front ax le is bearing its m aximum           load is the combined weight of the roof
kerbweight.                                                    permissib le load, the rear axle can only     rack and the load .
                                                               bear a load that is eq ua l to the gross
To ca lc ulate the kerbweight, enter the data                                                                Do not drive faster than 75 mph
                                                               vehicle weig ht m inus the front axle load.
for your vehicle below:                                                                                      (120 km /h). C heck fastening at frequent
z Kerb weight from                                             See the identification plate or v ehicle      interva ls and tig hten.
  Ta ble 1,                                                    docum ents for permissib le ax le loads.      For safety reasons and to avoid damage to
  page 264                      + ... ..... .... .. kg                                                       the roof, we recommend that the use of
z Ad ditional w eight of                                                                                     Vauxhall-approved roof rack systems for
  equipment versions from                                                                                    y our v ehicle. A Va ux ha ll Authorised
  Ta ble 2, p age 266                + ... .... ..... .. k g                                                 Repairer w ould be p leased to advise y ou.

z Weight of heavy accessories                                                                                Driving hints – see page 158.
  from Ta ble 3,
  page 267                  + ... ..... .... .. kg
The total                            = ... ..... .... .. kg
is the EC k erbweight.
O ptional equipment and accessories
increase the kerbweight, w hich means that
the p ayload will also change slig htly.
Note the weights given in the vehicle
documents.




                                                                                                                                                      263
Weights (kg) : Table 1, Kerbwe ight 1) , Saloon
Model                        Engi ne2 )            4-door                                                          5-door
                                                   Manual               Automatic                C VTronic         Ma nual               Automatic       C VTronic
                                                   transm ission        transmission                               transmission          tra nsmission
Vec tra                      Z 18 XE               1375                 –                        1393              1390                  –               1425

                             Z 18 XEL              1375                 –                        –                 1390                  –               –
                             Z 20 N ET             1490                 –                        –                 1505                  –               –

                             Z 22 S E              1435                 1465                     –                 1450                  1480            –
                             Z 32 S E              1503                 1528                     –                 1503                  1528            –

                             Y 20 DTH              1490                 –                        –                 1505                  –               –
                             Y 22 DTR              1505                 1530                     –                 1503                  1528            –

                             Y 30 DT               –                    –                        –                 –                     –               –
Vec tra w ith                Z 18 XE               1395                 –                        1413              1410                  –               1445
air conditioning
or electronic                Z 18 XEL              1395                 –                        –                 1410                  –               –
air conditioning             Z 20 N ET             1510                 –                        –                 1525                  –               –
system
                             Z 22 S E              1455                 1485                     –                 1470                  1500            –
                             Z 32 S E              1523                 1548                     –                 1523                  1548            –

                             Y 20 DTH              1510                 –                        –                 1525                  –               –
                             Y 22 DTR              1525                 1550                     –                 1523                  1548            –

                             Y 30 DT               1613                 1638                     –                 1650                  1675            –


1)
     According to EC D irective, inclu ding ass umed weights for d river (68 kg), lugg ag e (7 kg ) a nd a ll flu id s (ta nk 9 0 % fu ll).
2)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 256, 257.




264
Weights (kg) : Table 1, Kerbwe ight 1) , Estate
Model                        Engi ne2 )                                 Estate
                                                                        M anual                                  Automatic                    C VTronic
                                                                        transmission                             transm ission
Vec tra                      Z 18 XE                                    1470                                     –                            1505

                             Z 18 XEL                                   1470                                     –                            –
                             Z 20 N ET                                  1565                                     –                            –

                             Z 22 Y H                                   1530                                     1560                         –
                             Z 32 S E                                   1605                                     1613                         –

                             Y 20 DTH                                   1580                                     –                            –
                             Y 22 DTR                                   1600                                     1613                         –

                             Y 30 DT                                    –                                        –                            –
Vec tra w ith                Z 18 XE                                    1490                                     –                            1525
air conditioning
or electronic                Z 18 XEL                                   1490                                     –                            –
air conditioning             Z 20 N ET                                  1585                                     –                            –
system
                             Z 22 Y H                                   1550                                     1580                         –
                             Z 32 S E                                   1625                                     1633                         –

                             Y 20 DTH                                   1600                                     –                            –
                             Y 22 DTR                                   1620                                     1633                         –

                             Y 30 DT                                    1705                                     1730                         –




1)
     According to EC D irective, inclu ding ass umed weights for d river (68 kg), lugg ag e (7 kg ) a nd a ll flu id s (ta nk 9 0 % fu ll).
2)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 256, 257.


                                                                                                                                                          265
Weights (kg) : Table 2, Additional weight of e quipme nt versions
Sal oon
Eng ine 1 )                                       Z 18 XE,   Z 20 N ET   Z 22 S E   Z 32 S E   Y 20 DTH   Y 22 DTR   Y 30 DT
                                                  Z 18 XEL
LS / Club / Expression                            21         11          11         11         21         21         11

Elegance                                          42         32          32         32         42         42         32
Elite                                             49         39          39         39         49         49         39

SRi / GS i / SXi                                  31         21          21         21         31         31         21


Est ate
Eng ine 1 )                                       Z 18 XE,   Z 20 N ET   Z 22 YH    Z 32 S E   Y 20 DTH   Y 22 DTR   Y 30 DT
                                                  Z 18 XEL
LS / Club / Expression                            16         7           7          7          7          7          7

Elegance                                          41         32          32         32         32         32         32
Elite                                             48         39          39         39         39         39         39

SRi / GS i / SXi                                  31         22          22         22         22         22         22




1)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 256, 257.


266
Weights (kg) : Table 3, He avy accessories
Sal oon
Accessories               Sun roof           Towing equip ment

Weight                    17                 22


Est ate
Accessories               Sun roof           Towing equip ment

Weight                    17                 33




                                                                 267
Tyres                                            If you use winter ty res 3, the spare wheel       Whe els
Restricti ons                                    may still be fitted with a summ er tyre. If you   Wheel bolt tightening torque: 110 Nm.
Not a ll tyres ava ila ble on the market         use the spare wheel the vehicle’s handling
                                                                                                   O n vehicles with alloy wheels 3 the spa re
currently meet the structural requirem ents.     may be a ltered. Ob tain a repla cement for
                                                 the faulty tyre as soon a s p ossible, and        wheel m ay have a steel rim.
We recommend that you consult a
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer concerning          ha ve the wheel balanced and fitted to the        The spare wheel ma y have a smaller tyre
suitab le tyre mak es.                           vehicle.                                          and a sm aller rim: using the sp are wheel
                                                                                                   ma y cause d ifferent driving behaviour.
These ty res have und ergone special tests       Further inform ation – see page 187.
                                                                                                   Replace d efectiv e tyre as soon as possible,
to establish their reliab ility , safety and                                                       bala nce wheel and hav e it fitted to the
specific suitability for Vaux hall vehicles.     Tyre chains
                                                                                                   vehicle.
Despite continuous ma rk et monitoring, we       Restri ctions
are unab le to assess these attributes for       Ty re c hains may be used on the front
                                                 wheels only.                                      Tyre inflation pressure s in bar 1)
other tyres, even if they hav e been g ra nted
                                                                                                   The specified ty re pressures are valid for
approva l by the relevant authorities or in      Alw ays use fine mesh chains that add no          cold ty res. The increased ty re pressure
som e other form.                                more than 15 m m to the ty re tread and the       resulting from ex tensiv e d riv ing must not
Further information – see pa ge 184.             inboard sides (including chain lock).             be red uced. The specified pressures apply
                                                 Snow chains are not permitted on the              to both summer and winter ty res.
Winter tyre s                                    temporary spare wheel 3 115/70 R 16 and           Further information – see pa ges 184 to 187.
Tyres of size 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 18 or        tyre sizes 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 18 and
235/35 R 19 may not be used as winter            235/35 R 19.
tyres (M+ S tyres).
                                                 Further inform ation – see page 187.
O nly the winter tyres sp ecified on p age 274
may b e used on vehicles factory-fitted with
tyre eq uipm ent 235/35 R 19.




                                                                                                   1)
                                                                                                        1 ba r corresp on ds to 100 kPa .


268
(ctd.)                                     Saloon                                                 Ty re inflation    Tyre infla tion
Tyre inflation pressures in bar1) / ps i                                                          pressure with up   pressure with
                                                                                                  to 3 p ersons      full load

                                           Engine2 )                  Ty res                      Front     Rear     Front       Rear

                                           Z 18 XE,                   195/65   R 15,              2.0/29    2.2/32   2.2/32      2. 7/39
                                           Z 18 XEL                   205/55   R 16,
                                                                      215/55   R 16,
                                                                      215/50   R 17,
                                                                      225/45   R 17,
                                                                      225/45   R 18

                                           Z 20 N ET                  205/55 R 16 (M+ S)          2.4/35    2.4/35   2.5/36      3. 0/44

                                                                      215/55   R 16,              2.3/33    2.3/33   2.4/35      2. 9/42
                                                                      215/50   R 17,
                                                                      225/45   R 17,
                                                                      225/45   R 18

                                           Z 22 S E                   195/65 R 15,                2.3/33    2.3/33   2.5/36      3. 0/44
                                                                      205/55 R 16

                                                                      215/55   R 16,              2.2/32    2.2/32   2.3/33      2. 8/41
                                                                      215/50   R 17,
                                                                      225/45   R 17,
                                                                      225/45   R 18

                                           all                        T 115/70 R 16               4.2/61    4.2/61   4.2/61      4. 2/61
                                                                      (temporary spare) 3)




                                           2) Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ges 256, 25 7.
1)
     1 ba r corresp ond s to 100 kPa .     3)
                                             For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel – see p ag e 207.


                                                                                                                                           269
(ctd.)                                     Saloon                                                    Ty re inflation    Tyre infla tion
Tyre inflation pressures in bar1) / ps i                                                             pressure with up   pressure with
                                                                                                     to 3 p ersons      full load

                                           Engine2 )                  Ty res                         Front     Rear     Front       Rear

                                           Z 32 S E                   215/55 R   16 4 )              2.4/35    2.4/35   2.5/36      3. 0/44

                                                                      215/50 R 17 4 ),               2.6/38    2.4/35   2.7/39      3. 2/46
                                                                      225/45 R 17 4 ),
                                                                      225/45 R 18 4 )

                                                                      215/55 R 16 5 )                2.5/36    2.4/35   2.6/38      3. 1/45

                                                                      215/50 R 17 5 ),               2.7/39    2.4/35   2.8/41      3. 3/48
                                                                      225/45 R 17 5 ),
                                                                      225/45 R 18 5 )

                                           all                        T 115/70 R 16                  4.2/61    4.2/61   4.2/61      4. 2/61
                                                                      (temporary spare) 3)




                                           2)
                                                Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ges 256, 25 7.
                                           3)   For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel – see p ag e 207.
                                           4)
1)
     1 ba r corresp ond s to 100 kPa .          Versio n with ma nua l tra nsm is sio n.
                                           5)   Versio n with au tom atic tra nsm iss io n.


270
(ctd.)                                     Saloon                                                  Ty re inflation    Tyre infla tion
Tyre inflation pressures in bar1) / ps i                                                           pressure with up   pressure with
                                                                                                   to 3 p ersons      full load

                                           Engine2 )                Ty res                         Front     Rear     Front       Rear

                                           Y 20 DTH,                195/65 R 15,                   2.3/33    2.3/33   2.5/36      3. 0/44
                                           Y 22 DTR                 205/55 R 16

                                                                    215/55   R 16,                 2.2/32    2.2/32   2.3/33      2. 8/41
                                                                    215/50   R 17,
                                                                    225/45   R 17,
                                                                    225/45   R 18

                                           Y 30 DT                  215/55 R 16,                   2.6/38    2.4/35   2.7/39      3. 2/46
                                                                    215/50 R 17,
                                                                    225/45 R 18

                                                                    225/45 R 17                    2.7/39    2.4/35   2.8/41      3. 3/48

                                           all                      T 115/70 R 16                  4.2/61    4.2/61   4.2/61      4. 2/61
                                                                    (temporary spare) 3)




                                           2)
1)
     1 ba r corresp ond s to 100 kPa .        Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ges 256, 25 7.
                                           3) For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel – see p ag e 207.



                                                                                                                                            271
(ctd.)                                   Estat e                                                Ty re inflation    Tyre infla tion
Tyre inflation pressures in bar1)                                                               pressure with up   pressure with
                                                                                                to 3 p ersons      full load

                                         Engine2 )                  Ty res                      Front     Rear     Front       Rear

                                         Z 18 XE,                   195/65   R 15,              2.0/29    2.2/32   2.2/32      2. 7/39
                                         Z 18 XEL                   205/55   R 16,
                                                                    215/55   R 16,
                                                                    215/50   R 17,
                                                                    225/45   R 17,
                                                                    225/45   R 18

                                         Z 20 N ET                  205/55 R 16 (M+ S)          2.4/35    2.4/35   2.5/36      3. 0/44

                                                                    215/55   R 16,              2.3/33    2.3/33   2.4/35      2. 9/42
                                                                    215/50   R 17,
                                                                    225/45   R 17,
                                                                    225/45   R 18

                                         Z 22 Y H                   195/65 R 15(M+S ),          2.3/33    2.3/33   2.5/36      3. 0/44
                                                                    205/55 R 16

                                                                    215/55   R 16,              2.2/32    2.2/32   2.3/33      2. 8/41
                                                                    215/50   R 17,
                                                                    225/45   R 17,
                                                                    225/45   R 18

                                         all                        T 115/70 R 16               4.2/61    4.2/61   4.2/61      4. 2/61
                                                                    (temporary spare) 3)




                                         2) Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ges 256, 25 7.
1)
     1 ba r corresp ond s to 100 kPa .   3)
                                           For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel – see p ag e 207.


272
(ctd.)                                   Estat e                                                 Ty re inflation    Tyre infla tion
Tyre inflation pressures in bar1)                                                                pressure with up   pressure with
                                                                                                 to 3 p ersons      full load

                                         Engine2 )                Ty res                         Front     Rear     Front       Rear

                                         Z 32 S E                 215/55 R 16                    2.5/36    2.4/35   2.6/38      3. 1/45

                                                                  215/50 R 17,                   2.5/36    2.3/33   2.7/39      3. 2/46
                                                                  225/45 R 17,
                                                                  225/45 R 18

                                         Y 20 DTH,                195/65 R 15,                   2.3/33    2.3/33   2.5/36      3. 0/44
                                         Y 22 DTR                 205/55 R 16

                                                                  215/55   R 16,                 2.2/32    2.2/32   2.3/33      2. 8/41
                                                                  215/50   R 17,
                                                                  225/45   R 17,
                                                                  225/45   R 18

                                         Y 30 DT                  215/55 R 16,                   2.6/38    2.4/35   2.7/39      3. 2/46
                                                                  215/50 R 17,
                                                                  225/45 R 18

                                                                  225/45 R 17                    2.7/39    2.4/35   2.8/41      3. 3/48

                                         all                      T 115/70 R 16                  4.2/61    4.2/61   4.2/61      4. 2/61
                                                                  (temporary spare) 3)




                                         2)
1)
     1 ba r corresp ond s to 100 kPa .      Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ges 256, 25 7.
                                         3) For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel – see p ag e 207.



                                                                                                                                          273
(ctd.)                                   Saloon, Estate                                          Ty re inflation    Tyre infla tion
Tyre inflation pressures in bar1)        with 19-inch wheels                                     pressure with up   pressure with
                                                                                                 to 3 p ersons      full load

                                         Engine2 )                Ty res                         Front     Rear     Front       Rear

                                         Z 18   XE,               235/35 R 19                    2.6/38    2.3/33   2.8/41      3. 3/48
                                         Z 18   XEL,
                                         Z 20   N ET,             215/55 R 16 (M+ S),            2.3/33    2.3/33   2.5/36      3. 0/44
                                         Z 22   S E,              225/45 R 17 (M+ S)
                                         Z 22   Y H,
                                         Y 20   DTH,
                                         Y 22   DTR

                                         Z 32 S E                 235/35 R 19                    3.0/44    2.7/39   3.2/46      3. 5/51

                                                                  215/55 R 16 (M+ S),            2.6/38    2.6/38   2.7/39      3. 2/46
                                                                  225/45 R 17 (M+ S)

                                         all                      T 115/70 R 16                  4.2/61    4.2/61   4.2/61      4. 2/61
                                                                  (temporary spare) 3)




                                         2)
                                            Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ges 256, 25 7.
                                         3) For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel – see p ag e 207.
1)
     1 ba r corresp ond s to 100 kPa .



274
Electrical system

Battery         Voltage                       12 Volt

                Amp hours                     55 Ah / 66 Ah 3 / 70 Ah 3 / 72 Ah 3 / 85 Ah 3

Battery for rad io frequency remote control
of central locking system                     CR 20 32

Battery for remote control of
auxiliary hea ter / ventilation               AAA LR 06




                                                                                        275
Capacities (app rox . in litres)
Eng ine 1 )                                       Z 18 XE,   Z 20 NET   Z 22 SE   Z 22 YH   Z 32 SE   Y 20 DTH,   Y 30 DT
                                                  Z 18 XEL                                            Y 22 DTR

Cooling system for v ehicles
with manual transmission
  without air con. system                       5.5          7.4        7.1       7. 1      7.4       7.3         –
  with air con. system                          5.5          7.7        7.4       7. 4      7.7       7.6         8.3
  with a ir con. sy stem and aux iliary heating 6.0          8.2        7.9       7. 9      8.2       8.2         8.9
Cooling system for v ehicles
with automatic transmission or CVTronic
  without air conditioning sy stem                5.5        7.9        7.6       7. 6      7.9       7.8         –
  with air cond itioning system                   5.5        7.9        7.6       7. 6      7.9       7.8         8.3
  with air cond itioning system
  and aux iliary heating                          6.0        8.4        8.1       8. 1      8.4       8.4         8.9
Fuel tank (nominal capa city )
  Saloon                                          61         61         61        61        61        61          61
  Estate                                          60         60         60        60        60        60          60

Engine oil with filter change                     4.25       6.0        5.0       5. 0      4.75      5.5         7.25
  between MI N and M AX on dipstick               1.0        1.0        1.0       1. 0      1.0       1.0         1.3

Fluid container for wind screen wash system 2.9              2.9        2.9       2. 9      2.9       2.9         2.9
   with headlight wash system               5.6              5.6        5.6       5. 6      5.6       5.6         5.6




1)
     Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 256, 257.


276
Dimensions (approx. in mm)
                                   Saloon   Estate

O verall length                    4596     4822

Width                              1798     1798
Width with two ex terior mirrors   2036     2036

O verall height                    1460     1500
Wheelb ase                         2700     2830

Turning c ircle   diam eter 1 )    11.50    11.50




1)
     In metres.


                                                     277
Mounting dim ens ions of
towing e quipme nt with
re movable coupling ball bar,
Ve rsion with turn knob 3
All dimensions refer to fac tory -fitted
towing equipm ent.
Dimension               mm

A                       334
B                       1061
C 1)                    514.5
D 1)                    480.5
E 1)                    50
F                       492.5

G                       486.5
H                       218
I                       495
J                       492.5
K                       201

     We recom mend hav ing
     towing equip ment retro-fitted
     by a Vauxhall Authorised R epairer.




1)
     The atta ch ment p oint is not a va ila ble on
     all va rian ts.



278
Mounting dim ens ions of towing
equipment with rem ovable coupling
ball bar, version with levers 3
All dimensions refer to fac tory -fitted
towing equipm ent.
Dimension                mm
A                        334
B                        1061
C 1)                     514.5
     1)
D                        480.5
     1)
E                        50
F                        492.5
G                        486.5
H                        218
I                        495

J                        492.5
K                        201

      We recom mend hav ing
      towing equip ment retro-fitted
      by a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.




1)
      The atta ch ment p oint is not a va ila ble on
      all va rian ts.




                                                       279
Mounting dim ens ions of towing
equipment with pivoting coupling
ball bar 3
All dimensions refer to fac tory -fitted
towing equipm ent.
Dimension          mm
A                  396.5
B                  157.5
C                  386

D                  74
E                  630
F                  590
G                  491
H                  486
I                  480

J                  379.5


    We recom mend hav ing
    towing equipment retro-fitted
    by a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.




280
281
                                                              Automatic transm ission ............. 22 , 144
Index   A
                                                                Automatic mode ........................ 144
        AB S (Anti-lock Brake System ) ........... 182          Driv ing programme .................... 146
        Ac cessories ............. 110, 115, 204, 205
                                                                Fault ...................................... 148
        Ac cessory socket ....................... 74 , 89       Interruption of p ow er supply ......... 149
        Ad aptive Forward Lighting ............. 118
                                                                Kickd ow n ................................. 147
          Bulb replacem ent ...................... 223          Manual mode ........................... 145
          Driving abroad ......................... 119
                                                                Selector lev er ................ 22 , 144 , 145
        Air conditioning system .................. 126          Selector lev er lock ...................... 145
        Air intak e ................................... 142
                                                                Winter programme ..................... 147
        Air outlet .................................... 142   Automatic wiping .......................... 19
        Air qua lity sensor ......................... 135
                                                              Auxiliary heating .......................... 140
        Air recirculation system ........... 128, 138           Program ming ........................... 140
        Air vents .................................... 129
                                                                Remote control .......................... 141
        Airba gs ..................................... 100
        Ala rm ......................................... 65   B
        Ala rm system ................................ 63     Battery ........................ 159 , 242 , 275
        Alterna tor .................................... 34     Interruption of
        Anti-corrosion service .................... 235         power supply ......... 60 , 121 , 149 , 157
        Anti-freeze ................................. 238     Before starting off .......................... 23
        Anti-freeze protection ............. 238, 242         Belt tensioners .............................. 96
        Anti-knock q ua lity of fuel ............... 162      Bleeding, diesel fuel sy stem ............. 199
          O ctane number ................. 256, 257           Bonnet ........................................ 68
        Anti-theft alarm sy stem ................... 63       Brake system ................................ 34
        Anti-theft locking system .................. 58       Brakes ....................................... 180
          Towing equip ment ..................... 193           ABS ........................................ 182
        Anti-theft protection ....................... 24        Brake fluid ............................... 240
        Aq ua planing ............................... 186       Brake lights .............................. 226
        Arm rest ....................................... 71     Brake servo unit ......................... 158
        Ashtray ................................ 90, 119        Foot brak e ............................... 180
        Automatic air recirculation mode ...... 138             Handbrake .............................. 181
        Automatic anti-da zzle interior mirror . 114          Bulb replacem ent ......................... 218
                                                              Bulbs .................................. 115 , 218




282
                                                         TC (Traction C ontrol system) ........ 169
C                                                                                                           D
                                                         Tyre pressure control sy stem ........ 176
Ca pacities ................................. 276                                                           Data .................................... 55 , 250
                                                       Control indica tors ...................... 12 , 33
Ca ra van / trailer towing ........... 158 , 188                                                            Date ..................................... 44 , 45
                                                         Belt tensioners ............................ 96
Ca r Pass ........................................ 4                                                        Day tim e running lights ................... 116
                                                         Brake system ............................ 181
Ca re ......................................... 245                                                         Decommissioning ......................... 244
                                                       Cool box ...................................... 75
Ca ta lytic converter .......... 164 , 167 , 199                                                            Demisting a nd Defrosting
                                                       Coolant ..................................... 238
Central locking system .................... 58                                                                with the air conditioning sy stem ..... 133
                                                       Coolant level ............................... 239
Centre console lighting .................. 118                                                              Demisting a nd defrosting
                                                       Coolant temp erature d isplay ............. 40
Changing the battery                                                                                          Windows ................................. 132
                                                       Coolant thermometer ...................... 40
   Remote control .............. 57, 142 , 275                                                                with the electronic
                                                       Cooling ...................................... 132
Changing ty re / wheel type ............. 184                                                                 air conditioning system ................ 137
                                                       Correcting time .............................. 45
Changing wheels ......................... 208                                                               Diesel fuel filter ............................ 238
                                                       Coupling sock et load ..................... 196
Check control........................... 30, 46                                                             Diesel fuel system .................. 199 , 238
                                                       Courtesy light .............................. 118
Child restraint systems ............ 110 , 115                                                              Dimensions ................................. 277
                                                       Courtesy light delay ...................... 118
Child safety locks .................... 54 , 121                                                            Dipped beam ......................... 16 , 116
                                                       Courtesy lights
Ciga rette lig hter ..................... 89 , 119                                                            Bulb replacement ................ 219 , 222
                                                         Bulb replacem ent ...................... 230
Clim ate control............................ 126                                                            Display ..................... 37 , 41 , 146 , 153
                                                       Cruise control .............................. 172
Clutch operation .......................... 159                                                             Door locks ............................. 54 , 248
                                                       Curtain airbags ........................... 103
CO 2 emissions ............................. 260                                                            Doors ......................................... 38
                                                       Curve lighting ......................... 28, 118
Code numbers ................................ 4                                                             Door-to-d oor lighting ...................... 17
                                                       CVTronic .................................... 150
Cold start .................................. 159                                                           Drink holders ................................ 92
                                                         Automatic mode in stages ........... 150
Colour inform ation d isplay ............... 41                                                             Driver’s seat with climate control .. 26 , 130
                                                         C ontinuously v ariable
Control indicator                                                                                           Driving ab road ..................... 162 , 233
                                                         automatic m od e ....................... 150
   ABS (Anti-lock Brake System ) ....... 183                                                                  Head lig hts ............................... 119
                                                         Driving programm es .................. 154
   Airbag ................................... 105                                                             Toll system ................................ 52
                                                         Fault ...................................... 156
   Bra ke pad wear ........................ 180          Interruption of power supply ......... 157         Driving hints ................................ 158
   Cruise control ........................... 172
                                                         K ic kdown ................................ 155
   Engine electronics ..................... 166          Manual mode ........................... 150
   ESP
                                                         Selector lever loc k ...................... 151
   (Electronic Stab ility Prog ra mme) ... 170           Winter programm e .................... 155
   Exhaust .................................. 166
   Immobiliser ............................... 55
   Park ing distance sensors ............. 175



                                                                                                                                                          283
E                                                    F                                                     G
Ec onomical driving ................. 158 , 160      Fan ............................. 127, 235, 236       Genuine Vaux hall Parts
Electric seat a djustment ................... 79     Filling station                                        a nd Accessories ........................... 25
Electric sun roof ........................... 123       C apacities ............................... 276    Glove compartment ....................... 91
Electric windows .......................... 120         Engine oil lev el .......................... 236   Glove compartment lighting ............ 119
Electrical system ............. 212 , 243 , 275         Fuel .......................... 162, 256, 257        Bulb replacement ....................... 230
Electro-hy draulic                                      Ignition key ................................. 4   Graphical information disp lay ........... 41
 power assisted steering ...... 13, 37 , 158            O pening the bonnet ..................... 68       Gross Vehicle Weight ..................... 263
Electro-hy draulic                                      Tyre infla tion pressure ......... 161, 268
 power-assisted steering fluid ......... 251            Vehicle data ............................ 251
Electronic air conditioning system ..... 134            Windscreen wa sh system ............. 242
Electronic components .................. 243         First-a id kit, ................... 115, 204, 205
Electronic immobiliser ..................... 55      FlexOrga nizer ............................... 86
Electronic Stability Programm e ........ 170         Fluid container,
Engine code .................. 251 , 256 , 257        windsc reen w ash system ............... 242
Engine control indicator ................. 166       Fog tail lig ht
Engine oil............................. 236 , 252       Bulb replacem ent ...................... 226
Engine oil change ........................ 237       Fog tail lig hts .............................. 116
Engine oil consumption ................. 236         Foot brake ................................. 180
Engine oil filter ............................ 237   Front fog lights ............................ 116
Engine oil level ....................... 38 , 236       Bulb replacem ent ...................... 225
Engine sp eed .............................. 159     Front passenger a irba g ................. 100
Engine wash ............................... 248      Fuel ...................... 162, 163, 256, 257
Env ironmenta l protection .. 236 , 237 , 245        Fuel consumption ............ 160, 162, 259
ES P (Electronic S tability Programme) . 170         Fuel filter ................................... 238
Ex haust control indicator ............... 166       Fuel gauge ................................... 40
Ex haust ga ses ............................. 167    Fuel level ..................................... 40
Ex haust system ........................... 167      Fuel sy stem, diesel ........................ 199
Ex terior mirrors .................. 8 , 114 , 128   Fuses ........................................ 212




284
H                                                     I                                                     L
Halogen headlight system .............. 219           Identification plate ....................... 250      Language selection ........................ 43
  Bulb replacement ...................... 219         If you have a problem ................... 232         Lashing eyes ................................ 86
  Driv ing abroad ......................... 119       Ignition switch ...................... 9 , 23 , 55    Leather trim ................................ 247
Handbrak e ........................... 24 , 181       Ignition system ............... 235, 242, 243         Light sw itch .................................. 16
Haza rd warning lights ..................... 18       Immobiliser ................................... 55    Lighting ................................ 16 , 116
Head restraints .................... 7 , 31, 70       Information display ......................... 41        Driv ing abroad .......................... 119
Headlight flash ............................. 16      Infotainment sy stem ....................... 52       Loading .............................. 195 , 263
Headlight                                             Inspection sy stem ......................... 234      Locking doors ............................ 4 , 58
 range adjustm ent .......... 117 , 179 , 218         Instrument illumination .................. 117        Locking from the inside ................... 59
Headlight sw itc h ..................... 16 , 116        Bulb replacem ent ...................... 231       Locks ........................................ 248
Headlight wash sy stem ............ 19 , 242          Instrument p anel ............................ 10     Lubricants .................... 236 , 251 , 252
Headlights ................................... 16     Instruments ............................. 33 , 39     Luggage compartment
  Da ytime running lights ............... 116         Interior mirror ................................. 8     Bulb replacement ....................... 230
  Driv ing abroad ......................... 119          Universal remote control ............... 66          Extension .................................. 82
  Fog lights ................................ 116     Interruption of power sup ply . 47 , 51, 121            FlexO rg aniz er ............................ 86
  Reversing lights ........................ 118          Electric windows ........................ 121        Lashing ey es ............................. 86
  Warning device .......................... 24           Selector lever loc k ............... 149, 157        Lighting .................................. 119
Heated exterior mirrors ............ 20 , 128         J                                                       Loading ........................... 195 , 263
Heated front seats ....................... 130                                                                Locking .................................... 61
                                                      Jack .......................................... 208
Heated rear seats ........................ 130                                                                Opening ................................... 62
                                                      Jump leads ................................. 200
Heated rear window ................ 20 , 128                                                                  Safety net ................................. 84
Heating ............................... 126 , 131     K                                                     Luggage compartment cover ....... 83 , 84
  Seats ..................................... 130     Key                                                   Lumbar support ......................... 6 , 80
  with the air conditioning system .... 133             Ignition lock ...................... 9 , 23 , 55
  with the electronic                                   Locking doors ............................. 58
  air cond itioning system ............... 136          Remove .................................... 24
Height adjustment                                       Starting the engine ............. 9 , 23 , 55
  Seat belt ................................... 98    Key numbers, ................................. 4
  Seats ......................................... 6   Keys ........................................... 54
  Steering wheel.............................. 9
Horn ........................................... 18




                                                                                                                                                          285
M                                                     O                                                      R
M+S tyres ...................... 187 , 266 , 268      Octane num bers ............. 162, 256, 257            Rad io .................................... 30 , 52
Main beam ........................... 16 , 116        Odometer .................................... 39       Rad io equipment (CB) ..................... 53
  Bulb replacement ................ 220 , 222         Oil change ................................. 237       Rad io frequecy remote control
  Control indicator ......................... 35      Oil consum ption ........................... 236         Aux ilia ry heating ....................... 141
Maintenance ......................... 25 , 234        Oil filter c ha nge ........................... 237      Central lock ing sy stem ................. 56
  Air c onditioning sy stem .............. 143        Oil level ..................................... 236      Univ ersal rem ote control ............... 66
  Anti-freeze protection ................ 238         Oil pressure .................................. 33     Rain sensor ..................... 19 , 240 , 246
  Bra ke fluid .............................. 240     Oil quality .................................. 253     Reading lights ....................... 118 , 119
  Bra kes ................................... 180     Oil v iscosity ................................ 255    Rear light cluster .......................... 116
  Catalytic conv erter .................... 167       Oils .................................... 236, 252       Bulb replacement ....................... 226
  Engine oil .......................... 236 , 237     Operating temp erature .................. 159          Rear window wash system ... 20 , 242 , 246
  Fuel consumption ...................... 161         Outsid e tempera ture gauge .............. 46          Refuelling ................................... 163
  Ty re pressure ........................... 184      Overrun .............................. 159, 161          Fuel filler cap ............................ 163
  Ty res ............................... 185 , 186                                                           Relays ....................................... 212
                                                      P
  Windscreen wiper ...................... 240                                                                Remote control
Mirrors ................................... 8 , 114   Pa intwork damage ....................... 247            Aux ilia ry heating ....................... 141
Misted w indows ......... 20, 132 , 133 , 137         Pa rk ing distance sensors ................ 174          Central lock ing sy stem ................. 56
Mobile telephone ........................... 53       Pa rk ing ................................. 24, 174      Steering wheel ........................... 30
                                                      Pa rk ing lights ........................... 16 , 17     Univ ersal rem ote control ............... 66
N                                                       Bulb replacem ent ...................... 224         Replacement keys .......................... 54
Numb er plate lights                                  Pa rk ing the vehicle ......................... 24     Reversing lights ............................ 118
  Bulb replacement ...................... 229         Pa rts .................................... 25, 115      Bulb replacement ....................... 226
Numb er plate lighting ................... 229        Pedals ....................................... 159     Roof load ................ 88 , 158 , 161 , 263
Numb er plates ............................ 244       Perform ance ............................... 259       Roof racks .................... 161 , 188 , 263
                                                      Petrol ........................... 162, 256, 257       Running-in .................................. 158
                                                      Pinking ...................................... 162       Brakes .................................... 180
                                                      Pollen filter ................................. 143
                                                      Position mem ory ................... 8 , 56 , 80
                                                      Preheating ................................... 35
                                                      Pushing, towing ........................... 199




286
                                                       Speed ................................ 160, 161         Towing eye .......................... 202 , 203
S
                                                         Fuel consum ption ............... 160, 161            Traction Control sy stem .................. 168
Safeguard against                                      Speedometer ................................ 39         Transm ission, automatic ............ 22 , 144
 unauthorised use ................... 4 , 9, 24
                                                       Starter switch ................................. 9         Automatic mode ........................ 144
Safety ......................................... 94    Starting the engine ......... 9 , 23 , 55, 199             Driv ing programme .................... 146
Safety acc essories ..... 110 , 115 , 204 , 205
                                                         Self-help ................................. 199          Fault ...................................... 148
Safety net .................................... 84     Steering colum n lock ................... 9 , 24           Interruption of p ow er supply ......... 149
Safety systems .............................. 94
                                                       Steering wheel adjustm ent ................. 9             Kickd ow n ................................. 147
Sav ing energ y ............................. 160      Steering wheel rem ote control ............ 30             Selector lev er ..................... 144 , 145
Seat adjustment ........................ 5, 79
                                                       Stowage compartments .............. 71 , 91                Selector lev er lock ...................... 145
Seat belts ........................ 95, 98 , 247       Sun blind ................................... 125          Winter programme ..................... 147
Seat occupancy recognition ............ 105
                                                       Sun roof ..................................... 123      Transm ission, CVTronic .................. 150
Seats ........................................ 5 , 6   Sun shade ........................... 124, 125          Travel Assistant ........................ 27 , 72
   Extending the luggage compa rtm ent 82
                                                       System setting s .............................. 42      Trea d depth ................................ 186
   heated ................................... 130                                                              Trip comp uter .......................... 29 , 48
   with clim ate control .............. 26 , 130       T
                                                                                                               Trip odometer ............................... 39
Selector lever ........................ 144 , 151      Ta bles, ................................... 27 , 76    Triple information display ................ 41
Selector lever lock ...... 22, 144 , 145 , 151         Ta chom eter .................................. 39      Turn lighting ........................... 28 , 118
   Interrup tion of power sup ply .. 149 , 157         Ta il lights ................................... 116    Turn signal lig hts ........................... 17
Self-diagnosis .................. 97, 105 , 183          Bulb replacem ent ...................... 226          Turn signals
Self-help .................................... 199     Ta ilg ate ....................................... 61      Bulb replacement ................ 225 , 226
   Automatic transmission .............. 149           Ta nk                                                   Twin Audio .................................. 30
   CVTronic ................................ 157         Fuel gauge ................................ 40        Tyre chains .......................... 187 , 268
   Elec tric sun roof ........................ 124     Technical data ............................ 250         Tyre condition .............................. 185
   Elec tric wind ow s ....................... 121     Temperature regula tion .......... 127, 136             Tyre infla tion pressure ...... 176 , 184 , 268
   Information display ..................... 44        Temporary spa re wheel .......... 187, 207              Tyre pressure control sy stem ............ 176
   Radio frequecy remote control ....... 57            The first 600 miles (1000 km) ........... 158
Service Booklet .............................. 25      Thigh support ............................... 80
Service interval display ............. 32 , 234        Tig htening torque ................. 212, 268
Service work .......................... 25 , 234       Tim e ...................................... 44 , 45
Side airbags ............................... 102       Toll system s .................................. 52
Signal system ................................ 16      Tools ........................................ 208
Spa re keys ................................... 54     Towing ...................................... 202
Spa re wheel .................. 205 , 206 , 208        Towing equipment ........................ 189


                                                                                                                                                             287
U                                                    W                                                   X
Units of m easure ........................... 43     Warning buzzers ............................ 24     Xenon head lig ht system ................. 222
Unlead ed fuel .......... 162 , 164 , 256 , 257      Warning messages ......................... 42         Bulb replacement ....................... 222
Used oil ............................... 236 , 237   Warning triangle, ............ 115, 204, 205          Driv ing abroad .......................... 119
                                                     Weights ..................................... 263
V
                                                     Wheels ...................................... 184
Vehicle care ...............................   245   Wheels, tyres ............................... 184
Vehicle decomm issioning ...............       244   Windows
Vehicle Identification Number .........        251     Demisting
Vehicle recommissioning ................       244     and d efrosting ........ 20, 132, 133, 137
Ventilation .................... 126 , 131 ,   138   Windscreen wash sy stem .................. 19
                                                       Anti-freeze protec tion ................. 242
                                                       C apacities ............................... 276
                                                       Fluid conta iner ......................... 242
                                                     Windscreen wiper .................... 19, 240
                                                     Winter op eration
                                                       Battery ................................... 159
                                                       C oolant, a nti-freeze ................... 238
                                                       Engine oil ................................ 255
                                                       Fuel consum ption ...................... 161
                                                       Fuel for diesel engines ................ 163
                                                       Heating ........................... 126, 133
                                                       Locks ..................................... 248
                                                       Tyre chains ....................... 187, 268
                                                       Window demisting
                                                       and d efrosting ................... 132, 133
                                                       Windscreen wa sh system,
                                                       anti-freeze p rotection ................. 242
                                                     Winter tyres ......................... 187, 268




288

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Categories:
Tags: Opel, Vectra, Manual
Stats:
views:4803
posted:6/5/2012
language:English
pages:290
Description: Opel Vectra C Manual